MT1000A Operation Manual English 15 0 PDF

MT1000A
MU100010A
Network Master Pro
Operation Manual
15th Edition
For safety and warning information, please read this

manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
ANRITSU CORPORATION
Document No. M-W3682AE-15.0

MT1000A MU100010A
Network Master Pro
Operation Manual
25 June 2014 (First Edition)

17 March 2017 (15th Edition)
Copyright © 2014-2017, ANRITSU CORPORATION.

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior
written permission of the publisher.
The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
Printed in Japan
2
About This Manual
The documentation for MT1000A Network Master Pro applies to the instrument
with the MU100010A 10Gig Multirate Module installed. This operation manual
describes both the basic operation of the instrument as well as the operations
available via interface options and predefined applications/tests.
MT1000A/MU100010A Network Master Pro Operation Manual (this manual)

Operations for the MT1000A Network Master Pro mainframe with 10G
Multirate module (MU100010A) and High Performance GPS Disciplined
Oscillator (MU100090A) are described.
MT1000A MU100010A Network Master Pro Quick Reference Guide
A printed quick user's guide that introduces the basic operation of the
instrument.
MT1000A Network Master Pro MT1100A Network Master Flex
Remote Scripting Operation Manual
Operations of the command-based Remote Control function are described.
Manual structure
The contents of the manual is structured in the following way:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter 2 - Configuration
Chapter 3 - Human-Machine-Interface
Chapter 4 - Graphical User Interface
Chapter 5 - SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn Applications
Chapter 6 - Ethernet Application
Chapter 7 - OTN Applications
Chapter 8 - CPRI/OBSAI Applications
Chapter 9 - Fibre Channel (FC) Applications
Chapter 10 - Utility Applications
Chapter 11 - Specifications
Chapter 12 - Support
Chapter 4 consists of a general introduction to the GUI. Chapters 5-9 contain

descriptions of each screen, sub-screen and major dialog. The descriptions are
provided in the following order:
Setup and result screens for each application. The applications are described
in the same order as they appear on the application selector screen.
Ports setup screens and status information for each interface type.
Sub-screens and dialogs boxes are described under the main screen from which
they are activated/launched.
This operation manual assumes the reader has the following basic knowledge:
Ethernet, SDH/SONET, PDH/DSn, OTN, CPRI/OBSAI, Fibre Channel, handling
optical parts
3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
0 Table of Contents 4
1 Introduction 11
1.1 Mainframe 12
1.2 10G Multirate Module 13
1.3 High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator 13
1.4 Symbols and Conventions 14
1.4.1 Symbols Used in Manual 14
1.4.2 Safety Symbols Used on Equipment 14
1.4.3 Notes 14
1.4.4 Hints 14
1.4.5 Option 15
1.5 For Safety 16
1.5.1 Dangers 16
1.5.2 Warnings 16
1.5.3 Cautions 18
1.5.4 Cautions Against Computer Virus Infection 19
1.6 Precautions 20
1.6.1 Installation 20
1.6.2 ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) 20
1.6.3 Optical Surfaces 21
1.6.4 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables 21
1.6.5 Caution when handling MU100090A 23
1.6.6 Ventilation 23
1.6.7 Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use 23
2 Configuration 25
2.1 Delivered Accessories 26
2.1.1 Standard Accessories 26
2.1.2 Optional Accessories 26
2.2 Mains Power Adapter 28
2.2.1 Connecting Mains Power Adapter 28
2.3 Rechargeable Battery 29
2.3.1 Installing or Replacing Battery 29
2.3.2 Charging Battery in Fast Mode 30
2.3.3 Charging Battery in Normal Mode 30
2.3.4 Battery Status Information 30
2.4 Measurement Cables 31
2.4.1 Connecting Measurement Cables 31
2.5 Support Stand and Carrying Strap 32
2.5.1 Support Stand 32
2.5.2 Carrying Strap and Handle 32
2.6 Modules Configuration 36
2.7 How to Attach the MU100090A 37
2.7.1 Replacing the MU100010A 10G Multirate modules 37
2.7.2 Attaching the MU100090A and MU100010A 38
3 Human-Machine-Interface 41
3.1 Touch Screen Display 42
3.2 Key Operation 43
3.2.1 Power Button 43
3.3 Head Set 45
3.4 Connector Panel 46
3.4.1 Test Interfaces 46
3.4.2 Service Interfaces 46
3.4.3 GPS Disciplined Oscillator Interfaces 48
3.5 Remote Operation 50
4
3.5.1 Installation of Control Software 50
3.5.2 Connection and Setup 50
3.5.3 Communication Ports 51
3.5.4 Starting Control Software 52
3.5.5 Remote Upgrade 53
3.5.6 Remote Wake Up 54
3.5.7 Remote Reset 54
3.5.8 Stand-alone Editor 54
3.6 Command-Based Remote Control 56
3.7 In-band Control 56
3.8 File Access via USB Interface 57
3.9 File Access via Ethernet Interface 58
3.9.1 Accessing files in Network Master from the PC 58
3.9.2 Mounting the Shared Folder of Networked PC to the Network
Master 58
3.10 GPS Receiver 60
3.10.1 G0325A GPS Receiver 60
3.10.2 MU100090A GPS Disciplined Oscillator 60
3.10.3 Operating GPS Receiver 61
3.11 Remote Control via GPIB 62
4 Graphical User Interface 63
4.1 General Handling of the GUI 64
4.1.1 GUI Concept 64
4.1.2 Navigating in the GUI 65
4.1.3 Layout of the GUI Screens 66
4.1.4 Lamp Indication of Alarm/Error Status 73
4.1.5 Keypads for Entering Text in Fields 75
4.1.6 User Pattern Editor 76
4.1.7 Prompts to Confirm Dependencies 76
4.2 Toolbars 77
4.2.1 Instrument Toolbar 77
4.2.2 Application Toolbar 89
4.3 Startup and Switch-off Sequences 95
4.3.1 Instrument Startup 95
4.3.2 Application Startup 95
4.3.3 Accessing Previous Tests and Test Results 96
4.3.4 Closing an Application 96
4.3.5 Switching Off the Instrument 97
5 SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn Applications 99
5.1 SDH Setup and Status 100
5.1.1 Transmitter Setup 100
5.1.2 Receiver Setup 105
5.1.3 Status Information 107
5.1.4 Errors/Alarms Insertion 114
5.2 SONET Setup and Status 116
5.3 E1 Setup and Status 126
5.4 DS1/J1 Setup and Status 145
5
Table of Contents

5.6 DS3 Setup and Status 163
5.8 APS 178
5.8.1 Ports Setup and Status 178
5.8.2 Test Setup 178
5.8.3 Test Results 179
5.9 BERT 183
5.10 RTD 199
6 Ethernet Applications 203
6.1 Ethernet Setup and Status 204
6.1.1 Physical Port Setup 204
6.1.2 Ethernet Frame Setup 207
6.2 BERT 274
6.3 Cable 295
6.4 Channel Statistics 297
6.5 Mon/Gen 301
6.6 Pass Through 311
6.7 Ping 314
6
6.8 Reflector 317
6.9 RFC 2544 320
6.9.4 Throughput Calculation 338
6.10 RFC 6349 340
6.11 SAT 1564 350
6.12 Traceroute 363
6.13 Sync Test 366
6.14 Discovery 378
7 OTN Applications 383
7.1 OTN Setup and Status 384
7.1.4 Error/Alarm Insertion 409
7.2 APS 413
7.3 BERT 417
7.4 RTD 426
8 CPRI/OBSAI Applications 429
8.1 CPRI/OBSAI Setup and Status 430
8.1.2 CPRI/OBSAI Frame Setup 432
8.1.4 Error/Alarm Insertion 436
8.2 BERT 438
7
Table of Contents
8.3 Pass Through 445
9 Fibre Channel (FC) Applications 447
9.1 Fibre Channel Setup and Status 448
9.1.2 Fibre Channel Frame Setup 450
9.2 BERT 458
9.3 Performance 467
9.4 Reflector 480
10 Utility Applications 485
10.1 Scenario 486
10.1.1 Scenario Manager 486
10.1.2 Running the Scenario 488
10.2 GPS 490
10.3 PDF Viewer 493
10.4 VIP 494
10.4.1 Application Toolbar 494
10.4.2 Connecting the Video Inspection Probe 494
10.5 Wireshark 500
11 Specifications 501
11.1 MT1000A 502
11.1.1 Configuration 502
11.1.2 External Interfaces 503
11.1.3 Other Interfaces 503
11.1.4 Environment Performance 504
11.1.5 Mechanical Performance 504
11.2 MU100010A, 10 G Multirate Module 505
11.2.2 External Interfaces 506
11.3 MU100090A High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator 511
11.3.2 Electrical performance and function 511
11.3.3 GPS Synchronization 512
11.4 Measurement Functionality 513
11.4.1 Ethernet Measurements 513
8
11.4.2 SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn 525
11.4.3 OTN 535
11.4.4 Fibre Channel 540
11.4.5 CPRI/OBSAI 541
11.5 Optical Modules 543
12 Support 545
12.1 Maintenance and Cleaning 546
12.1.1 Maintenance 546
12.1.2 Cleaning 546
12.1.3 Storage 546
12.2 Calibration 548
12.3 Formatting the data area in the Network Master 549
12.4 Upgrading the Software 550
12.4.1 Installation by using USB memory stick 550
12.4.2 Installation via Network 550
12.5 Support and Service Assistance 551
12.5.1 Before you obtain assistance 551
12.5.2 Data Backup 551
12.5.3 Obtaining Support or Service Assistance 551
12.6 Transporting and Disposal 552
12.6.1 Repackaging 552
12.6.2 Transporting 552
12.6.3 Disposal 552
12.7 Special Information 553
12.7.1 Equipment Certificate 553
12.7.2 Anritsu Warranty 553
12.7.3 Anritsu Corporation Contact 554
12.7.4 Licensing Information 554
12.7.5 Availability of Source Code 554
12.8 Software License Document 555
12.9 EULA License Document 559
12.10 CE Conformity Marking 561
12.10.1 Product Model 561
12.10.2 Applied Directive 561
12.10.3 Applied Standards 561
12.10.4 Authorized Representative 562
12.10.5 CE Declaration 563
12.11 RCM Conformity Marking 564
12.11.1 Product Model 564
12.11.2 Applied Standards 564
12.12 Laser Safety 565
12.12.1 Laser Safety Classifications 565
12.12.2 Indication Labels on Product 566
12.12.3 Laser Radiation Markings 567
12.13 Wireless Certification 568
12.13.1 Japan MIC 568
12.13.2 North America (USA FCC and Canada IC) 568
12.13.3 Europe CE 569
12.13.4 Brazil ANATEL 569
12.13.5 China SRRC 570
12.13.6 Indonesia SDPPI 570
12.13.7 Israel MoC 570
12.13.8 Mexico IFETEL 571
12.13.9 Philippines NTC 571
12.13.10 Russia CU Scheme and Minsvyaz 571
12.13.11 Singapore IMDA 571
12.13.12 Thailand NTC 571
9
Table of Contents
12.14 Declarations 572

12.14.1 Notes on Export Management 572
12.14.2 Information for EU and EFTA Customers Only 572
12.14.3 Information for U.S. Customers Only 572
12.14.4 Information for the Chinese Market Only 573
10
1 Introduction
This chapter provides a general introduction to the MT1000A Network Master
Pro, and explains the symbols and conventions used in this manual.
11
Introduction
1.1 Mainframe
The MT1000A Network Master Pro (hereafter called the Network Master and
sometimes the instrument) is a battery-powered multipurpose
telecommunications test instrument for field use. It is a tool for a wide range of
applications from fast first-aid troubleshooting to comprehensive, in-depth
analysis of transmission problems. The installed options enable the Network
Master to be used both as a full-featured transmission line quality tester and as
an advanced signaling analyzer.
The Network Master features a wide TFT LCD display with touch screen
interface, where results are easily read and color coding and graphical symbols
aid the users in system setup and results analysis. The Network Master also
allows users to store applications settings to reduce time for future
configurations. For fast and efficient data transfer and external communication,
the Network Master houses LAN interface, Bluetooth® and three USB ports.
Fault location is greatly facilitated by the high degree of portability of the

robust Network Master, allowing measurements to be taken at any suitable
measuring point. Accordingly, the Network Master can be powered either by a
rechargeable and replaceable intelligent high-capacity Li-Ion battery, or via
mains adapter for long-term measurements.
Altogether, these features guarantee the supreme functionality of the Network

Master, allowing both convenience and optimal user-friendly operation.
For latest information, refer to the homepage below.

http://www.anritsu.com/en-us/test-measurement/products/mt1000a
12
10G Multirate Module
1.2 10G Multirate Module

The 10G Multirate module (MU100010A) allows the Network Master to test a
large variety of interfaces and systems up to 10 Gbps, like OTN interfaces,
Ethernet interfaces, SDH/SONET interfaces, Fibre Channel interfaces and
PDH/DSn interfaces. The MU100010A can be configured to have two ports at
all rates and interfaces. The instrument is thus ideal for both in-service and out-
of-service transmission-quality measurement.
For fast troubleshooting, the Network Master displays alarms and transmission
link status on Lamp icons in its display. The instrument's two ports permit
immediate monitoring of the two sides of a line and allow comparison of
simultaneously recorded results.
1.3 High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator

The MU100090A High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator provides 10
MHz reference clock in high accuracy by employing the Rubidium oscillator.
By synchronizing the built-in GPS receiver output and the Rubidium oscillator,
the MU100090A can output the clock and 1PPS *1 synchronized with UTC *2.
Moreover, the MU100090A allows to synchronize the Rubidium oscillator with
1PPS which is input to the "1pps Sync In" connector.
*1: One pulse per second

*2: Coordinated Universal Time
Even if Sync input signal is lost because GPS receiver cannot capture satellites
(this status is "Hold over"), high stability of the Rubidium oscillator allows to
keep the time accuracy.
The built-in GPS receiver can provide following:
3.3V or 5V antenna feeding

Tod (Time of Day) output in NMEA 0184 format
MU100090A Block Diagram
Using the MU100090A clock output to the MU100010A reference clock allows
the time measurement in high accuracy. Moreover MU100090A can be used as
the external GPS receiver of MT1000A.
13
Introduction
1.4 Symbols and Conventions

1.4.1 Symbols Used in Manual
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction,

Anritsu Corporation uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related
information. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols
BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be
used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached
to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual.
This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or
DANGER death if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death
WARNING if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-

CAUTION severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are
not taken.
1.4.2 Safety Symbols Used on Equipment
The following safety symbols are used on Anritsu equipment near operation
locations to provide information about safety items and operation precautions.
Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and take the
necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.
This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically

in or near the barred circle.
This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is indicated

symbolically in or near the circle.
This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or near
the triangle.
This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.
These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.
A number of typographical conventions are used for easy spotting of

information. Examples below are shown in grey boxes in this section only to
indicate that they are 'examples'.
1.4.3 Notes
The Note symbol indicates information, procedures or recommendations that need to be
followed to make correct measurements etc. Note text is written in italics to separate the
information from the other text elements on a page.
1.4.4 Hints
14
Symbols and Conventions
The Hint symbol indicates information that should be treated as hints, suggestions,
recommendations etc. Hint text is written in italics to separate the information from the
other text elements on a page.
1.4.5 Option
The Option symbol indicates that the information described covers an option (hardware
and software) and that this option must be installed before use. Text is written in italics
to separate the information from the other text elements on a page.
15
Introduction
1.5 For Safety

This section contains warnings which should be followed to avoid personal
injury, product damage, as well as damage to the environment.
1.5.1 Dangers
DANGER
Replacing Battery When replacing the battery, use the specified battery and insert it with the
correct polarity. If the wrong battery is used, or if the battery is inserted with
reversed polarity, there is a risk of explosion causing severe injury or death.
FOR CALIFORNIA USA ONLY
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material
- special handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Battery Disposal DO NOT expose batteries to heat or fire. This is dangerous and can result in
explosions or fire. Heating batteries may cause them to leak or explode.
1.5.2 Warnings
WARNING
ALWAYS refer to the operation manual when working near locations at which
the alert mark shown on the left is attached. If the advice in the operation
manual is not followed, there is a risk of personal injury or reduced equipment
performance. The alert mark shown on the left may also be used with other
marks and descriptions to indicate other dangers.
Overvoltage Category
This equipment complies with overvoltage category II defined in IEC 61010.
DO NOT connect this equipment to the power supply of overvoltage category
III or IV.
Laser radiation warning

NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the equipment nor into the
end of a cable connected to the equipment. There is a risk of injury if laser
radiation enters the eye.
The Laser Safety label is attached to the equipment for safety use as indicated
in "Laser Safety".
Repair Only qualified service personnel with a knowledge of electrical fire and shock
hazards should service this equipment. This equipment cannot be repaired by
the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the equipment covers or unit covers
or to disassemble internal components. In addition, there is a risk of damage
to precision components.
16
For Safety
Calibration The performance-guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the equipment. To

ensure the continued integrity of the equipment, only Anritsu service
personnel, or service personnel of an Anritsu sales representative, should
break this seal to repair or calibrate the equipment. Be careful not to break the
seal by opening the equipment or unit covers. If the performance-guarantee
seal is broken by you or a third party, the performance of the equipment
cannot be guaranteed.
Battery Fluid DO NOT short the battery terminals and never attempt to disassemble the
battery or dispose of it in a fire. If the battery is damaged by any of these
actions, the battery fluid may leak. This fluid is poisonous. DO NOT touch the
battery fluid, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is accidentally ingested, spit it
out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and seek medical help. If it
enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your eyes, rinse them with clean
running water and seek medical help. If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes,
wash it off carefully and thoroughly with clean water.
LCD This equipment uses a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). DO NOT subject the
equipment to excessive force or drop it. If the LCD is subjected to strong
mechanical shock, it may break and liquid may leak. This liquid is very caustic
and poisonous. DO NOT touch it, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is ingested
accidentally, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and seek
medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your eyes, rinse
them with clean running water and seek medical help. If the liquid gets on
your skin or clothes, wash it off carefully and thoroughly with soap and water.
17
Introduction
1.5.3 Cautions
CAUTION
Replacing Memory This equipment uses a Poly-carbomonofluoride lithium battery to back up the
Back-up Battery memory. This battery must be replaced by service personnel when it has reached the
end of its useful life; contact the Anritsu sales section or your nearest representative.
Note: The battery used in this equipment has a maximum useful life of 8 years. It should
be replaced before this period has elapsed.
The life of the battery will vary depending on the length of equipment usage and the
operating environment.
The following conditions may be observed if the battery has expired:
When power to the equipment is supplied, the time display may no longer
match the actual time.
Parameter and data settings may not be retained when the power to the
equipment is cut.
External Storage This equipment uses a USB memory as external storage media for storing data and
programs.
If this media is mishandled or becomes faulty, important data may be lost. It is

recommended to periodically back up all important data and programs to protect
them from being lost accidentally.
Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data.
Pay careful attention to the following points:
Never remove the USB memory from the equipment while it is being accessed.
The USB memory may be damaged by static electric charges.
Anritsu has thoroughly tested all external storage media shipped with this
equipment. Users should note that external storage media not shipped with
this equipment may not have been tested by Anritsu, thus Anritsu cannot
guarantee the performance or suitability of such media.
Lifetime of Parts The life span of certain parts used in this equipment is determined by the operating
time or the power-on time. Due consideration should be given to the life spans of
these parts when performing continuous operation over an extended period. The
safety of the equipment cannot be guaranteed if component parts are used beyond
their life spans. These parts must be replaced at the customer's expense even if
within the guaranteed period described in Warranty at the end of this manual.
For details on life-span, refer to the corresponding section in this manual.
LCD: Brightness at 50% after 40,000hrs

Battery pack Capacity: 70% after 300 charge/discharge cycles
Use in Residential This equipment is designed for an industrial environment. In a residential

Environment environment, this equipment may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Use in Corrosive Exposure to corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide, sulfurous acid, and hydrogen
Atmospheres chloride will cause faults and failures.
Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases.
18
For Safety
1.5.4 Cautions Against Computer Virus Infection
Copying files and data

Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated using
Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument.
All other required files should be transferred by means of USB media after
undergoing a thorough virus check.
Adding software
Do not download or install software that has not been specifically
recommended or licensed by Anritsu.
Network connections
Ensure that the network has sufficient anti-virus security protection in place.
19
Introduction
1.6 Precautions
This section contains some precautions which should be followed to avoid
damage or malfunction due to incorrect use, handling and transportation of the
Network Master.
1.6.1 Installation
Install MT1000A horizontally in a stable place.
CAUTION
If the MT1000A is not installed in a "good" direction as above, a small shock
may turn it over and harm the user.
1.6.2 ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
Modules and options for the Network Master contain electronic devices that are
sensitive to ESD (Electro Static Discharge). Therefore, all ESD sensitive items are
delivered from Anritsu in antistatic shielding packages.
Electrostatic discharge during installation can result in destruction or

degradation of these devices. The damage may lead to equipment failure later.
When you install or remove modules, it is your responsibility to control ESD.
To control ESD, take the issues described below into consideration.
CAUTION
Avoid build-up of electrostatic charge
Keep your workplace clear of any item that can generate electrostatic charges,
e.g. all items that are not made of antistatic materials.
Minimize the exposure to ESD

Keep ESD sensitive items in antistatic shielding packaging as long as
possible.
Do not remove ESD sensitive items from equipment or the antistatic shielding
packaging unless you are connected to the equipment with a grounding wrist
strap (as described later).
20
Precautions
Return ESD sensitive items to antistatic shielding packaging.
Keep equipment, the ESD sensitive items and yourself at the same static
potential
If your workplace is already prepared for handling ESD sensitive items, then
follow your usual procedure. If not, you should follow the procedure below
using a ground wrist strap.
1. Attach the wrist end of the wrist strap firmly around your wrist and the other
end to the equipment chassis or ground plug.
2. Keep the wrist strap on while you install or remove ESD sensitive items. Do
not remove the wrist strap until the ESD sensitive parts are either installed or
returned to the antistatic shielding package.
1.6.3 Optical Surfaces
The optical interfaces - transmitter as well as receiver - are very sensitive to

contamination. Be aware that contamination of the optical surfaces may result
in severe loss of signal.
CAUTION
To prevent contamination of the optical surfaces, mount protective caps to
seal the transmitter/receiver connectors when no fiber optic cables are
connected.
Correct functioning of the instrument can only be ensured if optical modules,

supplied by Anritsu for the Network Master, are used.
1.6.4 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables
Optical fiber cables may degrade in performance or be damaged if handled

improperly. Note the following points when handling them.
CAUTION
Do not pull the cable when removing the connector.
Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable, or remove the cable
sheath from the optical connector.
CAUTION
21
Introduction
Do not excessively bend, fold, or pinch an optical fiber cable.
Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable.
Keep the bend radius of an optical fiber cable at 30 mm or more. If the radius
is less, optical fiber cable loss will increase.
CAUTION
Do not excessively pull on or twist an optical fiber cable.
Also, do not hang anything by using a cable. Doing so may break the optical
fiber inside the cable.
CAUTION
Be careful not to hit the end of an optical connector against anything hard
such as the floor or a desk by dropping the optical fiber cable.
Doing so may damage the connector end and increase connection loss.
WARNING
Do not touch the end of a broken optical fiber cable.
The broken optical fiber may pierce the skin, causing injury.
22
Precautions
CAUTION
Do not disassemble optical connectors.
Doing so may cause Rubidium oscillator to break or the performance to

degrade.
1.6.5 Caution when handling MU100090A
CAUTION
Be sure not to give vibration and shock.
Doing so may cause the built-in Rubidium oscillator to damage or the

performance to degrade.
1.6.6 Ventilation
The instrument has built-in fans, to prevent the temperature to rise inside the
instrument.
CAUTION
Be sure not to block the ventilation holes.
In this instrument, cooling air is taken in through the side panel, and hot air is
exhausted through the bottom panel.
1.6.7 Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may
be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating WLAN
regulations, visit the Anritsu website to check where use is allowed.
http://www.anritsu.com/ja-JP/test-
measurement/support/downloads/brochures-datasheets-and-
catalogs/dwl16689
Note that Anritsu cannot be held liable for any problem arising from WLAN use
in other countries and regions.
23
Introduction
24
2 Configuration
This chapter contains information about the included accessories as well as
guidelines for connecting the mains adapter, for charging the battery, and for
attaching the carrying strap.
25
Configuration
2.1 Delivered Accessories

The instrument is delivered in a shipment container together with various
accessories depending on the order. When unpacking the first time, it is
recommended to check these accessories against the list(s) below.
2.1.1 Standard Accessories
The following standard accessories are delivered with the instrument:
MT1000A
J1565A Line Cord USA *1
J1566A Line Cord Europe *1
J1567A Line Cord UK *1
J1568A Line Cord Australia *1
J1594A Line Cord Japan *1
J1596A Line Cord Korea *1
J1720A Line Cord China *1
G0309A AC Adapter
G0310A LiION Battery
B0690A Softbag
B0728A Rear Panel Kit
Z1746A Stylus
Z1747A Carrying Strap
Z1748A Handle
Z1817A Utilities ROM
W3681AE Quick Reference Guide
MU100010A
B0692A ESD box *2
*1: One of these power cord come with according to your country.
*2: Up to four SFP+/SFPs can be stored.
2.1.2 Optional Accessories
One or more of the following optional accessories may be delivered with the
instrument (if included in the order):
26
Delivered Accessories
MU100090A High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator

B0691A Hard case
B0691B Hard case
B0720A Rear Cover
B0729A Screw 1U
B0730A Screw 2U
B0731A Screw 3U
B0732A Screw Kit
B0733A Hard Case
G0306B Video Inspection Probe
G0324A Battery Charger
G0325A GPS receiver
G0382A Autofocus Video Inspection Probe
J1569A Car 12 Vdc adapter
J1667A GPIB-USB Converter
W3682AE MT1000A/MU100010A Network Master Pro Operation Manual
MT1000A Network Master Pro/ MT1100A Network Master Flex
W3736AE
Remote Scripting Operation Manual
27
Configuration
2.2 Mains Power Adapter

The Network Master can be powered from the supplied AC mains adapter.
CAUTION
Always use AC mains adapter delivered from Anritsu. Anritsu Part No. G0309A.
2.2.1 Connecting Mains Power Adapter
To connect the mains power adapter to the Network Master, follow the
procedure below:
1. Insert the mains adapter's DC power plug into the socket connector marked
'18V DC'. The DC input connector is located on the right-hand side of Network
Master's connector panel.
2. Connect the AC plug of the mains adapter to the mains and switch on the
mains wall outlet. The power button will flash fast on orange during booting.
Then flashes slowly on orange when charging.
28
Rechargeable Battery
2.3 Rechargeable Battery

The Network Master is delivered with a 10.8 V Intelligent Li-Ion rechargeable
and replaceable battery. The typical operation capacity (with a fully charged
battery) will be approximately 4 hours.
CAUTION
Use only original batteries delivered from Anritsu, to prevent the risk of
instrument damage or personal injury.
Battery should only be charged at room temperature.
Initial charging The battery will normally be partially or fully discharged on delivery. It is
recommended to charge the battery immediately after delivery and unpacking.
In Stand By Mode, the ON/OFF indicator will stop flashing when the battery is
fully charged.
If the battery will not to be used for a long period of time, it is recommended that it
contains at least 20% capacity. Charge the battery before storage, if necessary.
Temperature When charging is in process, the temperature of the battery will increase. The
intelligence of the battery will ensure that the charging takes place at the
correct temperature.
2.3.1 Installing or Replacing Battery
To install or replace the battery in the Network Master, follow the procedure
below:
1. Disconnect the mains power adapter if it is connected.
2. Switch the Network Master OFF .
3. Place the instrument on its back on a plain surface and turn the lock screw of
the battery compartment to match the unlock mark.
4. Remove the lid of the battery compartment.
5. Pull out the battery from the compartment.
29
Configuration
6. When installing the battery, note the direction of the battery terminals. With
the instrument placed on its back - and the battery compartment in front of
you - the terminals should be in the upper left corner.
7. Re-install the battery compartment door and tighten the lock screw.
2.3.2 Charging Battery in Fast Mode
Power is supplied from the external AC mains adapter - and the Network
Master is switched OFF during the charging (Stand By Mode).
To charge the Network Master battery using the fast charge mode, follow the
procedure below:
2. Connect the mains adapter, as described in the "Connecting Mains Power

Adapter" section.
Indication during When the mains adapter has connected, the Power button will flash after
charging
approx. 30 seconds, indicating that charging is in progress. When the flashing
stops, the charging is complete. If the battery is defective - the Power button
will also light. Therefore, the best way to check the battery status is to switch on
the Network Master and observe the battery information as described in the
Instrument toolbar section.
2.3.3 Charging Battery in Normal Mode
Power is supplied from the external AC mains adapter - and the Network
Master is switched ON during the charging.
A normal charging of the battery is taking place every time the instrument is in
use and connected to the mains adapter.
The battery status can be checked in the instrument toolbar (expandable icon
toolbar) on the right-hand side of the screen, or in the status line if the battery
indicator is displayed there. See the "Battery Status Information" section below.
2.3.4 Battery Status Information
The battery icon is displayed in the status line at the bottom of the screen.
The following icons are used to indicate the current battery status:
30
Measurement Cables
The battery is fully charged. The Network Master is using the AC adapter as power
source.
There is no battery in the Network Master (or the battery is malfunctioning). The
Network Master is using the AC adapter as power source.
The Network Master is using the battery as power source. The AC adapter is not
connected.
There is a delay of several seconds before the battery status is updated.
A more detailed battery status information is launched when touching the

battery icon. The example in the figure below shows the status screen of a
battery during charging.
2.4 Measurement Cables

When connecting the Network Master to the line to be tested or monitored, it is
recommended always to use shielded cables of good quality, to avoid the
possibility of corrupting the measuring results. For the same reason, the AC
adapter, if used, should be connected to the instrument and switched on before
starting the measurement.
For connection of the Network Master to different types of equipment, different

cables are available. Please contact your Anritsu representative for information.
2.4.1 Connecting Measurement Cables
Measurement cables are connected to the input and output connectors located
on the connector panel of the instrument. Various electrical and optical
connectors are available.
31
Configuration
2.5 Support Stand and Carrying Strap

2.5.1 Support Stand
The Network Master is equipped with a support stand keeping the instrument at
a convenient angle during the operation. To extract the stand: pull out the
metal bar on rear of the instrument - it automatically stays in the correct
position.
Be sure to open a support stand fully. Otherwise, the Network Master will be
more likely to tip over. Moreover, the air flow on bottom panel will be
insufficient.
2.5.2 Carrying Strap and Handle
The included carrying strap and handle can easily be mounted for your
convenience when transporting and/or using the Network Master.
The carrying strap is equipped with hooks for easy installation.
WARNING
Use the Carrying Strap around your shoulder. Do not wrap the strap around
your neck.
32
Support Stand and Carrying Strap
How to attach carrying strap and handle

To attach carrying strap (Z1747A) and handle (Z1748A) to MT1000A Network
Master Pro, follow instructions below.
1. Use screw driver and remove the battery lid from MT1000A.
2. Remove the battery pack.
3. Loosen four screws at each corner of MU100010A.
4. Separate MT1000A and MU100010A.

5. Attach the handle on either right or left side.
33
Configuration
6. Detailed photos for upper and lower corner.
7. Remove the buckle cap from the handle and the carrying strap.
8. Mount the carrying strap on both upper corners.
34
Support Stand and Carrying Strap
9. Attach MT1000A and MU100010A , insert the battery pack and mount the
battery lid with the reverse sequence at the beginning.
35
Configuration
2.6 Modules Configuration

Following modules are available for MT1000A.
MU100010A 10G Multirate Module (10G)
MU100020A OTDR Module 1310/1550nm SMF (OTDR)
MU100021A OTDR Module 1310/1550/850/1300nm SMF/MMF (OTDR)
MU100022A OTDR Module 1310/1550/1625nm SMF (OTDR)
MU100040A CPRI RF Module (CPRI RF)
MU100090A High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator (GPS)
MT1000A is able to mount up to three modules. Available module

combinations are eleven kinds and shown in the table below.
Only one OTDR module can be mounted to the MT1000A.
One module configuration
10G OTDR* CPRI RF *
MT1000A MT1000A MT1000A
Two modules configuration

10G 10G 10G OTDR* CPRI RF *
OTDR GPS CPRI RF CPRI RF OTDR
MT1000A MT1000A MT1000A MT1000A MT1000A
Three modules configuration

10G 10G 10G
OTDR OTDR CPRI RF
GPS CPRI RF OTDR
MT1000A MT1000A MT1000A
*: When OTDR module or CPRI RF module is mounted on back, equip with rear
panel. B0728A Rear Panel Kit come with different length screws.
Model Name
B0731A Screw 3U
B0730A Screw 2U
B0729A Screw 1U
36
How to Attach the MU100090A
2.7 How to Attach the MU100090A

MU100090A is attached to MT1000A with rear panel or MU100010A 10G
Multirate module.
CATION
Replacing modules operation should be done on the table where antistatic
measures are taken.
Do not drop the modules or give a shock.
Doing so may cause the failure.
2.7.1 Replacing the MU100010A 10G Multirate modules
2. Before the detaching operation, disconnect the AC adapter and remove the
battery pack.
3. Place the instrument on its front on a plain surface.
4. Loosen the screws (shown by the yellow circle) on rear side of the MU100010A
10G Multirate module.
5. After loosing the four screws, lift up the 10G Multirate Module with holding
both sides. If you cannot lift up, loosen the four screws again. You can see the
panel as below.
37
Configuration
2.7.2 Attaching the MU100090A and MU100010A
1. Place the instrument on its front on a plain surface.
2. Attach the MU100090A to the MT1000A. Place the MU100090A on the

MT1000A so as to connect the following pairs: 1 - 4, 2 - 5, 3 - 6.
Be careful not to bump the guide pins (2, 3, 5 and 6) to the connectors (1 and
4).
3. Remove four screws of the 10G Multirate module and replace to screws 2U in
B0728A Rear Panel Kit.
4. Attach the 10G Multirate module to the MU100090A. Place the 10G Multirate
module on the MU100090A so as to connect the following pairs: 7 - 10, 8 - 11, 9
- 12.
Be careful not to bump the guide pins (8, 9, 11 and 12) to the connectors (7 and
10).
38
How to Attach the MU100090A
5. Tighten the four screws.
After the module attachment has finished, the external appearance will be as
below.
6. Connect the AC cable or install the battery packs.
CAUTION
When using MU100090A, do not drop the Network Master or give a shock.
Doing so may cause the failure.
May cause a bad effect to the Measurement results.
39
Configuration
40
3 Human-Machine-Interface
Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) covers the relation between the user and the
instrument - in other words: the information you get from the instrument
combined with the action you add to the instrument.
The informative part is the TFT display, and the part susceptible to influence is
the touch-active layer of the screen. Connections made to the input and output
connectors are included in the HMI as well.
41
Human-Machine-Interface
3.1 Touch Screen Display

The 9 inch active TFT display with WVGA resolution (800x480 pixels) is used
for setups and for presentation of results (that is, for all interaction with the
instrument). As the display includes touch screen functionality, it is possible to
navigate and operate directly from it.
The touch screen display is constructed to be operated by the tip of your finger
or by the included Stylus (Anritsu part No. Z1746A). The touch screen surface
is made of delicate material and is easily scratched or damaged if handled
incorrectly.
CAUTION
Never expose the touch screen to excessive pressure as this may damage its
functionality.
Never use sharp objects (e.g. pens, paper clips etc.) to operate the touch
screen, as this may damage the surface.
If the touch screen breaks and liquid leaks out, DO NOT touch or ingest the
liquid and avoid getting it in your eyes. The liquid may be poisonous.
Only use a soft cloth moisturized with a mild detergent to clean the surface of
the touch screen. Be sure to power off and disconnect main power adapter.
42
Key Operation
3.2 Key Operation

The only physical operator key (the Power button) is described in this section.
3.2.1 Power Button
The Power button on the front panel of the instrument is used to switch power ON
and OFF. In addition, the menu used for power-off also contains a few extra options
(e.g. to lock the screen).
Gray: Power off
Orange flashing (fast): Booting in case of AC operation
Green flashing: Booting in case of the battery operation
Orange flashing (slow): Charging
Orange: Stand by
Green: Operating
Switching power ON
AC Operation
Connect the mains power adapter to the Network Master. The Network Master
flashes the power button in orange during booting. The power button lights in
orange after booting.
To start your test, press the power button. The power button lights in green.
After a model name is displayed, the Network Master enters Operating status
and shows the Application Selector.
Battery Operation
Press the power button. The Network Master shows a model name and flashes
the power button in green during booting.
Then, the Network Master enters Operating status and shows the Application
Selector.
Switching power OFF
When you press the Power button, a pop-up menu containing Shut Down will
appear.
Touch Shut Down and then confirm by touching Yes in a dialog box.
43
AC Operation
After you shut the Network Master down, the Network Master goes back to
Stand by or Charging state.
The Network Master stays Stand by or Charging state until you disconnect the
mains power adapter.
Battery Operation
After you shut the Network Master down, the power goes off.
Forcing power OFF
If it is not possible to power down the Network Master using the power button
menu, the following procedure can be used to make an emergency power
down.
1. Disconnect AC adapter if it is connected.
2. Hold the Power button depressed for a couple of seconds.
It is not recommended to force a power-off except in emergencies.
Additional options in power button menu
Apps Switcher
Shows all currently activated applications and allows you to switch among
them.
Capture Screen
Saves a screen shot image in .PNG format. The image file will be saved in
'Internal/screens' folder or an attached USB memory stick.
Lock Screen
Locks or unlocks the screen.
44
Head Set
3.3 Head Set

You can use the commercially available head set (3.5 φ CTIA), it is possible to
listen speech in the audio channels available in E1 and T1 systems.
CAUTION
Do not operate for a long period of time at high volume level or at a level that
is uncomfortable.
The volume is controlled from the General setup in 'Instrument Toolbar'.
The head set is connected to the socket marked with a head set symbol on the
connector panel of the Network Master.
45
3.4 Connector Panel

All connections (both for test interfaces and for service interfaces) are placed
on the connector panel of the Network Master.
3.4.1 Test Interfaces
The figure below shows the connector panel of the mainframe and
MU100010A.
The connector panel contains the following port connectors to be used for the
tests:
3.4.2 Service Interfaces
All connections concerning the service interfaces are also located on the
connector panel:
46
Connector Panel
The audio connector is used for connecting to an optional head

Audio
set.
AUX The AUX connector is used for optional G0325A GPS Receiver.
Ext Clock Input The Ext Clock Input connector is used for reference clock input.
USB B The three USB connectors (two connectors type A and one
connector type B mini) can, for example, be used for connection
USB A with USB memory stick. This is convenient for the exchanging of
information to other instrument.
The Ethernet connector is used for connecting the Network Master
Ethernet service
to a Local Area Network, e.g. to remotely operate the instrument
interface
from a PC.
DC input (18 The DC power connector is used for connection of 18 V DC power
VDC) delivered from the AC Adapter.
47
3.4.3 GPS Disciplined Oscillator Interfaces
All connections concerning the GPS Disciplined Oscillator interfaces are also
located on the connector panel:
Connects to AUX connector on MT1000A panel using J1705A

AUX DSUB9
AUX Conversion Adaptor.
1pps Out The 1PPS signal is output. *
10MHz Out The 10 MHz clock signal is output. *
Lights in green when signals of four or more satellites are being
GPS
received.
Lights in green when the Rubidium oscillator stability reaches 10-9.

OSC This lights within around ten minutes usually. However this varies
depending on ambient temperature.
The input connector of the external 1PPS reference signal for the
1pps Sync In
synchronization.
Antenna The connector for GPS antenna.
*: Signal which is synchronized with GPS or the signal inputted to 1pps Sync In.
Connections of GPS Disciplined Oscillator Interfaces

Connections of GPS Disciplined Oscillator Interfaces are shown below.
Use GPS antenna, BNC cables and J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor for the
connections.
1. Connect J1706A GPS antenna to Antenna connector on the MU100090A.

Commercially available GPS antenna can be used.
48
Connector Panel
2. Connect AUX DSUB9 of the MU100090A to AUX of the MT1000A using

J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor.
3. Connect 10MHz Out of the MU100090A to Sync In of the MT1000A using
J1710A BNC Cable.
4. Connect 1PPS Out of the MU100090A to REF 1PPS IN of J1705A AUX
Conversion Adaptor.
5. Input the signal under measurement to 1PPS IN of J1705A AUX Conversion
Adaptor.
When performing the measurements using GPS time by capturing GPS satellites, wait 30
minutes or more for the synchronization after capturing GPS satellites.
If waiting time for synchronization is short, the correct time will not be obtained.
When feeding the power to a GPS antenna using external power supply, insert a bias tee
between the GPS antenna and MU100090A.
Select a bias tee which meets the MU100090A specifications below:

Antenna connector: SMA, Jack (refer to 11.3.2 "Electrical performance and
function")
Supported signal: GPS L1 C/A Code (refer to 11.3.3 "GPS Synchronization")
49
3.5 Remote Operation

With the MX100001A MT1000A/MT1100A Control Software (hereafter,
"Control Software") application installed, your PC is capable of supporting
remote access to the Network Master. Control Software simulates the panel
operation of the Network Master, allowing you to operate and view results on a
PC through a LAN or Internet connection. If more Network Masters are linked
to a network, they can be remotely controlled by the same PC, one at a time.
3.5.1 Installation of Control Software

Operation Environment
OS Windows 7/8.1 English/Japanese
Interface Ethernet 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
Display 800 × 600 dots or more
1. Copy the installer stored in the Network Master to your PC, by USB memory
stick or the file sharing function.
File Name: MX100001A-Setup-x.xx-xxxxx.exe
"x"s in the file name mean numerics showing the version.
2. Double click the installer file.
3. If User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
4. After the installation finishes, click Close.
Click Start > All Programs > Anritsu > MX100001A folder. Confirm that
following programs appear. "V*.**" is replaced to the version name.
MX100001A-V*.**-Editor
MX100001A-V*.**-Remote
MX100001A-V*.**-Viewer
V*.**-Uninstall
When installing a new version of the Control Software, previous versions are not
automatically uninstalled. To manually uninstall a Control Software version, execute
"Uninstall" from the Control Software folder from the Start menu of Windows.
3.5.2 Connection and Setup
To make Remote Operation application communicate with Network Master:

1. Connect an Ethernet network cable to the LAN connector on your Network
Master and link this to a Local Area Network.
2. Assign an IP address to the Network Master. This is done in the Ethernet

setting available from the Network screen as described in the Graphical User
Interface chapter.
3. Enable Allow remote PC in the Remote Control.
4. Display the Resource Monitor. Confirm that the IP address and "running Tests
and Views" appear.
50
Remote Operation
5. Change the Network settings of the PC, so it can access the Network Master
via Ethernet.
Select Control Panel -> Network and Internet -> Network Connection.
Right-click the interface and click the Properties.
Select the properties of Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click the
Properties button.
6. Execute Ping command on PC to confirm connection to the Network Master.
3.5.3 Communication Ports
When using the MX100001A Control Software with a Network Master

connected behind a port restrictive firewall, to successfully communicate with
the instrument, it is important to configure the firewall to allow communication
on the following ports:
5555 Framework core communication port, fixed. Used by Control

Software main GUI, including the Remote Upgrade function.
5650 to Application servers, fixed range. Used by Control Software
5699 Application GUIs.
5898 Unit reset port, fixed. Used by Control Software Remote Reset
function.
58012 Remote wake-up port, fixed. Used by Control Software Remote
Wake Up function.
In addition, the following ports are used for other network functions in the
Network Master:
51
56001 SCPI server port, user configurable. Used by remote SCPI

(default) clients. Refer to Remote Control section for details how to setup.
5900
VNC (TCP), user configurable. Used by remote VNC clients.
(default)
5800 VNC over HTTP, user configurable. Used by remote VNC over
(default) HTTP tunnel clients.
Refer to VNC section for details how to setup VNC
communication ports.
135, 137,
138, 139, File Sharing, fixed ports.
445
3.5.4 Starting Control Software
1. Open Anritsu-MX100001A folder from Start menu.

2. Click MX100001A-V*.**-Remote.
If Windows Security Alert appeared, click Allow access.

Before connecting to the Network Master, confirm that the response from the Network
Master is quick enough. If the response from Network Master via the Ethernet network is
too late, a connection fails and the message "Network connection is too slow!" appears.
Executing Remote Operation on control PC:

1. If Control Software launched, the initial screen for remote operation appears
as below.
When two or more network interface cards are available, Use Network
Interface selection appear. Touch the field to select a interface.
2. Enter the IP address of the Network Master to Remote Unit IP Address.
52
Remote Operation
3. Click Validate Connection .
4. Clicking Launch Application in Control tab will display the Network Master
screen.
To exit Control Software, click Close button at right hand top of the window.
Power button menu appears, and click Close.
3.5.5 Remote Upgrade
If the MX100001A Control Software version differs from that of Network

Master, when clicking Launch Application, the software upgrading dialog
appears. Upgrade Network Master Software to the version compatible with
MX100001A Control Software.
1. Touch Select File to launch the dialog box.
2. Select the software file. Progress bar shows Upload Progress. Touching Cancel
aborts the file uploading.
3. After file uploading finishes, touch Start Installation .
53
Touching Start Installation will reboot the Network Master. Installation process cannot
be remotely monitored. Please reconnect after a few minutes.
3.5.6 Remote Wake Up
If Network Master is in Stand-by mode, it is possible to remotely get the unit

into the Operation state.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Anritsu > MX100001A folder.
2. Click MX100001A-V*.**-Remote.
3. On the Control Software startup screen, enter the IP address of the Network
Master in the Remote Unit IP Address field.
4. Click Start in Wake Up tab.
5. After the progress bar reaches 100%, click OK in the dialog box.
3.5.7 Remote Reset
The Remote Reset function can be helpful if the unit is on a remote site and
unexpectedly freezes or becomes unresponsive. The possibility to remotely
reset an instrument can be disabled by unchecking the Enable Remote Reset
check box in the Remote Control options.
To remotely force a reboot the Network Master, specify the Network Master
using its serial number.
1. On the Control Software startup screen, enter the IP address of the Network
Master in the Remote Unit IP Address field.
2. Enter the serial number in the Controller SN field on the Reset tab.
3. Click Start on the Reset tab.
4. After the progress bar reaches 100%, click OK in the dialog box.
Make sure to save measurements and settings before initiating Remote Reset function.
The Reset will force the Network Master to reboot. All unsaved or ongoing
measurements will be lost.
3.5.8 Stand-alone Editor
MX100001A Editor allows users to load, edit, and save Setup files of any
possible Network Master configuration, without connecting to an actual
instrument.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Anritsu > MX100001A folder.
2. Click MX100001A-V*.**-Editor.
54
Remote Operation
3. Set configuration of Network Master by clicking options in Select Controller,

and Add Module(s).
To save the configuration, click Save Configuration .
4. Click OK . After a while, the GUI of the selected Network Master configuration
appears.
5. Select an application, select port resources, and configure settings and

measurement parameters.
6. Once done, save the setup file by clicking Load/Save on Application Toolbar.
Load the Setup File saved by the MX100001A Editor on the Network Master by
clicking Load/Save button on the Application Toolbar. Alternatively, import the
settings file as a Favorite, and launch the new application from the Favorites
screen on the Application Selector.
55
3.6 Command-Based Remote Control

Using command-based scripts makes the Network Master a fully automated
measurement instrument.
The Network Master remote control communication functions support the
built-in Ethernet service interface.
Software specifications are in conformity with the IEEE488.2 standard and
SCPI version 1999 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments).
All commands are described in a separate document:

MT1000A Network Master Pro MT1100A Network Master Flex Remote
Scripting Operation Manual (M-W3736AE).
This icon on Status bar indicates whether the Network Master is controlled by
the command-based scripts or not. If touching this icon, buttons appear.
Touching the Turn Off button will disconnect the SCPI connection. Use this
button if disconnecting the Ethernet cable.
Touching the Enable Local Control button will allow the panel operation with
keeping SCPI connection. This function is useful for debugging the control
software.
3.7 In-band Control

In-band Control remotely controls Network Master via a port. This control
method is available when Ethernet application is running in the Network
Master. This allows users to control Network Masters via a device under test or
a network under test, etc.
1. Start Ethernet application except Pass Through and Cable Test without the
OTN layer in Network Master.
2. Set Nickname and In-band TCP port in Remote Control.
3. Select Allow In-band control in In-band Setup, and set an IP address, etc.
4. Start the Discovery application in Network Master used as a controller.
5. Search for other Network Masters using the Discovery application, and control
them.
In-band Control only switches the application of Network Master.
56
File Access via USB Interface
3.8 File Access via USB Interface

You can access the mass storage of the Network Master by connecting the USB
cable.
This function is useful to copy the files to PC, or confirm the test results.
1. Close all applications by touching Close icon on the Application Tool Bar.
2. Connect the USB cable between PC and USB type B connector of the Service
Interface.
3. If PC has detected the Network Master, copy files or folders to PC using PC

software (Explorer of Windows etc.).
If applications are running on the Network Master, you cannot access the mass storage.
57
3.9 File Access via Ethernet Interface

3.9.1 Accessing files in Network Master from the PC
The mass storage of the Network Master can be shared with your PC via
Ethernet interface.

available in the Network screen as described in the Graphical User Interface
chapter.
3. Select Share File System in the File Sharing settings.
4. Start Explorer on your PC.
5. Enter the IP address of Network Master into the address bar.

For example, enter like \\192.168.10.4\. The shared folder appears.
If applications are running on the Network Master, you cannot access the mass storage.
The folders and files in the mass storage are set to read-only.
3.9.2 Mounting the Shared Folder of Networked PC to the Network Master
Network Master can mount the shared folder of the networked PC.
1. Create the folder in the PC.
2. Right-click on the folder and click Property.
3. Click Sharing tab, and click Share button to set shared.
58
File Access via Ethernet Interface


available in the Network screen as described in the Graphical User Interface
chapter.
6. Select Mount Remote Folder in the File Sharing settings.
7. Enter the IP address of networked PC, User name, Folder name etc.
Note that enter User name of User Account of the PC.
8. Touch Apply. If the remote folder has mounted, "CONNECTED" will be shown.
Then close dialog box.
9. Touch File Manager icon in Instruments Toolbar. The PC shared folder will be
mounted to the instrument Internal\remote folder.
59
3.10 GPS Receiver

3.10.1 G0325A GPS Receiver
G0325A GPS Receiver contains GPS antenna and GPS receiver and is used by
connecting to AUX connector of Network Master. The synchronization
accuracy against UTC is ±1 μs or less.
The GPS receiver is used for:
Precise time synchronization, when making one way Frame Transfer Delay
measurements as part of the Ethernet Service Activation Test.
Clock source in an IEEE 1588v2 system
Timing source for synchronizing Ethernet transmitters
To perform Sync Test of Ethernet application, use the MU100090A. Installing the
MT1000A-005 AUX I/O is also necessary.
Activating the GPS receiver

The GPS receiver is activated automatically if it has connected to Network
Master.
Using the GPS service

One purpose of the external GPS receiver is to provide for precise one way
Frame Transfer Delay measurements as part of the Ethernet Service Activation
Test.
When the GPS receiver is activated and the active interface is Ethernet, the
Network Master will calibrate its internal time base to the ultra precise time
signal from the GPS receiver. The calibration process takes approximately 1
minute.
3.10.2 MU100090A GPS Disciplined Oscillator
The MU100090A needs to connect GPS antenna and and to be connected to

the MT1000A using J1705A AUX conversion Adaptor.
Activating the GPS receiver

Touch the GPS icon, and setting MU100090A Power to On will activate the
GPS receiver.
To realize ±45 ns rms accuracy against UTC, all the following conditions
should be met.
60
GPS Receiver
Warm up three hours or more after turning the MU100090A power on.
Synchronize Rubidium oscillator by capturing GPS satellites for 30 minutes or
more or by inputting the signal to 1pps Sync In connector for 30 minutes or
more.
Keep ambient temperature constant.
Avoid vibration and shock.
After removing the GPS antenna, keep the surrounding temperature as constant as
possible and avoid vibration and shock.
3.10.3 Operating GPS Receiver
GPS Icon
An icon in the status bar will indicate the current GPS status. One of the
following icons will be shown:
The GPS is receiving signal from a sufficient number of

satellites.
GPS receiver is not connected.
Touching the icon will display an information pop-up dialog box.
The pop-up dialog box shows the current GPS status, and, for purely
informational purposes, the number of satellites used for position fix, and the
current geolocation of the GPS receiver, in degrees and decimal minutes
format.
When the MU100090A is installed, the following buttons appear in the pop-up
dialog box.
MU100090A Power: Touch the button to turn on the MU100090A power or turn
off.
Antenna Power: Touch the button to set the feeding power voltage to the
antenna.
J1702A GPS Antenna accepts both voltages.
Sync Mode: Touch the button to select the signal to use to the built-in Rubidium
Oscillator synchronization.
Refer to MU100090A Block Diagram.
61
3.11 Remote Control via GPIB

Using a J1667A GPIB-USB Converter, an optional accessory, allows users to
control Network Master via GPIB. GPIB address of Network Master can be set
in the Remote Control.
Command-Based Remote Control is available via GPIB control. MX100001A

MT1000A/MT1100A Control Software does not support operation via GPIB.
62
4 Graphical User Interface
This chapter provides a general introduction to the graphical user interface
(GUI). The descriptions of the screens, sub-screens and major dialog boxes
related to specific technologies and applications are placed in separate
chapters.
63
Graphical User Interface
4.1 General Handling of the GUI

The Network Master is equipped with a touch screen display, except for the key
to switch the instrument on/off. The operating principle of the graphical user
interface (GUI) presented on the touch screen display is that it guides you
through all setup steps required for running a specific test and then finally
presents you with the test results. You can also navigate back and forth
between setup steps and result presentation to re-run a test with new parameter
settings if required.
4.1.1 GUI Concept
The GUI can be split up into two functional spaces or levels: the desktop and
the workspace.
The desktop is the entry level which appears after the booting. It consists of
the application selector, which allows you to start a new application, and the
result file browser, which allows you to access previously created and stored
test results.
The workspace is where you work with a specific application (i.e. set up and
run a test and inspect the test results). Your selection on the desktop creates
the workspace and loads relevant data into it.
Application selector
The application selector loads a new application into the workspace. A new
application can be either one of the standard applications provided with the
instrument or a previously saved application with partial or full configuration
of interface/test setup parameters.
Result file browser

The result file browser loads the results and configuration of a previous test
into the workspace. This allows you to generate reports from the results and/or
to rerun the test (either using the original configuration or with various
configuration modifications).
A specific set of resources (i.e. ports) are assigned to a workspace when it is created.
More than one workspace can therefore exist at the same time, each assigned to
different resources.
64
General Handling of the GUI
4.1.2 Navigating in the GUI
As shown in the previous figure, you can navigate from the application selector
to a specific application in the workspace vertically. You can navigate between
the application selector and the result file browser in the desktop horizontally.
In this way, you can switch screens in both horizontal and vertical navigation.
Horizontal navigation at desktop level
You can switch between the application selector and the result file browser by
touching the tab displayed in the bottom right-hand corner and the bottom left-
hand corner.
Horizontal navigation within a workspace
In the workspace you can step through the setup by touching the navigation
tabs displayed in the bottom corners of the screen. The right-hand tab brings
you to the next step in the setup, while the left-hand tab allows you to take a
step backwards.
Alternatively, you can use the screen indicator at the bottom of the screen to
switch between ports setup, test setup and test result.
It is also possible to loop back directly to the ports setup from the test result
screen if you need to rerun the test with different settings.
To get from the Test Setup to the Test Result screen during a new test, you must run the
test. This is done by touching the 'Start' icon in the Application toolbar, which is the
expandable toolbar shown on the right-hand side of the screen. Please refer to the
separate Toolbars section for information about the toolbars.
Vertical navigation between desktop and workspace
When an application is currently running, the application selector screen will

contain a tab at the bottom which allows you to go directly to the screen last
displayed in the application's workspace. Similarly, the result file browser
screen will contain a tab at the bottom which brings you to the test result
screen of the running application.
65
From a setup screen you can return to the application selector using the tab at
the top of the screen. Test result screens contain a tab at the top which returns
you to the result file browser.
4.1.3 Layout of the GUI Screens

Startup Splash Screen The Network Master starts up with a splash screen that shows the GUI concept
of desktop/workspace and the various screen types. It indicates both
application selector and result file browser as entry points.
Status icons There are status icons of the battery and the network connections at bottom of
the screen. This blue area at bottom of screen is the "status bar".
When the network connection is unusable, the red cross ( ) appears on the
icon.
66
Battery status
Refer to "Battery Status Information".
Link status of Ethernet service interface
WLAN (when the option is installed.)
Bluetooth (when the option is installed.)
VNC (Virtual Network Computing)
Controlled by the remote command
Connection status of GPS receiver
External PC status
Speaker On/Off status
4.1.3.1 Starting the Application
Application Selector The Application Selector screen is the main entry point after startup of the
Network Master. From here you can choose which application/test to run:
either one of the standard applications or a previously saved pre-configured
application.
Applications
The icon you need may not be displayed because icons on screen are limited to four.
You may need to scroll the row of applications to display the relevant icon.
Touching + OTN adds OTN layer for SDH/SONET Ethernet or Fibre Channel
applications.
Aside from the application buttons, the application selector screen also
contains a tab for showing/hiding the Instrument toolbar and a navigation tab
to the Result File Browser screen.
Favorites
67
A Favorite application is basically an application with an associated set of port

resources and specific settings. When launching a Favorite application, the
associated port resources are automatically allocated and the associated
settings are subsequently loaded.
Favorites require a specific number of resources to run corresponding to the

number of resources used when the Favorite was first created. If the resources
of the Favorite are not available, user is prompted to select alternative port(s).
Touching Favorites button displays the screen below.
Creating favorites
1. Go to the workspace of the application you want to save as favorite.
Touch the Applications button and touch an icon to be registered.
Return to the workspace by touching the button at bottom.
2. Touch the Application toolbar tab.
3. Touch the Load Save icon.
4. Touch the File name field.
5. Enter the file name using the dialog box.
6. Select Add to Favorites in the Save/Load dialog box.
7. Touch the Save settings button.
On the Favorites screen a new favorite is now created containing the current
application resources and settings.
Deleting favorites
1. Touch and hold an icon in Favorites screen until a pop-up menu appears.
2. Touch Delete Favorite.
3. Touch Delete if the confirmation dialog box appears.
68
Renaming favorites
1. Touch and hold an icon in Favorites screen until a pop-up menu appears.
2. Touch Rename Favorite.
3. Input a new name on the opening dialog box.
Importing favorites
Settings files (.cfg) can be registered to Favorites by using the File Manager.
1. Open File Manager from the Instrument Tool bar.
2. Select to the .cfg file to import as favorite.
3. Touch the "Add to Favorites" button ( ).
Favorites cannot have the same name. If conflicts occur, rename the .cfg file or the
existing favorite before copying.
Utilities
Applications to view test results or a fiber edge surface are provided in Utilities
application.
Touching Utilities button displays the screen below.
Scenario
Scenario Mgr.: - manages the scenario file which runs applications
automatically. Parameters in the file can be edited.
If the scenario files are loaded, the icons will appear in Scenario row.
Utility
GPS: - logs data from GPS receiver and shows the position of the satellites.
PDF Viewer: - to view PDF files created by Report.
VIP: - to view a fiber edge surface with the Video Inspection Probe. This icon
appears when Video Inspection Probe is connected to a USB connector.
Wireshark: - to view capture files (pcap) saved by Frame Capture from
Ethernet applications.
69
Result File Browser The Result File Browser screen is the other entry point after startup of the
Network Master. From here you can access the results of previous tests to view
the statistics directly, to generate PDF reports or to do both. Refer to "Accessing
Previous Tests and Test Results".
Browses the folder.
Sets the filter of files.
Loads the result and starts the application with view mode.
Loads the result.
Creating the report from the result.
Selects single file.
Selects multiple files.
Deletes the selected file(s).
In addition to the buttons for accessing and handling test results, the result file
browser also contains a tab for showing/hiding the Instrument toolbar and a
navigation tab to the Application Selector screen.
4.1.3.2 Switching the Applications
Applications Switcher If running multiple applications, you can switch the application display by
Application Switcher. There are three ways to display Application Switcher:
In the desktop level, if two or more applications are running, touch and hold
the workspace navigation button in the bottom center of the screen.
In the workspace, touch the application in the left side of status bar.
From the Power Button menu.
70
The running applications appear in the Applications Switcher. Touching the

button switches the application on the screen.
4.1.3.3 Operating the Application
Ports Setup screen The Ports Setup screen is the first screen in the workspace. It may contain one
or more setup pages, with a row of buttons at the top of the screen allowing
you to switch between the pages and between ports (when relevant).
It consists of several "areas":
The navigation area at the top of the screen contains a number of buttons
representing a structure for the current interface, which allows you to select a
specific port, transmitter/receiver and layer.
The setup area (the main area of the screen) is where the parameters for
setting up the interface are displayed. The contents of the area changes
depending on what is currently selected in the navigation area.
71
The status area (to the right of the setup area) shows status information for the
currently selected port and layer. You can access more detailed status
information from here by touching the status summary boxes and buttons.
It may contain one or more setup pages, with a row of navigation buttons at the
top of the screen allowing you to switch between the pages and between ports
(when relevant). In addition, the Ports Setup screen also contains the
expandable Application toolbar and the navigation tabs for horizontal and
vertical navigation.
Test Setup screen The Test Setup screen is the second screen in the workspace. It may contain
one or more setup pages, with a row of navigation buttons at the top of the
screen allowing you to switch between the pages and between ports (when
relevant).
In addition to the various parameters, the Test Setup screen also contains the
Application toolbar and the navigation tabs for horizontal and vertical
navigation.
Test Results screen The Test Results screen is the last screen in the workspace. It generally
contains several pages, reflecting the progress of the test. Navigation buttons at
the top of the screen will allow you to switch between the pages and between
ports (when relevant).
72
During a measurement, Measurement start time, Elapsed time, and Remaining

time of measurement are displayed in Navigation area. Remaining time of
measurement is not displayed if Stop function is set to Manual stop in Control
screen.
Time display during a measurement
Once a measurement ended, Measurement end time appears right-hand in

Navigation area.
Time display after a measurement ended
In addition to the results, whose presentation varies from application to

application, the Test results screen also contains the Application toolbar and
the navigation tabs for horizontal and vertical navigation.
4.1.4 Lamp Indication of Alarm/Error Status
Alarm and error status is indicated by colored Lamp icons. The following
colors are used:
Red Lamp icon indicates that an alarm has appeared.
Yellow Lamp icon indicates that an error has appeared.
Green Lamp icon indicates a 'no trouble' situation.
73
Note that the same colors are also used for indication of status in other
contexts, e.g. in the display of test results.
Double-ringed icons with history information
The Lamp icons are double-ringed, with the inner ring indicating the current
status and the outer ring showing history information (i.e. alarms and errors in
the alarm trap since the last reset/clearing of history).
'Error' situation currently, but alarm recorded previously.
'No trouble' situation currently, but alarm recorded previously.
'No trouble' situation currently, but error recorded previously.
The example below shows the Lamp icons used in a screen displayed by
selecting alarm and error status on the ports setup screen.
4.1.4.1 Test Status Summary
In the status bar, an icon indicates the summarized Test Status of every running
test application (not viewers or utilities). It is possible to show/hide the
summarized Test Status, refer to Miscellaneous in "Instrument Toolbar" section.
The Test Status for an application is a combination of the following items:
Thresholds violations
Alarms/Errors
The following lists the different icons of the summarized Test Status and the
their meaning.
74
One or more applications have alarms, had alarms in the past or have failing
thresholds.
One or more applications have errors or had errors in the past.
All applications are OK.
Test Status for an application is only updated during testing. When testing is stopped it
will retain its status until testing is restarted or the application is closed.
Touching the summarized Test Status icon will open a dialog showing the
individual Test Status for every running applications. Touching an application
on the summary dialog box will dismiss the dialog and subsequently switch the
GUI to the selected application.
4.1.5 Keypads for Entering Text in Fields
Alphanumerical or purely numerical keypads are used to enter text in fields. By

touching the field you launch the related keypad. The layout (i.e. type) of a
specific keypad will depend on which type of text is required/valid for the field.
75
In general, a keypad consists of the character/number keys, a display field

showing the current text/number entry, various editing-related keys. For
number entries, the minimum and maximum values allowed are also shown.
When you launch a keypad from a field, the current field value is shown in the
keypad's display field.
Touch Ok to accept the new entry and close the keypad.
To close the keypad without accepting the change, touch Cancel or touch the
"X" symbol in the upper right-hand corner of the keypad.
4.1.6 User Pattern Editor
The 32-bits and 2048-bits user patterns are specified using the Pattern Editor.
You can view the pattern in either Hexadecimal, Binary or ASCII format and
use either a numpad, an ASCII table or a keyboard to set it up.
You use the numpad to edit the pattern in the Hex and Bin view modes, and
use either the ASCII table or the keyboard to edit in ASCII view mode.
For 2048-bits user patterns, you can use the Line Width drop-down menu to
specify how the pattern is displayed. The available values are: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64 bytes.
4.1.7 Prompts to Confirm Dependencies
When a parameter change spawns changes elsewhere because of

dependencies, you are prompted to accept or reject the change(s). A Confirm
Dependencies dialog box is displayed, with information about the dependency-
related changes.
76
Toolbars
You can switch whether displaying the Confirm Dependencies dialog box.
Refer to Miscellaneous in "Instrument Toolbar" section.
4.2 Toolbars
Two toolbars are available on the right-hand side of the screen: the desktop
toolbar (called the Instrument toolbar) and the expandable workspace toolbar
(called the Application toolbar).
The Instrument toolbar contains general system functions and information
(e.g. Instrument configuration, Battery time etc.). It is available directly on the
screens related to the desktop, but can also be accessed on the workspace-
related screens as a "sub-toolbar" inside the application toolbar.
The Application toolbar contains application-related functions and

information (e.g. Start/Stop test, Test progress etc.). It is available on the
screens related to a specific application (i.e. all workspace-related screens),
with the Instrument toolbar as a sub-toolbar.
4.2.1 Instrument Toolbar
The Instrument toolbar is shown in the figure below. When the toolbar is
hidden, it is represented by its icon tab in the top right-hand corner of the
screen.
77
The Instrument toolbar contains the following functions/status:

Instrument Information
Configuration (General, Network)
File Manager
Help
Resource monitoring
Instrument information
The Information icon launches the System Information screen. Touch the Update
About Info button to generate the instrument information.
The following information is presented on the screen:

System Information
Controller Information
Module(s) Information
Software Information
Battery Information
Self Test Results
78
Toolbars
To save the instrument information in an HTML file, touch the Save To File
button. This launches another dialog box, where you can specify file name and
location. For the icons, refer to "File Manager".
When there are "NG"s in the self test results, try to reboot Network Master. If "NG"s
remain in the self test results, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office.
Configuration
The Configuration icon launches the Global Configuration screen. From this screen,
it is possible to configure both the general instrument settings (such as date/time,
password etc.) and various network settings.
General The General screen contains the following configuration options:
LCD Brightness
Allows you to change the screen brightness by using the slide bar.
Power
Allows you to specify auto backlight duration and auto power-off time.
79
These settings are applied for the battery operation only.

When Wireshark application is running, Auto Backlight Off does not work.
Touch Screen Calibration

Allows you to calibrate the touch screen. Touch OK in the dialog box to start
the calibration.
Save the measurement results or settings before the touch screen calibration. Network
Master reboots after the touch screen calibration. The measurement data which is not
saved will be lost.
When operating with the battery, Network Master does not reboot.
Language
Allows you to select language for the screens, and the keypad layout.
Sound
Allows you to specify speaker and headphones on/off. Change the volume by
using the slide bar.
This icon indicates that the speaker is On.
This icon indicates that the speaker is Off.
Auto Save
Allows you to specify saving method of the measurement results.
Prompt: Confirms saving results or not after a test.
On : Saves results to the file automatically without notification every time a test
ends.
None: Does not save results. The results data are discarded if you do not save
the data manually.
System Password
Allows you to enable/disable password protection and to specify a new
password. When the password protection is enabled, starting applications and
editing applications are protected.
80
Toolbars
To change/set the password, select the one or more check boxes and then
touch the OK button. A numeric keypad is displayed.
To see the numbers as you type them on the keypad, select the Display
Password check box.
The password is set to 0614 as factory default.
Date/Time
Allows you to change the system date and time. Select a part in New Time or
New Date field and touch the up/down button.
If touching OK, the dialog box confirming the reboot appears. Touch Yes.
At the battery operation, Network Master does not reboot. Date and Time will be
changed when Network Master has booted by pressing the power button.
Miscellaneous
Logging Level allows you to specify the logging level. Select Off always. Other
options are used for the service use.
Show Confirmations allows you to specify whether showing the prompts to

confirm dependencies.
81
Show Test Summary allows you to specify whether to show the summarized
Test Status in the Status Bar. Refer to Test Status Summary for more details.
CSV Delimiter allows you to specify the delimiter character to be used when
generating output of Comma Separated Values.
Performance Verification Period is used to calculate the performance validation

due dates. Due dates are note calculated if the period is set to zero.
Enable Auto Power Up controls whether the Network Master starts

automatically when the external power is applied.
Restore Applications Defaults

Touching Restore Applications Defaults restores each application settings to
defaults.
Execute Self Test

Touching Execute Self Test starts the self test.
Save the measurement results or settings of the running applications before executing
the self test. Otherwise, the unsaved measurement data will be lost when Network
Master reboots.
When operating with the battery, Network Master does not reboot.
Erase Writable Partitions

Touching Erase Writable Partitions erase writable partitions.
Network The Network screen contains the following configuration options for the instrument's
network connection:
82
Toolbars
Ethernet
Allows the instrument to be connected to the Ethernet either via dynamic
addressing (DHCP) or via manual specification of IP address, subnet mask and
default gateway. These settings are applied for the Ethernet service interface.
This icon on Status bar indicates the link status of the Ethernet service interface.
WLAN
Allows the instrument to connect to a network via Wireless Local Area Network
(WLAN). Note that if WLAN is enabled, the instrument cannot connect to the
Ethernet via the Ethernet setting mentioned above.
This feature requires an option (MT1000A-003).
83
1. Touch the WLAN button. WLAN Setup dialog box appears.

2. Touch the Scan button. Scan results are displayed.
3. Select the network from scan results and touch the View button.
4. Touch the Add Network button. Specify relevant items of network, touch the
Add button.
5. Confirm that Status in WLAN Setup dialog box changes to Connected.
When the option is installed, this icon on Status bar indicates the connection
status of the WLAN.
To edit the settings of the current network, touch the Edit Network button.
The Event History button is available to diagnose the WLAN connection.
Bluetooth
Allows the instrument to use a Bluetooth connection.
This feature requires an option (MT1000A-003).
84
Toolbars
Enable Bluetooth: Enables using the Bluetooth.

Make visible: Allows to discover Network Master from other Bluetooth devices.
Share files using FTP: Allows to share files stored in Network Master via
Bluetooth. Login account and password are not required for the FTP
connection. Shared folder in Network Master is "/property/mnt/internal".
When the option is installed, this icon on Status bar indicates whether the
Bluetooth is enabled or disabled.
Remote Control
Allows you to change remote control options.
SCPI control TCP port: Touch the field to set port number used for remote
control via Ethernet service interface.
GPIB Address: Touch the field to set General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
address.
Enable Remote Reset: Selecting the check box allows users to reset the
Network Master from remote PC.
Allow remote PC connections: If selecting check box, remote PC control via
Ethernet is available.
In-band control TCP port: Touch the field to set a port number used for the
remote control via the test interface. Set a different number from the number
set at SCPI control TCP port.
Nickname: Touch the field to set a name of Network Master recognized by
Discovery that is the Ethernet application.
This icon on Status bar indicates whether the remote PC control is connected or
not.
VNC
Allows remote control of the instrument via Virtual Network Computing (VNC).
This icon on Status bar indicates whether the VNC is enabled or disabled.
Touching this icon enables or disables the VNC alternately.
85
File Sharing
Select Share File System to allows to share the data folder on networked PC.
Selecting Mount Remote Folder enables the parameter fields for mounting the
folder of networked PC.
IP Address: The IP address of the networked PC

Domain : The domain name of the networked PC
User: The username (account) of the networked PC
Password: The password for account
Folder Name: The name of the shared folder on the networked PC
After entering parameters, touch Apply. If mounting remote folder succeeded,

"CONNECTED" will be shown in Mount Status field.
Only enter the name of the shared folder, not the entire path shown in Windows displays.
Procedure of creating the shared folder on the networked PC:
1. Create the folder in the PC.
2. Right-click on the folder and click Property.
3. Click Sharing tab, and click Share button to set shared.
The PC shared folder will be mounted to the instrument Internal\remote folder.
File Manager
The File Manager icon launches the file manager screen. From this screen it is
possible to configure the instrument's internal file storage facility as well as to
perform all kinds of file transactions, both internally and from/to any external file
storage source (USB memory stick etc.).
86
Toolbars
Appears on the remote control application screen only.

Displays the local folder of the control PC.
Appears on the remote control application screen only.
Displays the folder of the Network Master.
Sets the current folder to the home folder.
Moves to the home folder.
Creates a new folder.
Edits the file name or the folder name.
Deletes the selected file(s) or folder(s).
Copies the selected file(s) or folder(s).
Pastes the file(s) or folder(s).
Selects a file or a folder.
Selects multiple files or folders.
Switches the GUI layout.
Adds the selected files (.cfg) to "Favorites".
Shows contents of a text file.
Help
The Help icon launches the help screen with context-related help. You can search for
specific words or phrases in the help and also step through previously displayed help
topics.
87
Moves to the Help list topic.
Back
Forward
Shows/hides the search box and buttons at bottom.
Searches backward.
Searches forward.
When Case Sensitive is selected, searches distinguishing the upper case and the
lower case.
Resource monitoring
The Resource monitoring icon launches a screen showing which applications are
currently activated and which ports on the connector panel are assigned to each of
the applications.
88
Toolbars
Each application is associated with up to two Views, Only one View can have
control at a time. Having control gives user full access to all application
functions, including modification of setting parameters, load and save
functions, and running the test. Without control, users are only allowed to
browse the current application settings and results.
Touch Launch New View button to launch a new View.
Touch the Change Control button to pass control between Views:
Red background indicates a View that does not have control.
Blue background indicates the View in control.
Touching a View local to you, will automatically show the desktop of the
associated application.
Touch the 'X' to force termination of an application and its Views and the
release of the associated port resources. This is the only way to terminate an
application over which you do not have control.
4.2.2 Application Toolbar
The Application toolbar consists of two columns plus the Instrument toolbar.
You can expand/collapse the toolbar as shown in the figure below. The left-
most column, which is always displayed, contains the most commonly used
functions and status indicators.
Left-most column
The left-most column contains the following functions and status indicators:
Start
Touch the Start icon to start the currently selected application/test. The icon changes
to the Stop icon shown below, which can then be used to stop the test.
Stop
Touch the Stop icon to stop the currently running application/test. The back color
indicates the pass/fail status. When the test has stopped, the icon changes to the Start
icon shown above.
Traffic Start
89
This icon appears in case of applications having traffic generation. Touch the Traffic
Start icon to start sending traffic of all ports under test. The icon changes to the
Traffic Stop icon shown below.
Traffic Stop
This icon appears in case of applications having traffic generation. Touch the Traffic
Stop icon to stop the traffic of all ports under test. When the traffic has stopped, the
icon changes to the Traffic Start icon shown above.
Port Status
Shows the current pass/fail status of the test. Green means pass, red means fail.
Port Status is the summary of all ports under test. If a failure occurs in any layer, Port
Status turns into red.
Help
Touch this icon to access the online help for the currently displayed screen or dialog
box. You can search for specific words or phrases in the help and also step through
previously displayed help topics.
90
Toolbars
Moves to the topic when touching the help icon.
Back
Forward
Shows/hides the search box and buttons at bottom.
Searches backward.
Searches forward.
If Case Sensitive is selected, searches distinguishing the upper case and the
lower case.
Report
Touch this icon to create a report containing the current application results and
settings.
1. Touch the Select Format field to select the format of the report file.
The application name is shown in Select Report field.
2. Touch fields of Customer, Project, Operator and Notes to set strings. These
contents are output in the report.
3. To print a logo in the report, select the Include Logo check box. Touching ...
button launches the dialog box selecting a file.
4. Select Include Performance Verification dates check box to print Performance

Verification dates in the report.
5. Touch Next button.
91
6. Select check boxes of items outputting to the report. Touching Customize

button launches the dialog box selecting items of statistics.
7. Touching Generate button starts the report generation.
Adobe® Reader® is recommended as a PDF viewer to open or print out the report.
"Include Performance Verification dates" check box appears in version 3.01 or later.
Creating reports from the Result File Browser will not take up port resources on the
system. From the Result File Browser, select the result file for which you want to create a
report and touch the Report icon ( ).
The Report Generator will remember previous used setup parameters. The first page is
common for all applications while setup parameters on subsequent pages are
remembered on a per application basis.
Alarm/Error Insert
Touch this icon to activate the stimulus specified in the stimuli setup available in the
expanded Application toolbar. Only relevant if the stimulus has been set to manual
insertion. The stimuli function is used to generate special or abnormal conditions
during a test.
The color of the icon is coded according to the current level of stimuli inserted.
The different levels are prioritized so that higher levels of stimuli overrule lower
levels. The overall highest stimuli level (see the list below) for all ports
included in the application is reflected.
Red: Alarms are currently being generated.

(highest level)
Yellow: Errors are currently being generated.
Green: No alarms/error are automatically inserted.

Active stimuli require manual insertion by touching the Alarm/Error Insert
icon.
Blue: Frequency, Pointer, or Payload offset stimulus is currently applied.
(lowest level)
White: All stimulus is disabled.
Close
92
Toolbars
Touch this icon to close the application.
Expanded Application toolbar
The Application toolbar is expanded/collapsed by touching the tab placed

above the left-most column. The column displayed in the expanded toolbar
contains the following functions:
Restart Testing
Touch this icon to restart the current test.
Load Save
Touch this icon to open Load/Save dialog box. You can load or save Setup file or
Result file. Only files matching the current application type are selectable for
loading.
When loading setup files, the number of port resources enclosed in the file has to match
that of the current application.
When loading result files, the exact physical ports enclosed in the file has to match that
of the current application.
Apart from actual results, result files also contain settings sampled at the time the test
was performed. When loading result files these settings will overwrite current application
settings.
Loading result files into a viewer will not take up port resources on the system. This is
practical if you only want to review previous results and don't need to run test again.
From the Result File Browser, select the result file you want to view and touch the View
icon ( ) at right hand top of the screen.
Stimuli setup
Various fields and buttons are available for setting up a stimulus signal to
provoke a special or abnormal situation during the test. When the signal has
been specified, the stimulus is sent by touching the Alarm/Error Insert icon (
).
The stimulus signal is sent via the transmitter, and the received signal can
simultaneously be inspected as a related status or result display. This allows to
evaluate the behavior of the device under test.
93
The setup options vary depending on the stimulus mode (i.e. the signal type).
Common functions for all stimulus modes are the port selection and stimulus
type drop-down menus. Touching the Clear all stimuli button clears/resets the
current stimulus settings.
In case of applications having traffic generation, the Traffic start button or the
Traffic stop button appears for each port.
94
Startup and Switch-off Sequences
4.3 Startup and Switch-off Sequences

This section describes what takes place when you switch the Network Master
on and off as well as when you start up and close down an application.
4.3.1 Instrument Startup
When you switch on the instrument, the first screen displayed is a splash
screen - introducing you to the GUI concept of the desktop/workspace and the
various screen types (see the figure in the GUI Concept section). Then the
Application Selector screen is displayed.
4.3.2 Application Startup
When you touch an icon on the Application Selector screen to start an

application, a workspace is created for that application and the relevant data is
loaded into it. When the loading is complete, you are prompted to select the
instrument resources (i.e. ports) that will be allocated to the application/test.
After the selection of resources, the Ports Setup screen is displayed, with the
interface type(s) relevant for the selected application.
Some of the application icons are "double-icons", allowing you to start the application
with an OTN signal layer if relevant. Be careful to touch the correct part of the icon when
starting the application.
You can also start an application by selecting the result file on the Report File
Browser screen. Refer to the next section.
95
4.3.3 Accessing Previous Tests and Test Results
When you select test result files on the Report File Browser screen, you can
choose to create either a report from the results or a workspace containing the
test setup data and its results.
Creating a workspace for a previous test allows you to view the test results in
the GUI and also to rerun the test if required (either with the same setup or
with changed parameter settings). You are brought directly to the Test Results
screen when you touch the View/Load File button, but can navigate to the
other screens in the workspace from there.
When you touch the VIEW FILE button, an application starts in Viewer mode. In this
mode, you cannot start measurement. This mode is used to view the test result.
When you touch the LOAD FILE button, an application starts using the setting in the
file. If other application is using ports, the following message appears. In this case,
you can start the application in Viewer mode.
When you touch the CREATE REPORT button, the file manager dialog box is
displayed, allowing you to name and save the report (in PDF format).
4.3.4 Closing an Application
When you touch the Close icon in the application toolbar, you are prompted to
confirm that you really want to close the current application. If you touch
"Yes", the workspace is closed and you are returned to the desktop (i.e. the
Application Selector screen). The resources previously allocated to the
application are freed to be used by another application if required.
96
Startup and Switch-off Sequences
4.3.5 Switching Off the Instrument
When you press the Power button on the instrument, the power-off menu is
displayed. The menu contains the menu item Shut Down, and when you select
that, you are prompted to confirm that you really want to switch off the
instrument completely.
If you touch "Yes", the shutdown is announced, and then after a few moments
the power is turned off.
If you have any applications still active when you switch off the instrument, these
applications will be closed automatically without any configuration data and/or test
results being saved.
97
98
5 SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn
Applications
This chapter describes the graphical user interface (i.e. screens, sub-screens
and major dialogs) related to SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn applications. Sub-
screens and dialogs are described under the main screen from which they are
activated/launched.
The following settings and applications are available:

SDH Setup and Status
SONET Setup and Status
E1 Setup and Status
DS1/J1 Setup and Status
E3 Setup and Status
DS3 Setup and Status
E4 Setup and Status
APS
BERT
RTD
You can switch between SDH and SONET using the 'SDH/SONET switching' drop-down
menu on the SDH and SONET structure setup screens. 'SDH and SONET switching' also
switches PDH and DSn.
99
SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn Applications
5.1 SDH Setup and Status

An STM-xx button in the navigation area of the Ports Setup screen gives you
access to the SDH setup for the transmitter and/or receiver of the currently
selected port.
Refer to SDH/SONET switching for switching to SDH.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) is a standardized protocol that transfers digital

signals over optical fiber using lasers. At low transmission rates data can also be
transferred via an electrical interface.
The SDH interface uses the electrical BNC connectors and the optical ports.
MU100010A Connector Panel
5.1.1 Transmitter Setup
5.1.1.1 Physical Setup
When the transmitter is set up with an SDH interface, touching the Tx button in
the navigation area will launch the following screen. (Note that the SDH Tx
check box above the connector panel illustration is selected.)
This screen allows you to enable the optical or electrical interface of the SDH
transmitter. It can also be used to confirm the current status of the selected
port.
The configuration options available in the setup area of the screen are
described below. The status information is described in a separate section.
Transmitter
100
Use the Transmitter drop-down menus to select to the transmitter.
Mode
Use the Mode drop-down menus to select to the behavior of the transmitter.
OH overwrite position
Only enabled when the OH overwrite has been selected to the behavior of the
transmitter. Use the drop-down menu to select the relevant overwrite position.
The available values are:
SOH
A1/A2 byte
K1/K2 byte
S1 byte
DCC1-3 byte
DCC4-12 byte
J0 byte
1 byte of SOH
When '1 byte of SOH' is selected, touch the Byte Pos button to launch the 1
Byte of SOH dialog box. Select the byte to overwrite in the dialog box.
Clock Configuration Use the drop-down menu to select the clock source. This is fixed to Received
when the Port Mode is set to Through or OH overwrite.
Timing Source
Internal : Internal clock of the module
External : The clock input to the connector
Received: The clock generated from the received signal
When External or Received is set, the right hand lamp indicates whether clock
is detected or not.
Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information when the option except "Electrical" is
selected to the transmitter.
5.1.1.2 SDH Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's SDH
layer will launch the following screen.
101
The general principle in setting up the SDH frame is to select the relevant
values for the various containers in the multiplexing structure. This is done
either via a drop-down menu or via a launched dialog box, by touching a drop-
down menu or a button in the frame structure diagram.
Note that the currently 'active path' in the structure is highlighted. Note also
that the changes you make will be reflected in the text displayed in the STM-xx
button in the navigation area, if relevant.
Follows To make the Port 2 transmitter follow the Port 1 transmitter (i.e. copy its
settings), touch the right-most button in the navigation area and select the Tx1
in the drop-down menu. The Port 2 settings continue to follow the Port 1
transmitter change. The default setting is None. Note that the Port 1 transmitter
cannot follow the Port 2 transmitter.
TCM Select the TCM (Tandem Connection Monitoring). The available TCM is
decided by multiplex structure. If you select other TCM, the multiplex structure
on the setup area will be changed.
The possible settings are:

Off
N1 (VC-4)
N1 (VC-3)
N2 (VC-12/11)
SDH/SONET Allows you to switch between SDH and SONET.

switching
SOH Editor You can configure the section overhead (SOH) in a special dialog box (SOH
Editor), which is launched when you touch the SOH button.
102
The setup principle is the same in this editor dialog as in the SDH structure.
Touching a button or opening a drop-down menu will open for new editor
dialog boxes, new value selections etc.
S1: Synchronization status
J0: Regenerator section trace
Idle Char is an ASCII code used for the padding.
A1, A2: Framing
Defined A1 as F6h (1111011b), A2 as 28h (00101000b).
B1: BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) This byte cannot be set.
E1, E2: Orderwire
E1 is part of the RSOH, E2 is part of the MSOH.
F1: User channel
D1-D3: RS (Regenerator Section) data communication channel (DCCR)
D4-D12: MS (Multiplex Section) data communication channel (DCCM )
B2: BIP-N×24 These bytes cannot be set.
K1, K2(bit 1 to bit 5): Automatic protection switching (APS) channel
K2(bit 6 to bit 8): MS-RDI (Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication)
M0, M1: MS-REI (Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication)
Z2: Spare byte
H1, H2, H3: AU-n pointer These bytes cannot be set.
This editor format is the same as SOH of STM-1. For STM-4/16/64, SOH bytes
in other column are filled with value set by the editor. In case of STM-4 SOH in
following figure, you can edit A1A2 bytes in thicker lines cell. The bytes in gray
cell are filled with the value in left side cell in thicker lines.
POH Editor Touching a POH button launches the VC-x POH Editor dialog box. The
contents of the dialog box depends on which path overhead you are
configuring.
103
J1: Path Trace

B3: Path BIP-8 This byte cannot be set.
C2: Signal label
G1: (bit 1 to 4) REI (bit 5) RDI (bit 6 and 7) Reserved (bit 8) Spare
F2,F3: Path user channels
H4: Multiframe indicator
K3: (bit 1 to 4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channels (bit 5 and 6)
Spare (bit 7 and 8) Data link
N1: Network operator byte
J2: Path Trace

V5: (bit 1 and 2) BIP-2 (bit 3) REI (bit 4) RFI (bit 5 to 7) Signal label (bit 8) RDI
N2: Network operator byte
K4: (bit 1) Extended signal label (bit 2) Low order virtual concatenation (bit 3
and 4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channels (bit 5 to 7) Reserved (bit
8) Data link
Bulk Pattern To set up the bulk pattern, touch the Configure xxxxx button to launch the Bulk
Pattern dialog box.
Pattern type
Select a predefined pattern or define a user pattern.
User [32] bit, User [2048] bit: 32 bits or 2048 bits length pattern.
104
The field which shows bit length is enabled. Touch the field to launch the
dialog box to define the bit pattern. Refer to The User Pattern Editor.
PRBS9 to PRBS31: Pseudo-random bit sequence. The number indicates the bit
length of sequence.
For example, bit length of PRBS9 is 29-1=511.
Pattern logic is enabled.
All 0's, All 1's: All bits are 0, all bits are 1.
Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7: Bit pattern such as
"010101...", "100010001000...", "1000000010000000...".
2 in 8: Bit pattern such as "010000100100001001000010...".
ITU Standard
Touching the 'ITU standard' button will apply standard recommended Pattern
type for currently selected SDH frame.
C-4: PRBS 23 Inverse
C-3 (VC-4): PRBS 23 Inverse
C-3 (VC-3): PRBS 15 Inverse
5.1.2 Receiver Setup
When the receiver is set up with an SDH interface, touching the Rx button in
the navigation area will launch the following screen. (Note that the SDH Rx
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the receiver in SDH
mode. It can also be used to confirm the current status of the selected port.
Receiver Touch the button corresponding to the relevant interface type.
Off: No interface
105
SFP/SFP+: Optical interface

Electrical : Electrical interface (BNC connector)
Receiver gain Only relevant for electrical receivers. Select the attenuation and impedance
mode from the drop-down menu.
Terminate: Up to 12 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
Monitor: 20 dB linear attenuation and up to 12 dB cable attenuation, nominal
impedance.
Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information when Optical Transmitter is selected.
5.1.2.2 SDH Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's SDH layer
will launch the following screen.
The manner of setting up the SDH interface of receiver is the same as that of
transmitter. Refer to SDH Frame Setup in "Transmitter Setup".
Follows To make the currently selected receiver follow either the transmitter or Port 1
receiver (i.e. copy its settings), touch the right-most button in the navigation
area and select the relevant value in the drop-down menu. The receiver settings
continue to follow the change of either the transmitter or Port 1 receiver. The
default setting is None. Note that the Port 1 receiver cannot follow the Port 2
receiver.

Off
N1 (VC-4)
N1 (VC-3)
N2 (VC-12/11)

switching
106
5.1.3 Status Information
This section describes the status information available for the SDH layer in the
status area of the Ports Setup screen.
5.1.3.1 Status Summary
The status summary displayed for the SDH layer consists of the following
information:
Physical Status The topmost part of the status area gives you access to information about the
current physical status of the selected interface. A summary consisting of the
most relevant status indicators is displayed constantly. By touching the
summary, you can launch a display that contains the detailed status
information.
Alarm/Error Status The middle part of the status area gives you access to alarm and error
information for the selected interface. The status is indicated by the lamp color.
A summary consisting of the most relevant alarm/error indications is displayed

constantly. By touching the summary, you can launch a display that contains
all alarms/errors.
Capture/Monitor At the bottom of the status area are below buttons that give you access to
Status
various capture/monitor information. By touching a button, you can launch the
corresponding information display.
OH capture
Tributary scan
Transceiver
5.1.3.2 Physical Details
Touching the topmost summary box in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
launches the dialog box shown below.
This dialog box presents detailed information about the current physical status
of the received signal at the STM-1/4/16/64 optical/electrical interface.
107
The physical status information consists of the following parameters.
When Receiver is set to OFF, 'N/A's are displayed.
Rx signal level
Signal Level (Optical) shows the optical signal level in dBm.
Signal Level (Electrical) shows the electrical signal level in dB.
'nan' is displayed when input level is too low to detect the signal level. The
lamp indicates LOS status.
Deviation
This field shows the deviation from the relevant nominal bit rate:
STM-1/1e: 155 520 000 bps
STM-4: 622 080 000 bps
STM-16: 2 488 320 000 bps
STM-64: 9 953 280 000 bps
Bit rate
The current bit rate is shown (in bps).
Pattern bit rate

This field shows the effective bit rate of the patterns received (that is, the
number of pattern bits received per second).
Tx signal level
When optical is selected, this field shows the output power of the optical
transmitter.
When electrical is selected, 'N/A' is displayed.
5.1.3.3 Alarms and Errors
Touching the middle summary box in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
allows you to launch the display shown below.
108
This screen contains detailed alarm and error information related to the SDH
interface. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal

LOF : Loss of Frame
OOF : Out of Frame
MS-AIS: Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
MS-RDI : Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
AU-AIS: Administrative Unit Alarm Indication Signal
AU-LOP: Administrative Unit Loss of pointer
HP-TIM: High order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch
HP-PLM: High order Path Payload Mismatch
HP-UNEQ : High order Path UNEQuipped
HP-RDI : High order Path Remote Defect Indication
TU-AIS: Tributary Unit Alarm Indication Signal
TU-LOP: Tributary Unit Loss of pointer
TU-LOM: Tributary Unit Loss of Multiframe
LP-TIM: Low order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch
LP-UNEQ : Low order Path UNEQuipped
LP-RDI : Low order Path Remote Defect Indication
LP-PLM: Low order Path Payload Mismatch
LSS: Loss of Sequence Synchronization
TC-UNEQ : Tandem Connection UNEQuipped
TC-LTC: Tandem Connection Loss of Tandem Connection
TC-TIM: Tandem Connection Trace Identifier Mismatch
TC-AIS: Tandem Connection Alarm Indication Signal
TC-RDI : Tandem Connection Remote Defect Indication
TC-ODI : Tandem Connection Outgoing Defect Indication
Errors
A1A2: Bytes used for the frame synchronization
B1: The byte of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity 8)
B2: The bytes of BIP-N×24 (Bit Interleaved Parity N×24)
MS-REI : Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
B3: The byte of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity 8)
HP-REI : High order Path Remote Error Indication
V5/B3: BIP-2 of VC-12/VC-11 or BIP-8 of Low order VC3
LP-REI : Low order Path Remote Error Indication
Pattern errors: Bit error detected in the payload
AU-NDF : Administrative Unit New Data Flag
TU-NDF : Tributary Unit New Data Flag
Switch: APS switching occurred
TC-IEC: Tandem Connection Incoming Error Count
TC-BIP-2: Tandem Connection Bit Interleaved Parity-2
TC-REI : Tandem Connection Remote Error Indication
TC-OEI : Tandem Connection Outgoing Error Indication
Pointer Information
AU-Positive: Administrative Unit Positive stuffing
AU-Negative: Administrative Unit Negative stuffing
TU-Positive: Tributary Unit Positive stuffing
109
TU-Negative: Tributary Unit Negative stuffing
5.1.3.4 OH capture
Touching the OH capture button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
launches the screen shown below.
This screen shows SDH capture status information for one frame at a time. The
frame number captured in one time is 64. Touch the frame selection buttons to
select which frame to display.
The position of A1, A2 bytes in SOH for STM-4/16/64, refer to description in

SOH Editor.
Refreshing
Refresh once
information
When touch the Pause button, the Update button is showed at left side of the
Pause one and information is not updated. Touching the Update button will
refresh the dialog information once.
Refresh continuously
When the dialog is open and touch the Pause button at refresh once mode,
information is updated continuously.
Displaying detailed Detailed overhead byte information can be accessed by touching a specific
information
byte. This will launch a separate dialog containing a description of and details
about the selected byte.
110
5.1.3.5 Tributary scan
Touching the Tributary scan button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
displays the status shown below.
This screen allows to measure the alarms and errors of all VC-containers in the
High order or the Low order at the same time. Note that the Low order scan is
performed against the High order channel which you have selected.
Scanning This button appears when the Low order channel exists. In Scan Mode, touch
the Scan Start button to start the scanning. To stop the scanning touch the Scan
Stop button (same button, which toggles between the two functions).
Details To view detailed information for a specific channel, touch the Detail Mode
button and then touch the channel number.
111
5.1.3.6 Transceiver
Touching the Transceiver button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
launches the dialog shown below.
This dialog box presents status information about the optical transceiver.
Module Present Green indicates that an optical transceiver is currently mounted.
Transceiver Select the information from pull down menu.

Information
Wavelength and bit rate shows the nominal wavelength and bit rate.
Compliance shows the available standards.
Vendor information shows the data stored in the optical transceiver.
Tune wavelength
Appears when the optical transceiver is a tunable SFP. Clicking the button
opens the dialog box to set the wavelength.
Power monitor The optical power read out from the transceiver is displayed.
112
The transmitting optical power is displayed in left column. The received optical
power is displayed in right column.
113
5.1.4 Errors/Alarms Insertion
This section describes the errors or alarms insertion for the SDH layer on the
Application toolbar.
Alarms/Errors/ Select the port to insert errors, and the stimuli type. The settings items vary
Others
depending on the selected stimulus type.
SDH Alarm/Errors: Inserts errors or alarms related the SDH overhead or the
pattern error.
SDH frequency: Adds the frequency offset to the SDH bit rate.
SDH pointer: Inserts specified pointer continuously.
5.1.4.1 SDH Alarms/Errors
1. Select Alarms or Errors using the radio button.

2. Select the Destination .
3. Select the Insertion .
Off: Turns off inserting Alarms or Errors.
Manual : Inserts errors or alarms in the specified counts if you touch the
Error Insert icon.
Permanent: Inserts errors or alarms in all SDH frame. The Error Insert
icon shows only status.
Alternate: Repeats error/alarm insertion per specified number of
frames. The Error Insert icon shows only status.
1E-03 to 1E-10: Inserts errors in the specified rate continuously.
For example, 1E-03 means 10-3. In this case, the error will be inserted
in one frame per one thousand frames. The Error Insert icon shows
only status.
114
5.1.4.2 SDH frequency
Touch the field to set Frequency Offset. If setting a positive value, the frequency
will shift higher side.
Example:
If setting -50 ppm to the frequency offset for STM-16 output signal, the bit rate
of output signal will be
2 488 320 * (1-50*10-6) = 2 488 195.584 (kbit/s).
5.1.4.3 SDH pointer
1. Select AU* or TU* to insert the pointer.

2. Select the pointer type.
No test sequence: Does not insert pointers
Single alternating: Positive justification and negative justification
Regular + Double: Double positive justification
Regular + Missing: Negative justification
Double alternating: Double positive justification and double negative
justification
3. Select the Movement or Jump.
Movement shifts the pointer value by specified value. Jump sets the specified
value to the pointer.
4. Touch the field to set the pointer value. Then select one of followings.
Positive: Increases the pointer value.
Negative: Decreases the pointer value.
Incl. NDF: Sets NDF (New Data Flag) to enable ("1001").
Excl. NDF: Sets NDF to disable ("0110").
5. Touch the Apply Movement button or the Apply Jump button.
115
5.2 SONET Setup and Status

An OC-xx/STS-xx button in the navigation area of the Ports Setup screen gives
you access to the SONET setup for the transmitter and/or receiver of the
currently selected port.
Refer to SDH/SONET switching for switching to SONET.
Synchronous Optical Networking (SONET) refers to a standardized protocol that

transfers digital signals over optical fiber using lasers. At low transmission rates
data can also be transferred via an electrical interface.
The SONET interface uses the electrical BNC connectors and the optical ports.
When the transmitter is set up with a SONET interface, selecting the Tx button
in the navigation area will launch the following screen. (Note that the SONET
Tx check box above the connector panel illustration is selected.)
This screen allows you to enable the optical or electrical interface of the
SONET transmitter. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the
selected port.
Transmitter
116
Use the Transmitter drop-down menus to select to the transmitter.
Mode
Use the Mode drop-down menus to select to the behavior of the transmitter.
OH overwrite position
Only enabled when the OH overwrite has been selected to the behavior of the
transmitter. Use the drop-down menu to select the relevant overwrite position.
The available values are:
TOH
A1/A2 byte
K1/K2 byte
S1 byte
DCC1-3 byte
DCC4-12 byte
J0 byte
1 byte of TOH
When '1 byte of TOH' is selected, touch the Byte Pos button to launch the 1
Byte of TOH dialog box. Select the relevant byte in the dialog.
when the Port Mode is set to Through or OH overwrite.
Timing Source
is detected or not.
Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information when the option except "Electrical" is
selected to the transmitter.
5.2.1.2 SONET Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's SONET
117
The general principle in setting up the SONET frame is to select the relevant
values for the various containers in the multiplexing structure. This is done
either via a drop-down menu or via a launched dialog box, by touching a drop-
down menu or a button in the frame structure diagram.
Note that the currently 'active path' in the structure is highlighted. Note also
that the changes you make will be reflected in the text displayed in the SONET
button in the navigation area, if relevant.

Off
Z5 (STS-3c)
Z5 (STS-1)
Z6 (VT-2/1.5)

switching
TOH Editor You can configure transport overhead (TOH) in a special dialog box (TOH
Editor), which is launched when you touch the TOH button.
118
The setup principle is the same in this editor dialog box as in the SONET
structure. Touching a button or opening a drop-down menu will open for new
editor dialog boxes, new value selections etc.
S1: Synchronization status
J0: Regenerator section trace
A1, A2: Framing
Defined A1 as F6h (1111011b), A2 as 28h (00101000b).
B1: BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) This byte cannot be set.
E1, E2: Orderwire
E1 is part of the Section Overhead, E2 is part of the Line Overhead.
F1: User channel
D1-D3: Section data communication channel (DCCR)
D4-D12: Line data communication channel (DCCM )
B2: BIP-N×24 These bytes cannot be set.
K1, K2(bit 1 to bit 5): Automatic protection switching (APS) channel
K2(bit 6 to bit 8): RDI-L (Line Remote Defect Indication)
M0, M1: REI-L (Line Remote Error Indication)
Z2: Spare byte
H1, H2, H3:STS pointer These bytes cannot be set.
This editor format is the same as TOH of OC-3/STS-3. For OC-12/48/192, TOH
bytes in other column are filled with value set by the editor. In case of OC-12
TOH in following figure, you can edit A1A2 bytes in thicker lines cell. The bytes
in gray cell are filled with the value in left side cell in thicker lines.
POH Editor Touching a POH button launches the STS-x POH Editor or VT-2/VT1.5 POH
Editor dialog box. The contents of the dialog depends on which path overhead
you are configuring.
119
J1: Path Trace

B3: Path BIP-8 This byte cannot be set.
C2: Signal label
G1: (bit 1 to 4) REI (bit 5) RDI (bit 6 and 7) Reserved (bit 8) Spare
F2,Z3: Path user channels
H4: Multiframe indicator
Z4: (bit 1 to 4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channels (bit 5 and 6)
Spare (bit 7 and 8) Data link
Z5: Network operator byte
J2: Path Trace

V5: (bit 1 and 2) BIP-2 (bit 3) REI (bit 4) RFI (bit 5 to 7) Signal label (bit 8) RDI
Z6: Network operator byte
Z7: (bit 1) Extended signal label (bit 2) Low order virtual concatenation (bit 3
and 4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channels (bit 5 to 7) Reserved (bit
8) Data link
Bulk Pattern To set up the bulk pattern, touch the Configure xxxxx button to launch the Bulk
Pattern dialog box.
Pattern type
120
length of sequence.
Pattern logic is enabled.
Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7: Bit pattern such as
"010101...", "100010001000...", "1000000010000000...".
2 in 8: Bit pattern such as "010000100100001001000010...".
ANSI Standard
Touching the 'ANSI standard' button will apply standard recommended Pattern
type for currently selected SONET frame.
C-3 (STS-3c SPE): PRBS 23 Inverse
C-3 (STS-1 SPE): PRBS 15 Inverse
When the receiver is set up with a SONET interface, touching the Rx button in
the navigation area will launch the following screen. (Note that the SONET Rx
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the receiver in SONET
mode. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port.
Receiver Touch the button corresponding to the relevant interface type.
Off: No interface
121
SFP/SFP+: Optical interface

Electrical : Electrical interface (BNC connector)
Receiver gain Only relevant for electrical receivers. Select the attenuation and impedance
mode from the drop-down menu.
Terminate: Up to 12.7 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
Monitor: 20 dB linear attenuation and up to 12 dB cable attenuation, nominal
impedance.
Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information when Optical transmitter is selected.
5.2.2.2 SONET Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's SONET
The manner of setting up the SONET interface of receiver is the same as that of
transmitter. Refer to SONET Frame Setup.
default setting is None. Note that the Port 1 receiver cannot follow the Port 2
receiver.

Off
Z5 (STS-3c)
Z5 (STS-1)
Z6 (VT-2/1.5)

switching
122
This section describes the status information available for the SONET layer in
the status area of the Ports Setup screen.
The status summary displayed for the SONET layer consists of the following
information:
information.

all alarms/errors.
Status
OH capture
Tributary scan
Transceiver
Refer to Physical Details in "SDH Setup and Status".
allows you to launch the dialog box shown below.
123
This dialog box contains detailed alarm and error information related to the
SONET interface. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal
LOF : Loss of Frame
OOF : Out of Frame
AIS-L: Line Alarm Indication Signal
RDI-L: Line Remote Defect Indication
AIS-P: Path Alarm Indication Signal
LOP-P: Path Loss of pointer
TIM-P: Path Trace Identifier Mismatch
PLM-P: Path Payload Mismatch
UNIQ-P: Path UNEQuipped
RDI-P: Path Remote Defect Indication
AIS-V : VT-Path Alarm Indication Signal
LOP-V : VT-Path Loss of pointer
LOM-V : VT-Path Loss of Multiframe
TIM-V : VT-Path Trace Identifier Mismatch
UNIQ-V : VT-Path UNEQuipped
RDI-V : VT-Path Remote Defect Indication
PLM-V : VT-Path Payload Mismatch
LSS: Loss of Sequence Synchronization
TC-UNEQ : Tandem Connection UNEQuipped
TC-LTC: Tandem Connection Loss of Tandem Connection
TC-TIM: Tandem Connection Trace Identifier Mismatch
TC-AIS: Tandem Connection Alarm Indication Signal
TC-RDI : Tandem Connection Remote Defect Indication
TC-ODI : Tandem Connection Outgoing Defect Indication
Errors
A1A2: Bytes used for the frame synchronization
B1: The byte of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8)
B2: The bytes of 24 parity bits
REI-L: Line Remote Error Indication
B3: The byte of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8)
124
REI-P : Path Remote Error Indication

V5/B3: BIP-2 of VT-2/VT-1.5 or BIP-8 of Low order VC-3
REI-V : VT-Path Remote Error Indication
Pattern errors: Bit error detected in the payload
STS-NDF : Path New Data Flag
VT-NDF : VT-Path New Data Flag
Switch : APS switching occurred
TC-IEC: Tandem Connection Incoming Error Count
TC-BIP-2: Tandem Connection Bit Interleaved Parity-2
TC-REI : Tandem Connection Remote Error Indication
TC-OEI :Tandem Connection Outgoing Error Indication
Pointer information
STS-Positive: Synchronous Transport Signal Positive stuffing
STS-Negative: Synchronous Transport Signal Negative stuffing
VT-Positive: Virtual Tributary Positive stuffing
VT-Negative: Virtual Tributary Negative stuffing
5.2.3.4 OH Capture
Refer to OH Capture in "SDH Setup and Status".
5.2.3.5 Tributary Scan
Refer to Tributary Scan in "SDH Setup and Status".
5.2.3.6 Transceiver
Refer to Transceiver in "SDH Setup and Status".
Refer to Errors/Alarms Insertion in SDH Setup and Status sub section.
125
5.3 E1 Setup and Status

E1 represents the 2.048 Mbit/s PDH layer. The Ports Setup screen gives you
access to the PDH layer setup for the transmitter and/or receiver of the
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) refers to the technology originally used in

telecommunications networks to transport data over digital transport equipment
such as fiber optic systems.
E1 allows transmission of data streams that are nominally running at the same rate,
however allowing for some variation in the speed around a nominal rate (+/-125 ppm
variation around 2 Mbit/s).
The E1 frame has 32 time slots during 125μs, and one time slot contains eight bits.
The time slot 0 is used for multi frame.
E1 Frame structure
The E1 interface uses the electrical BNC connectors (unbalanced) or the electrical
RJ48 connectors (balanced).
When the transmitter is set up with only an E1 interface, touching the Tx button
in the navigation area will launch the following screen.
126
E1 Setup and Status
Switching between PDH Tx and DSn Tx is done in the SDH/SONET transmitter

setup screen.
1. Select SDH Tx or SONET Tx check box.
2. Touch STM-xx, STS-xx, or OC-xx button in the navigation area.
3. Use drop down menu at right bottom to switch SDH or SONET. Selecting the
SDH displays PDH Tx on Tx screen. Selecting the SONET displays DSn Tx on
Tx screen.
4. Touch Tx button in the navigation area.
5. Select PDH Tx or DSn Tx check box.
6. Clear SDH Tx or SONET Tx check box.
7. Touch E1 radio button. Touching Off radio button disables the transmitter.
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH transmitter in E1
Connector Select the type of the input/output connectors of the instrument. Choose
Unbalanced to link to the corresponding unbalanced connector, or choose
Balanced to link to the corresponding balanced connector. A balanced output
goes to the RJ48 connector.
Pin assignment of E1 Balanced Connectors
RJ-48 Pin Signal
1 RX, Ring
2 RX, Tip
3 Ground
4 TX, Ring
5 TX, Tip
6 Ground
7 No connect
8 No connect
Be sure to confirm the cable type. For E1 cable, there are the straight cable and
the cross cable.
127
Drop and insert Select the source for the transmitter.

On: transmits the received data which the data generated in the Network Master
has added.
Off: transmits the data generated in the Network Master.
Timing Source Select the clock source.

External : The clock provided from the Ext Clock connector
is detected or not.
5.3.1.2 E1 Signal Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's E1 layer
will display the screen.
settings) when using Port 1 and Port 2, touch the drop-down menu in the
navigation area and select the Tx1. The Port 2 settings continue to follow the
Port 1 transmitter change. The default setting is None. Note that the Port 1
transmitter cannot follow the Port 2 transmitter.
Frame tab page
The Frame tab page contains the following parameters:
Line code
Use the Line code radio buttons to select transmission line code.
HDB3: High-Density Bipolar Order 3

AMI : Alternate Mark Inversion
PCM frame
Use the PCM frame radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) insertion of
PCM frame in the transmitted signal.
128
E1 Setup and Status
PCM frame is formed by 16 E1 frames. Frame structure is shown below.
Frame Bits 1 to 8 of the frame (Timeslot 0)

number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 C1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 A Sa Sa Sa Sa Sa
2 C2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
4 C3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
6 C4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
8 C1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
10 C2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
12 C3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
13 E 1 A Sa Sa Sa Sa Sa
14 C4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
15 E 1 A Sa Sa Sa Sa Sa
Sub multiframe (SMF) I: Frame number 0 to 7, II: Frame number 8 to 15
E: CRC4 error indication bits (FEBE)
Sa: Spare bits
C1 to C4: Cyclic Redundancy Check-4 (CRC4) bits
A: Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)
When PCM frame is set to Off, many of the following transmitter parameters are
insignificant.
CRC4
Use the CRC4 radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) CRC4 in the
transmitted signal contained in the PCM Frame.
If you are uncertain whether the CRC4 should be selected or not, it is recommended to
enable the CRC4.
If Drop and Insert of the total contents of a receiver is selected and the signal contains
CRC4, it is possible to either Bypass or Insert Sa-Bits.
Sa-Bits
Use the drop-down menu above the setup field to select whether or not to
Insert Sa-Bits or Bypass Sa-Bits (this is only relevant when Drop and insert is
set to On).
You can set the Sa-Bits value of the non-FAS words in the transmitted signal
when containing PCM Frame/CRC4. Touch the Sa-Bits setup field to open the
setup dialog box.
129
In the Sa-Bits dialog box, change the individual Sa-bits by touching on the
relevant bit keys - this will toggle the bit key's binary value from logic 1 to 0 or
vice versa. Touch Ok to accept the changes and close the dialog.
Content tab page
The Content tab page contains the following parameters:
Pattern type
Select the pattern to be inserted in the transmitted signal.
Off: Does not insert the pattern.
PRBS 11 to PRBS 23: Pseudo-random bit sequence. The number indicates the
bit length of sequence.
For example, bit length of PRBS 9 is 29-1=511.
Pattern Logic is enabled.
QRSS 11, QRSS 20: Quasi-random signal source.
The bit length of QRSS 11 is 2047, the length of QRSS 20 is 1 048 575.
Fox Pattern 'THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG
1234567890' in ASCII code
Fox (CMA3000) The 'fox pattern' using for the combined test with CMA3000
(the previous model of Network Master)
Alternating 1:1: Bit pattern such as "010101..."
Alternating 3:24: A repeating 24-bit sequence that contains three ones, fifteen
consecutive zeros and 12.5% average ones density.
130
E1 Setup and Status
You can select 'Normal' or 'Inverse' pattern type.
Touching the 'ITU standard' button will apply ITU-T O.150 recommended
Pattern type for N x 64 kbps data rates (PRBS 11).
User pattern
User pattern field is enabled if Pattern type is set to User [32] bit or User [2084]
bit. Touch the User pattern field and use the launched Pattern Editor dialog box
to define the user pattern. Depending on the selected pattern type, different
user pattern setup options will be available.
The length can be any length from 1 bit to 32 bits or from 1 bit to 2048 bits.
Unused time slots

Touch the Unused time slots field and use the launched dialog box to define
the unused time slots.
In the Unused time slots dialog box, change the individual bits by touching on
the relevant bit keys - this will toggle the bit key's binary value from logic 1 to 0
or vice versa. Touch Ok to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
Pattern time slots

Touch the Pattern time slot graphics and use the dialog box to select the
timeslots in which the Pattern will be inserted. Set and clear timeslots as
relevant.
Channel contents
Use the Channel contents drop-down menu to select the signal transmitting
into the timeslot:
Off: No channel content is selected.
Tone: Tone with specified frequency and level.
Transparent: Received content in the same channel time slot is used.
Speech: Pre-programmed speech sequence. 'Drop and insert' on Tx screen will
be switched to On.
Channel Time Slot

Touch the Channel Time Slot graphics and use the dialog box to select the
channel timeslot. If Speech or Tone is selected audio is inserted in selected
timeslot. If Transparent is selected, the destination for transparent errors is
selected.
131
Tone
Touch the Tone Frequency button and use the launched dialog box to key in
the frequency, using the numeric soft keys.
Touch the Level button and use the launched dialog box to key in the level.
CAS tab page
The CAS tab page contains the following parameters:
CAS
Use the CAS radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the insertion of a
CAS (Channel Associated Signaling) signaling multiframe into time slot 30 of
the transmitted signal.
Touch the Channel, Bits and Other bits fields to define the contents of a
selectable CAS channel as well as the remaining channels.
When the receiver is set up with only an E1 interface, selecting the Rx button in
the navigation area will launch the following screen.
132
E1 Setup and Status
Switching between PDH Rx and DSn Rx is done in the SDH/SONET receiver

setup screen.
1. Select SDH Rx or SONET Rx check box.

2. Touch STM-xx, STS-xx, or OC-xx button in the navigation area.
3. Use drop down menu at right bottom to switch SDH or SONET. Selecting the
SDH displays PDH Rx on Rx screen. Selecting the SONET displays DSn Rx on
Rx screen.
4. Touch Rx button in the navigation area.
5. Select PDH Rx or DSn Rx check box.
6. Clear SDH Rx or SONET Rx check box.
7. Touch E1 radio button. Touching Off radio button disables the receiver.
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH receiver in E1
Connector Select the physical type of the relevant output connectors located on the back
panel of the instrument. Choose Unbalanced to link to the corresponding
unbalanced connector, or choose Balanced to link to the corresponding
balanced connector. A balanced input is taken from RJ48 connector.
Pin assignment of E1 Balanced Connectors
RJ-48 Pin Signal
1 RX, Ring
2 RX, Tip
3 Ground
4 TX, Ring
5 TX, Tip
6 Ground
7 No connect
8 No connect
Be sure to confirm the cable type. For E1 cable, there are the straight cable and
the cross cable.
Input mode Select the mode of input.
133
Terminate
Used when the instrument is used as a tester and the receiver is the only
device connected to the line. The input impedance is nominal.
Bridged
Used when the receiver is connected directly in parallel to a line carrying live
traffic. Please observe that this way of connecting may disturb the monitored
line - connection through a protected monitor point, as well as using the input
mode Monitor, is recommended instead.
Monitor
Used when connecting to protected monitoring points. The input impedance
is nominal.
Input sensitivity Set the sensitivity of the input. The available options are:
Full sensitivity
Signal levels down to the maximum sensitivity on the instrument are
accepted.
-20 dB
Input signal attenuated by -20 dB or more relative to the nominal level will be
considered Loss Of Signal.
-33 dB
Input signal attenuated by -33 dB or more relative to the nominal level will be
considered Loss Of Signal.
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's E1 layer
will display the screen.
receiver (i.e. copy its settings), touch the drop-down menu in the navigation
area and select the relevant value. The receiver settings continue to follow the
change of either the transmitter or Port 1 receiver. The default setting is None.
Note that the Port 1 receiver cannot follow the Port 2 receiver.
Frame tab page
134
E1 Setup and Status
Line code
Use the Line code radio buttons to select transmission line code HDB3 or AMI.
For normal 2 Mbps systems choose HDB3. AMI is for special applications only.
PCM frame
Use the PCM frame radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the status of
the PCM frame.
CRC4 and E-bits

Use the CRC4 and E-bits radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the
corresponding bit in the received signal. Use buttons in left frame for setting
CRC4. Use buttons in right frame for setting E-Bit.
If it is uncertain whether the CRC4 and E-bits are supported in the monitor signal, it is
recommended to select the Off mode.
Content tab page
135
Pattern type
Select the requested pattern. Refer to Pattern type in "Transmitter Setup".
For testing of data rates from 64 kbps to 2 Mbps in a 2 Mbps line, ITU-T O.150
recommends PBRS 11 to be used. For testing at the 2 Mbps rate, PRBS 15 is
recommended in ITU-T O.150.
Select 'Normal' or 'Inverse' pattern type.
User pattern
Pattern time slots

Touch the Pattern time slots graphics and use the launched dialog box to select
the timeslot which will receive the Channel Content signal. Set and clear
timeslots as relevant.
Audio
Use the Audio drop-down menu and select the features for the receiver
decoding. Select On to enable the audio decoding or Off to disable.
Audio Time Slot

Touch the Audio Time Slot graphics and use the launched dialog box to select
the timeslot.
CAS tab page
136
E1 Setup and Status
CAS
Use the CAS radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the reception of a
CAS (Channel Associated Signaling) signaling multiframe in time slot 16 of the
received signal.
This section describes the status information available for the E1 layer in the
The status summary displayed for the E1 layer consists of the following
information:
information.
information for the selected interface. The current status is indicated by the
lamp color.

all alarms/errors.
Monitor Buttons At the bottom of the status area are below buttons that give you access to
various monitor information. By touching a button, you can launch the
Alignment
CAS
Audio
Traffic
137
This screen presents detailed information about the current physical status of
the received signal at the 2 Mbps E1 layer.
The physical status information consists of the following parameters.
Signal level
The Signal Level indicators show the attenuations (in dB) of the currently
received signals compared to a nominal signal.
The nature of the levels depend on the Input Level setup for each receiver
(Terminate or Monitor):
In Terminate mode, the attenuation is assumed to be caused by a cable.
In Monitor mode, linear attenuation is assumed.
Deviation
The deviation from the nominal bit rate is shown for each receiver in both ppm
and bps. The nominal bit rate is 2 048 000 bps.
Bit rate
The actual bit rate of each receiver is shown (in bps).
Pattern Bit rate

This field shows the effective bit rate of the patterns received (that is, the
number of pattern bits received per second).
138
E1 Setup and Status
This screen contains detailed alarm and error information related to the E1
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal
No frame: No Frame
No CRC4 MF : No Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 Multi Frames
Distant: Distant
No Sync: No Synchronization
No CAS MF : No Channel-Associated Signaling Multi Frames
Distant MF : Distant Multi Frames
Errors
FAS: Frame Alignment Signal

Pattern : Pattern
CRC4: Cyclic Redundancy Check 4
CRC4 MFAS: Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 Multiplex Frame Alignment Signal
E-Bit: E-Bit Error
Code : Code
Pattern slip : Pattern slip
Frame slip : Frame slip
5.3.3.4 Alignment
Touching the Alignment button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
139
This screen provides information on the frame alignment when available. The
frame alignment information includes the 16 first FAS/NFAS words of the
CRC4 multiframe.
If multiframe is not available, the frame information will show 16 FAS/NFAS

words in sequence.
The following color indicators are used:
Green: Cyclic Redundancy Check bits

Orange: Bits used to indicate received faulty sub-multiframes
Purple: Remote alarm indication
Yellow: Spare bits reserved for national use.
5.3.3.5 CAS
Touching the CAS button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen displays
the status shown below.
This screen gives information on the CAS (Channel Associated Signaling)

signaling when available. It displays the state of the four signaling bits in both
directions for all 30 channels. Activity is indicated with bold characters.
140
E1 Setup and Status
CAS MFAS-Signal
This field shows the status of the CAS MFAS-Signal.
Port1, Port2
This field shows the MFAS bits.
CAS Bits, Port1 and Port2

This table shows the status of the CAS Bits in the two ports.
Use of colors For easy recognition of special bit combinations, coloring is available. Use the
Set red pattern and Set yellow pattern buttons to launch the respective setup
dialog boxes.
The color pattern consists of four binary digits. The minimum and the
maximum acceptable value is 0000 and 1111, respectively. Touch the digit
buttons to set the relevant value and then touch Ok.
To clear the whole word e.g. to make the line ready for new digit settings, touch
the Clear all button.
5.3.3.6 Audio
Touching the Audio button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
launches the status shown below.
This dialog box provides information about audio channels.

Audio Channel
Content
The received line content. For sub-rates this field shows the content of the
subchannel.
141
The received line content with even bits inverted. With A-law coded speech it is
possible to observe the A-law code words before the even bit inverting.
DS1/J1 inverts all the bits.
Peak (pos. and neg.)

The peak value of the signal. This only applies for A-law speech and it
represents the largest received A-law coded value.
Level
The level of the audio signal is shown here.
Tone frequency
The frequency of the audio signal is shown here.
Coder offset
The coder offset is presented if the time slot displayed is a normal 64 kbit/s
time slot.
Audio level
Two dBm meters show the volume of the currently selected audio channel
(Port1 - Port2).
5.3.3.7 Traffic
Touching the Traffic button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen displays
This screen shows the activity of the speech channels represented on the 2
Mbps line. You can switch between a traffic display and a view of the time slot
content.
142
E1 Setup and Status
The busy / idle status of channel is displayed.
The current audio time slot is marked with an green highlighting. Select the
relevant channel by touching it.
Audio Time Slots for all ports are marked, but it is only possible to change the time slots
of the current port.
Touching this button will convert the table to display time slot content.
Touching this button will convert the graphic to display traffic.
Icon PCM description
Flags detected in currently selected signaling channel
Channel activity
Touching Reset button will clear icons.
Audio level
Two dBm meters show the volume of the currently selected audio channel
(Port1 - Port2).
This section describes the errors or alarms insertion for the PDH layer on the
143
Others
PDH Alarm/Errors: Inserts errors or alarms related the PDH multi frame or
the pattern error.
PDH frequency: Adds the frequency offset to the PDH bit rate.
5.3.4.1 PDH Alarms/Errors
1. Select Error insertion or Alarm using the drop down menu.

Alarm will be inserted continuously.
No error: Turns off inserting Alarms or Errors.
Manual : Inserts errors in the specified counts if you touch the Error
Insert icon.
Burst*1E-03 to Burst*1E-07: Inserts errors of burst length in the
specified rate continuously. For example, Error burst length is set to 5
and Burst*1E-06 is selected, the errors will be inserted in five straight
frames per one million frames. The Error Insert icon shows only status.
ES: Inserts one or more errors in one second (Errored Second). Insert
SES: Inserts 30% or less errors in one second (Severely Errored
Second). The Error Insert icon shows only status.
2. Select the Error destination .
3. Touch the Error burst length field to set the errors insertion counts.
5.3.4.2 PDH frequency
PDH frequency is available when without SDH layer or SONET layer. Touch
the field to set Frequency Offset. If setting a positive value, the frequency will
shift higher side.
Example:
If setting 20 ppm to the frequency offset for E1 output signal, the bit rate of
output signal will be
2 048 * (1+20*10-6) = 2 048.041 (kbit/s).
144
5.4 DS1/J1 Setup and Status

DS1/J1 represents the 1.544 Mbit/s PDH layer. The Ports Setup screen gives
you access to the PDH layer setup for the transmitter and/or receiver of the
DS1/J1 allows transmission of data streams that are nominally running at the same
rate, however allowing for some variation in the speed around a nominal rate (+/-125
ppm variation around 1.544 Mbit/s).
The DS1/J1 frame has one frame-bit and 24 channels during 125 μs. A channel
contains eight bits, so one DS1/J1 frame has 193 bits. The bits of channel 0 is used
for multi frame.
DS1/J1 Frame structure
The DS1/J1 interface uses the electrical Bantam connectors.
When the transmitter is set up with only a DS1/J1 interface, touching the Tx
button in the navigation area will launch the following screen.
145
For the switching method between PDH Tx and DSn Tx, refer to Physical Setup
in "E1 Setup and Status". Touching Off radio button disables the transmitter.
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH transmitter in
DS1/J1 mode. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected
port.
The output signal goes to the corresponding Bantam connector.

Input sensitivity - line Select the line build-out. The available values are:
buildout
Rx short haul; Tx 1-133 ft
Rx gain mode (Monitor)
Rx long haul; Tx 0 db
Rx long haul; Tx -7.5 db
Rx long haul; Tx -15 db
Rx long haul; Tx -22.5 db
Drop and insert Select the source for the transmitter.

On: transmits the received data which the data generated in the Network Master
has added.
Off: transmits the data generated in the Network Master.
Timing source Select the clock source.

is detected or not.
5.4.1.2 DS1/J1 Signal Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's DS1/J1
layer will display the screen.
Frame tab page
146
Line code
Use the Line code radio buttons to select transmission line code.
AMI : Alternate Mark Inversion
B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
PCM frame
When PCM frame is set to Off, many of the following transmitter parameters are
insignificant.
Frame type
Use the Frame type radio buttons to select the relevant frame type: J1, ESF or
SF/D4.
Content tab page
147
Pattern type
Select the pattern to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Refer to Pattern type
in "E1 Setup and Status". Available patterns are:
Off
User [32] bit, User [2048] bit
PRBS 9 to PRBS 31
QRSS 20
Fox Pattern , Fox (CMA3000)
All 0's, All 1's
Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating 1:7, Alternating 3:24
Touch 'Normal' or 'Inverse' pattern type.
User pattern
Unused time slots

Touch the Unused time slots button and use the dialog box to define the
unused time slots.
In the Unused Time Slots dialog box, change the individual bits by touching on
the relevant bit keys - this will toggle the bit key's binary value from logic 1 to 0
or vice versa. Touch Ok to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
Pattern time slots

Touch the Pattern time slots graphics and use the dialog box to select the
timeslots in which the pattern will be inserted. Set and clear timeslots as
relevant.
Channel contents
Use the top Channel contents drop-down menu to select where to transmit the
previously defined signal in the timeslot. The signal can either be a speech
sequence or a tone, as defined in the tone fields:
148
Off: No channel content is selected.

Tone: Tone with specified frequency and level.
Transparent: Received content in the same channel time slot is used.
Speech: Pre-programmed speech sequence. 'Drop and insert' on Tx screen will
be switched to On.
Channel Time Slot

Touch the Channel Time Slot graphics and use the launched dialog box to
select the timeslot to insert the Audio signal.
Tone
Touch the Frequency field and use the launched dialog box to key in the
frequency, using the numeric soft keys.
Touch the Level field and use the launched dialog box to key in the level.
CAS tab page
CAS
Use the CAS radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the insertion of a
CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).
Touch the Channel, Bits and Other bits fields to define the contents of a
selectable CAS channel as well as the remaining channels.
149
When the receiver is set up with only a DS1/J1 interface, touching the Rx
button in the navigation area will launch the following screen.
For the switching method between PDH Rx and DSn Rx, refer to Physical Setup
in "E1 Setup and Status". Touch DS1/J1 radio button. Touching Off radio
button disables the receiver.
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH receiver in
DS1/J1 mode. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected
port.
The input signal is taken form the corresponding Bantam connector.

Terminate
Bridged
Used when the receiver is connected directly in parallel to a line carrying live
traffic. Please observe that this way of connecting may disturb the monitored
line - connection through a protected monitor point, as well as using the input
mode Monitor, is recommended instead.
Monitor
is nominal.
5.4.2.2 DS1/J1 Signal Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's DS1/J1
layer will display the screen.
150
Frame tab page
Line code
Use the Line code radio buttons to select transmission line code AMI or B8ZS.
For normal 1.544 Mbps systems choose B8ZS. AMI is for special applications only.
PCM frame
the PCM frame.
Frame type
Select the relevant frame type: J1, ESF or SF/D4.
Content tab page
151
Pattern type
Select the requested pattern. Available patterns are the same as the transmitter
setup. Refer to Pattern type in "E1 Setup and Status".
User pattern
Pattern time slots

Touch the Pattern time slots graphics and use the launched dialog box to select
the timeslot which will receive the Channel Content signal. Set and clear
timeslots as relevant.
Audio
Use the Audio drop-down menu and select the features for the receiver
decoding. Select On to enable the audio decoding or Off to disable.
Audio Time Slot

Touch the Audio Time Slot button and use the launched dialog box to select
the monitored audio timeslot.
CAS tab page
152
CAS
Use the CAS radio buttons to enable (On) or disable (Off) the reception of a
CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).
This section describes the status information available for the DS1/J1 layer in
the status area of the Ports Setup screen.
The status summary displayed for the DS1/J1 layer consists of the following
information:
information.
lamp color.

all alarms/errors.
Monitor Buttons At the bottom of the status area are below buttons that give you access to
various monitor information. By touching a button, you can launch the
Alignment
CAS
Audio
Traffic
153
Refer to Physical Details in "E1 Setup and Status". The nominal bit rate of
DS1/J1 is 1 544 000 bps.
This screen contains detailed alarm and error information related to the
DS1/J1 interface. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal

OOF : Out of Frame
RAI : Remote Alarm Indication
LSS: Link Status Signal
Errors
F-Bit: F-Bit Error
Pattern : Pattern
CRC-6: Cyclic Redundancy Check 6
S-Bit: S-Bit Error
BPV : Bipolar Violation
Pattern Slip: Pattern slips
EXZ : Excessive zeros
5.4.3.4 Alignment
154
This screen provides information on the frame alignment when available.
F-Bit and M-bit are displayed when the frame type is J1 or ESF.
F-Bit and S-bit are displayed when the frame type is SF/D4.
In-band FDL
Displays the In-band FDL (Facility Data Link) data.
Trigger
Set On to hold displaying FDL if In-band FDL matches. If set Off, the latest In-
band FDL is displayed.
User Defined
Select the check box to edit the user defined inband code. Touching the field
launches the pattern editor.
You can set the user defined inband code for the transmitter by the stimuli setup in
Application Toolbar.
5.4.3.5 CAS
Touching the CAS button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen launches
155
This screen gives information on the CAS (Channel Associated Signaling)

signaling when available. It displays the state of the two signaling bits in both
directions for all 24 channels. Activity is indicated with bold characters.
Use of colors For easy recognition of special bit combinations, coloring is available. Use the
Set red pattern and Set yellow pattern buttons to launch the respective setup
dialog boxes.
The color pattern consists of four binary digits for ESF/J1 frame. For SF/D4
frame, it consists of two binary digits. The minimum acceptable value is 00 or
0000, and the maximum acceptable value is 11 or 1111. Touch the digit
buttons to set the relevant value and then touch Ok.
To clear the whole word e.g. to make the line ready for new digit settings, touch
the Clear all button.
5.4.3.6 Audio
Refer to Audio in "E1 Setup and Status".
5.4.3.7 Traffic
Refer to Traffic in "E1 Setup and Status". In DS1/J1 Traffic status screen, the 24
traffics are displayed.
Refer to Errors/Alarms Insertion in E1 Setup and Status section.
156
E3 Setup and Status

variation around 34.368 Mbit/s).
E3 frame defined by ITU-T G.751 has 1536 bits during the period of 22.375 kHz. 12
bits are assigned to the overhead, and 4 bits parity are available as an option.
E3 Frame Structure
The E3 interface uses the electrical BNC connectors.
When the transmitter is set up with only an E3 interface, selecting the Tx button
157
in "E1 Setup and Status". Touch E3 radio button. Touching Off radio button
disables the transmitter.

is detected or not.
will display the screen shown below.
PCM frame
Pattern type
Select the pattern to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Available patterns are
the same as the transmitter setup. Refer to Pattern type in "E1 Setup and
Status". Available patterns are:
158
E3 Setup and Status
Off
PRBS 9 to PRBS 31
All 0's, All 1's
Pattern type for 34 Mbit data rates (PRBS 23 Inverse).
User pattern
disables the receiver.
159
Terminate
Monitor
is nominal.
PCM frame
the PCM frame.
Pattern type
User pattern
160
E3 Setup and Status
information:
information.
lamp color.

all alarms/errors.
Refer to Physical Details in "E1 Setup and Status". The nominal bit rate of E3 is
34 368 000 bps.
161
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal
No frame: No frame
Distant: Distant
No sync: No synchronization
Errors
FAS words: Received FAS pattern does not match to "1111010000".

Pattern error: Received pattern does not match to specified pattern type.
Code : Code
Pattern slips : Pattern slips are occurring.
162
5.6 DS3 Setup and Status

DS3 represents the 44.736 Mbit/s PDH layer. The Ports Setup screen gives you
DS3 allows transmission of data streams that are nominally running at the same
rate, however allowing for some variation in the speed around a nominal rate (+/-125
ppm variation around 44.736 Mbit/s).
The DS3 frame has 56 bits of Overhead and 4704 bits of Payload, during the period of
9398.3 Hz. According to the overhead assignment, there are M13 frame and C-bit
frame.
DS3 Frame structure
The DS3 interface uses the electrical BNC connectors.
When the transmitter is set up with only a DS3 interface, selecting the Tx button
163
in "E1 Setup and Status". Touch DS3 radio button. Touching Off radio button
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH transmitter in
DS3 mode. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port.
Line buildout Select the line build-out. The available values are:
High-0 ft
DSX-450 ft
To set transmission based on ITU-T G.703, select DSX - 450 ft.

is detected or not.
5.6.1.2 DS3 Signal Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's DS3
layer will display the screen shown below.
164
PCM frame
Frame type
Use the Frame type radio buttons to specify either an M13 frame or a C-Bit
frame.
M13 Frame Overhead
X F1 C11 F0 C12 F0 C13 F1
X F1 C21 F0 C22 F0 C23 F1
P F1 C31 F0 C32 F0 C33 F1
P F1 C41 F0 C42 F0 C43 F1
M0 F1 C51 F0 C52 F0 C53 F1
M1 F1 C61 F0 C62 F0 C63 F1
M0 F1 C71 F0 C72 F0 C73 F1
X: Far-End Receive Failure
P: Even-Parity
M0: Multi-Framing Alignment 0
M1: Multi-Framing Alignment 1
F0,F1: Frame Alignment
Cxx: Bit stuffing indication
165
C-bit Frame Overhead

X F1 AIC F0 NA F0 FEAC F1
X F1 UDL F0 UDL F0 UDL F1
P F1 CP F0 CP F0 CP F1
P F1 FEBE F0 FEBE F0 FEBE F1
M0 F1 DL F0 DL F0 DL F1
M1 F1 UDL F0 UDL F0 UDL F1
M0 F1 UDL F0 UDL F0 UDL F1
AIC: Application Identification
NA: Network Application
FEAC: Far-End Alarm and Control
UDL: User Data Link
CP: C-bit Parity
FEBE: Far-End Block Error
DL: Data Link
Pattern type
Off
PRBS 9 to PRBS 31
QRSS 20
All 0's, All 1's
Touching the 'ANSI standard' button will apply ANSI/IEEE 1007

recommended Pattern type for 45 Mbit data rates (PRBS 23 Inverse).
User pattern
FEAC Code
When 'Frame type' is set to C-Bit, allows you to specify the six bits of FEAC
(Far-End Alarm and Control) channel code.
166
Option Meaning Cord Word

FEAC Off -
DS3 EF DS3 Equipment Failure Service Affecting 011001

DS3 LOF DS3 Loss of Signal 001110
DS3 OOF DS3 Out of Frame 000000
DS3 AIS DS3 AIS Received 010110
DS3 Idle DS3 Idle Signal Received 011010
DS3 EF NSA DS3 Equipment Failure (Non-Service Affecting) 001111

DS3 CEF NSA DS3 Common Equipment Failure (Non-Service Affecting) 011101
DS1 MLOS Multiple DS1 LOS 010101
DS1 EF DS1 Equipment Failure (Service Affecting) 000101
DS1 LOS Single DS1 LOS 011110
DS1 EF NSA DS1 Equipment Failure (Non Service Affecting) 000101

LL Active Line Loopback Activate 000111
LL Deactive Line Loopback De-activate 011100
User User defined -
USR FEAC code

When 'FEAC Code' is set to User, touch the USR FEAC code button and use the
launched dialog box to define the FEAC code.
When the receiver is set up with only a DS3 interface, selecting the Rx button in
in "E1 Setup and Status". Touch DS3 radio button. Touching Off radio button
167
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the PDH receiver in DS3
Terminate
Monitor
is nominal.
5.6.2.2 DS3 Signal Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's DS3 layer
PCM frame
the PCM frame.
Frame type
Use the Frame type radio buttons to specify either an M13 frame or a C-Bit
frame.
Pattern type
168
Touching the 'ANSI standard' button will apply ANSI/IEEE 1007

recommended Pattern type for 45 Mbit data rates (PRBS 23 Inverse).
User pattern
This section describes the status information available for the DS3 layer in the
The status summary displayed for the DS3 layer consists of the following
information:
information.
lamp color.

all alarms/errors.
Monitor Button At the bottom of the status area are a number of buttons that give you access to
corresponding information dialog.
Alignment
Refer to Physical Details in "E1 Setup and Status". The nominal bit rate of DS3
is 44 736 000 bps.
allows you to launch the screen shown below.
169
This dialog box contains detailed alarm and error information related to the
DS3 interface. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal
LOF : Loss of Frame
IDLE: Idle Signal
Errors
BPV Error: Bipolar Violation error

Pattern error: Pattern error
Pattern slips: Pattern slips
Parity error: Parity error
F-bit error: F-bit error
C-bit error: C-bit error
FEBE: Far End Block Error
5.6.3.4 Alignment
170
Alignment status when the frame type is M13
Alignment status when the frame type is C-bit
This screen provides information on the frame alignment when available. The
frame alignment information includes the below bits contained in seven
subframes.
F-Bits: Framing bits
Stuffing Bits: Bit stuffing control bits
X-Bits: Message bits
P-Bits: Parity bits
M-Bits: Multiframing bits
AIC: Application Identification Channel
Na: Reserved Network Application bit
CP: C-bit Parity
FEBE: Far-End Block Error
Data Link: Data links for application
FEAC: Far-End Alarm and Control Channel
The x of "0xxxxxx011111111" indicates Code Word.
Refer to M13 Frame Overhead and C-bit Frame Overhead.
171
172
E4 Setup and Status

variation around 139.264 Mbit/s).
E4 frame has 2988 bits consisted 6 sets of 488 bits. FAS (Frame Alignment Signal)
bits are located at top of E4 frame.
E4 Frame Structure
The E4 interface uses the electrical BNC connectors.
When the transmitter is set up with only an E4 interface, selecting the Tx button
173

is detected or not.
will display the same screen as E3 Signal Setup.
PCM frame
Pattern type
Off
PRBS 9 to PRBS 31
QRSS 20
All 0's, All 1's
User pattern
174
E4 Setup and Status
Terminate
Monitor
is nominal.
will display the same screen as E3 Signal Setup.
Follows
175
To make the currently selected receiver follow either the transmitter or Port 1
PCM frame
the PCM frame.
Pattern type
Select the pattern to be inserted in the transmitted signal. Available patterns are
the same as the transmitter setup. Refer to Pattern type in "E1 Setup and
Status".
User pattern
information:
information.
lamp color.

all alarms/errors.
176
E4 Setup and Status
Refer to Physical Details in "E1 Setup and Status". The nominal bit rate of E4 is
139 264 000 bps.
Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal

No frame: No frame
Distant: Distant
No Sync: No synchronization
Errors
FAS words: Frame Alignment Signal words

Pattern error: Pattern error
Pattern slips: Pattern slips
177
5.8 APS
The Automatic Protection Switching (APS) test described in this section is applicable
for SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn interfaces.
For APS test of OTN interface, refer to APS in "OTN Application".
On SDH/SONET
K1,K2 protocol decoding is performed, as well as measurement of average
and maximum duration of a specified reference event (alarm/error).
On PDH/DSn
The average and maximum duration of a specified reference event is
measured, as is the number of events that have occurred.
5.8.1 Ports Setup and Status
The first step in running an application is to set up the port interfaces. This is
done on the Ports Setup screen, which also provides port status information.
The setup options and status information related to each interface type are
described in separate sections:

E1 Setup and Status
E3 Setup and Status
E4 Setup and Status
OTN Setup and Status
Please refer to the sections relevant for your current port setup requirements.
5.8.2 Test Setup
5.8.2.1 Threshold
Touching the Threshold button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
178
APS
This screen contains the parameters for setting up the threshold values for
alarms/errors and Pass/Fail status.
Measurement
Condition Reference event
Use the drop-down menu(s) to select the relevant event (Any errors, LOS, LOF,
OOF etc.).
If selecting Any errors, all alarms and errors displayed on the list are treated as
the trigger.
LOS does not appear when using the electrical interface (STM-1e or STS-3).
For the PDH interfaces the lists of relevant events are different.
The errors which can be set as Reference event do not contain all items listed in Alarms
and Errors on Application Toolbar.
For example, LSS and TC-REI are not handled as a trigger even if Any errors is selected in
case of SDH.
Error free period

Appears when SDH or SONET layer is present.
If a reference event is not generated within the time of this cycle, end the
switching time measurement.
Threshold
Max reference duration
Allows you to specify the maximum duration of the selected reference event(s).
Valid values are from 0.000 ms to 10000.000 ms for SDH/SONET and 0.000
ms to 4000.000 ms for PDH.
The setup of the protection and the requests used in an 'APS' test on SDH or SONET
layer is done on the Test Results > Detailed screen.
5.8.3 Test Results
5.8.3.1 Summary
Touching the Summary button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
179
This screen presents a summary of the results of the APS test.
For each port the following information is displayed:
Reference event
Average switching time
Max. time
Max reference duration
5.8.3.2 Details for APS
Touching the Detailed button will display the screen shown below.
This screen shows the duration of all reference events, both in a list and in a
graphic representation. This screen contains the summary field displayed
below the list.
Summary field Consists of the minimum, maximum, and average automatic switching times in
milliseconds, the specified Max. reference duration value, the number of
measurements.
List-form information Presents the automatic switching times in list-form.
180
APS
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a bar diagram of the automatic switching
presentation
times. Results may be affected by unexpected alarms/errors.
Protocol interpretation Shows the screen displaying the Protocol interpretation.
Protection interpolation button appears when SDH or SONET layer is present.
5.8.3.3 Protocol interpretation
Touching the Protocol interpretation button on the Detailed screen will display
the following screen.
This screen shows a protocol interpretation for the selected port (i.e. detailed
decoding information about K1 and K2 during the test). It also contains a set of
parameters that allow you configure the requests used in the test.
Configuration Select the configuration from below.
Ring : MS shared protection ring / BLSR (Bidirectional line switched ring)

Linear: Linear VC trail protection / UPSR (Unidirectional path switched ring)
Short path, Long path: Type of substitute path for Ring protection.
1+1 architecture, 1:n architecture: Type of the architecture for Liner protection.
Request Request
Use the drop-down menu to select the relevant request type (Forced switch,
Signal fail etc.).
Destination node / Source channel (K1)

Touch the field to set the channel number of the K1 byte (bits 5-8). Possible
values are 0 to 15.
Source node / Bridged channel (K2)

Touch the field to set the channel number of the K2 byte (bits 1-4). Possible
values are 0 to 15.
Apply
181
Touch the Apply button to apply the specified APS request to the SDH/SONET
transmitter.
5.8.3.4 Event Log
Touching the Event Log button in the navigation area displays the screen
providing the event log data. Refer to Event Log of SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn
BERT application.
5.8.3.5 Statistics
Touching the Statistics button in the navigation area displays the screen
providing the statistics data. Refer to Statistics of BERT for the operation.
182
BERT
5.9 BERT
The Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) described in this section is applicable for
SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn interfaces.
For BERT of OTN interface, refer to BERT in "OTN Application".
The interface settings on the Ports Setup screen determines whether the current
application is SDH, SONET, PDH and/or DSn BERT.

E1 Setup and Status
E3 Setup and Status
E4 Setup and Status
5.9.2 Test Setup
5.9.2.1 Measurement Mode
Touching the Measurement Mode button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
This screen allows users to switch the application.
183
Measurement Mode button appears in the Navigation area only when starting the BERT
by Application selector.
Measurement Mode
Touch the field to select the application.
BERT
RTD
APS
Pointer movement
Touch the field to select the Pointer movement button display in Result screen.
Selecting On displays the Pointer movement button.
If selecting Off, Pointer movement button on Test screen is hidden. However,

Estimate of test duration varies depending on the Interval length setting.
5.9.2.2 Control
Touching the Control button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
This screen contains the parameters that are generally required in a BERT test
setup.
Interval length
Allows you to specify the length of the measurement intervals.
Start action
Allows you to specify when the measurement is started.
Immediate: Starts the measurement when you touch the Start button.
Start at: Starts the measurement at the time specified in the Start at field on
the right.
Stop function
Allows you to specify when the measurement ends. Select the relevant option
from the drop-down menu:
184
BERT
Manual stop: Stops the measurement immediately when you touch the Stop
button.
Stop at: Stops the measurement at the time specified in the Stop at field on the
right.
Duration : Performs the measurement for the duration of time specified on the
right.
Memory allocation
Allows you to specify how the measurement will be stored in the Network
Master's memory. Select the relevant option from the drop-down menu:
Use all storage: When Network Master's memory became full of measured
data, the whole measurement is stopped.
Continuous: When Network Master's memory became full of measured data,
the oldest records in that memory will be overwritten.
The Network Master's memory size (the file size of measurement results) is 64
Mbytes per one port. The result file size is less than 64 Mbytes because it is
compressed when saving to the file.
Estimate of test duration

Contains an estimation of the time (in days, hours, minutes and seconds)
before the whole memory will be filled out by the test. During an ongoing
measurement, the estimate will be recalculated periodically.
Performance The titles of ITU-T Recommendation are below.
Parameters
G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a
bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an Integrated Services
Digital Network
G.826 End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for
international, constant bit-rate digital paths and connections
G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,
constant bit-rate synchronous digital paths
G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
G.8201 Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator
international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
M.2100 Performance limits for bringing-into-service and maintenance of
international multi-operator PDH paths and connections
M.2101.1 Performance limits for bringing-into-service and maintenance of
international SDH paths and multiplex sections
M.2401 Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-service and
maintenance of multi-operator international paths and sections within an
optical transport network
M.2110 Bringing into service international multi-operator paths, sections and
transmission systems
The performance parameters vary depending on the selected standard.
185
Performance Parameters
PDH SDH, SONET OTN
Parameter G.826,
Name G.821 G.826 M.2100 G.828+G.829, G.8201,M.2401
M.2101.1
ES ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SES ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
BBE ✓ ✓ ✓
ALS ✓ ✓ ✓
UAT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓*
UNAV ✓
AVT ✓ ✓ ✓
EFS ✓ ✓ ✓
*: "UAS" is displayed.
OTN-related
These items appear if OTN Tx and OTN Rx are selected on Setup screen.
OTN
G.8201, M.2401 (M.2110)
Time period
15 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 24 hours, 7 days
Allocation
Touching the Setup button launches the dialog box. Refer to Performance
Parameters in "OTN Application" .
SDH/SONET-related
These items appear if SDH Tx and SDH Rx, or SONET Tx and SONET Rx are
selected on Setup screen.
SDH/SONET
G.826, G.828+G.829, M.2101.1(M.2100)
Time period
Allocation [%]
Set the allocation ratio of the performance objectives defined in ITU
Rrecommendation.
For G.826 and G.828+G.829, the PO limits used for Pass/Fail judgement are
calculated by multiplying the allocation by the performance objectives of ITU
Recommendation.
For M2101.1(M.2100), the PO limits are calculated by multiplying the
allocation and Time period (unit in seconds) by the performance objectives of
ITU Recommendation.
PDH/DSn-related
186
BERT
These items appear if PDH Tx and PDH Rx, or DSn Tx and DSn Rx are selected
on Setup screen.
E1
G.821, G.826, M.2100, G.821 (expired)
E3
G.826, M.2100
E4
G.826, M.2100
DS1/J1
G.821, G.826, M.2100, G.821 (expired)
DS3
G.826, M.2100
Apply G.821 to the equipment designed prior to the adoption of revised ITU-T
Recommendation G.826 on 14 December, 2002.
G.821(expired) is provided for backward compatibility to the previous model
CMA3000. This standard is not recommended for normal use.
5.9.2.3 Thresholds
Touching the Thresholds button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
This screen contains the parameters for setting up the various threshold values
(i.e. limits) for errors and Pass/Fail status that are used during the monitoring.
Pattern Errors Allows you to enable monitoring of pattern errors (i.e. bit errors) and to set up
a threshold value for the bit error ratio.
Choose whether the threshold is specified as an absolute value or a percentage,

using the Count, Ratio and Ratio [%] radio buttons, and then specify the value
in the Threshold field.
Transport Select the check box to enable the transport-related parameters.
187
Interface
Select the item to evaluate from OTN , SDH , SONET, E4, E3, E1, DS3 or
DS1/J1.
Evaluation item
Select the item to evaluate. If selecting other than Any Alarm or Error, another
menu appears.
Evaluation type
Select the relevant type.
Pass & fail threshold

Touch the left-hand number to set the lower limit for "Warning". Touch the
right-hand number to set the lower limit for "Fail". The lower limit of "Fail"
must be equal to or greater than the lower limit of "Warning" (defining a
"Within limits" range in between them).
5.9.3 Test Results
5.9.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn BERT

application, the following screen is displayed.
This screen contains a summary of OTN/SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn BERT

results.
Statistics Category The lamp icon in Status column shows the Pass or Fail results for each
category. Touching the Status column displays the statistics results.
Transport Displays the results of Transport test. This result appears if 'Transport' check
box is selected in the Test Setup screen.
Pattern Select the pattern.
Pattern Error Insertion Select the check box to enable the pattern error insertion.
188
BERT
Insertion
Select the timing of the error insertion from the drop-down menu.
Off: Stops the error insertion.
Manual
1E-04 to 1E-10
Alternate
Burst length
If 'Insertion' is set to Manual, touch the button and set the burst length to insert.
Normal length
If 'Insertion' is set to Alternate, touch the button and set the normal length.
Error length
If 'Insertion' is set to Alternate, touch the button and set the error length.
5.9.3.2 Pointer Movement
Touching the Pointer Movement button in the navigation area displays the
screen shown below.
This screen presents a detailed analysis of pointer movements in the monitored

signal. The results are displayed as a graph, showing the positions of a specific
pointer over time.
Using the graph area itself and the controls displayed below the graph, you can
specify which pointer's data is displayed as well as zoom in on specific details
of the graph.
In general, you use direct touch-manipulation of the graph area to zoom in and use the
controls to zoom out.
Pointer source
Pointer
Select the radio button corresponding to the pointer whose movements you
want to monitor.
Zoom To zoom in, select a zoom area directly in the graph area by drawing a
rectangle with a finger or the stylus (delivered with the instrument).
189
When releasing the finger or stylus, the graph area zooms in to show the
selected part of the graph.
To zoom out, use the view settings below the graph:
View mode
Used to set the x-scaling for the graph. The possible settings are:
Last 24H to Last 5m: Shows a sliding graph area with max. width of 24 hours to
5 minutes.
View all : Shows a graph area with a width as the duration of the test.
Custom: This is automatically selected when the graph area is touch-
manipulated.
Max pointer value

Used to set the y-scaling of the view. The maximum amplitude of the plot
always originates from the zero line.
190
BERT
5.9.3.3 Event Log
shown below.
Event log display The slide-out panel on the left-hand side of the screen contains the following
functions
event log functions:
Define time format.

Enabling event log filter.
Event log filter configuration.
Clear event log filter configuration.
For an event to be displayed, it must pass the Event filter, the Number range
filter and the Date/Time range filter if they are all enabled.
The Event filter has seven filter modes:
Show events from specific sources only.

Do not show events from specific sources.
Show specific events from specific sources only.
Do not show specific events from specific sources.
Show specific types only.
Do not show specific types.
Show events where the source- or the description field matches a user
specified text string only.
Choose the desired event filter mode and touch the Specify button in order to
select the specific sources and events.
191
The test start event (Started) and stop event (Stopped) are always shown in the event
log.
The View setting applies a port filter. A single port or all ports can be selected.
Events with no port association will always pass.
The CSV export button is for writing all events (un-filtered) to a file in a CSV
format (Comma Separated Values). The separator used can be configured in
the Instrument Toolbar > Configuration > General menu screen, under
Miscellaneous. It is not possible to export the file during a test.
The event log list The events are displayed in a scrollable table. The content of the seven
columns are:
No.
The index in the log.
Time
The time when the event was detected.
Port
Port number for events related to a port. Otherwise this field is blank.
Type
Event type icon.
Alarm events are indicated by a red icon.
Error events are indicated by a yellow icon.
Threshold events are indicated by either a red or yellow icon with a T in
the middle.
Src.
The source of the event. This row denotes the originating interface/technology
or application.
Description
The event description. For alarms and errors there are a one-to-one relation
to the items found in the Statistics screen.
Dur./Count
For alarms, this is the alarm duration measured in seconds. An alarm event
where the duration is not know yet, will show the text On .
For errors, this is the number of errors in the errored second.
Event log and statistics can show different alarm duration and error count
when values are summed up an compared. This is because statistics discards
the last interval if it is not complete when the test is stopped. There will be no
differences if the test duration is set to a multiple of the interval length or if
intervals are disabled.
5.9.3.4 Statistics
Touching the Statistics button in the navigation area displays the screen shown
below.
192
BERT
This screen presents a detailed analysis of the test results. You can choose to
view either the total results from measurement start or the results of a specific
interval during the test. You can also zoom in on a specific result item. The
results can be displayed either in table (list) form or as a graph.
Selecting which results to view

Selecting the interval Touch the Total button to switch the total values measured in all interval times.
time
The start time of measurement is displayed on the button.
Touching the button in left side Back field shows the measured values in the
interval time. The end time of the interval is displayed on the button.
Current button is displayed at left bottom when the measurement is running.

Touching the Current button shows the measured values in the current interval
time.
The slide-out panel on the left-hand side of the screen contains the following
functions:
Only show intervals that contains errors

Time format
If you have stopped measurement during the interval time, the measurement results of
the current interval are discarded. The log of the current interval is not displayed in Back
field.
In this case, result data are re-calculated excluding the data of the current interval
when the measurement is stopped. This causes that "Count" and "Ratio" displayed
after the measurement will be different from that of during measurement.
The sum of interval time (multiplied interval time by the number of back logs) may
not match the differential time between displayed time at left top and right top after
the measurement.
193
Selecting type of Open the middle drop-down menu in the top row of buttons to select which
results
results you want to display on the screen.
OTN SDH, SONET E1, E3, E4, DS1/J1, DS3

Alarms/Errors Alarms/Errors Alarms/Errors
Performance Quality Performance
Performance
TCM
OTN options appear if the SDH/SONET signal is carried by OTN.

Studying a specific Touch a specific cell in a result table to zoom in on the corresponding result
result
item. The Count and Ratio fields are displayed on a Zoom tab page. A Time vs.
Statistics tab page is also available. Touch the Back button to return to the
statistics screen.
Selecting how results are displayed

Selecting notation Select the required notation for the results from the notation drop-down menu.
Unformatted - e.g. 71892
SI prefix - e.g. 71.892 k (k means "kilo")
Engineering - e.g. 71.892E3
Scientific - e.g. 7.1892E4
Results
Results are displayed according to your choice. OTN appears when 'BERT on
OTN' is running.
OTN Alarms/Errors Refer to Results in "OTN Application"

OTN Performance Refer to Results in "OTN Application"
SDH Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
SDH Quality Frequency
MUX
AU VC-4/3
TU VC-3
194
BERT
TU VC-12/11
Bulk
AU Pointer
TU Pointer
Justification *1
SDH Performance MUX
AU VC-4/3
TU VC-3
TU VC-12/11
SDH TCM Alarms
Errors
SONET Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
SONET Quality Frequency
MUX
STS-3c/1
TU VC-3
VT-2/1.5
Bulk
STS Pointer
VT Pointer
Justification *1
SONET Performance MUX
STS-3c/1
TU VC-3
VT-2/1.5
SONET TCM Alarms
Errors
E1 Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
E1 Performance FAS errors
Pattern errors
CRC4 errors
E-Bit errors *2
Errors
Pattern errors
Errors
Pattern errors
DS1/J1 Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
DS1/J1 Performance FAS errors
Pattern errors
CRC-6 *3
DS3 Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
DS3 Performance FAS errors
195
Pattern errors
*1: Justification appears when 'PDH Rx' or 'DSn Rx' is selected.
*2: E-Bit errors appears when 'E-bit' is set to On in Frame tab of E1 receiver.
*3: CRC6 errors appears when 'ESF' or 'J1' is selected.
SDH/SONET Performance Measurement Items

This paragaraph describes the performance result items.
EB (Errored Block) is defined as:

A block in which one or more errors occurred
SDH/SONET Performance Parameters

Items Definition
Errored Second
Count: The number of seconds during which one or more EBs occurred or
one or more alarms were detected.
ES
Ratio: Ratio of ES to total seconds in availability time (ESR: Errored Second
Ratio)
Severly Errored Second

Count: The number of seconds during which 30% or more EBs occurred or
SES
Ratio: Ratio of SES to total seconds in availability time (SESR: Severely
Errored Second Ratio)
Background Block Error

Count: EBs that occurred in non-SES.
BBE
Ratio: Ratio of BBE to all blocks excluding blocks in SES (BBER: Background
Block Error Ratio)
Unavalable Time
When SES continues for ten seconds, UNAV starts from the beginning of
UNAV the time. When items other than SES occur, UNAV ends at one second
before the time.
The following is the alarms which are counted as ES or SES:

SDH
MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-TIM, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, TU-AIS, TU-
LOP, LP-TIM, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI
SONET
AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P, AIS-V, LOP-V, TIM-V,
UNEQ-V, RDI-V
When the standard of Performance Parameters is set to G.826 or G.828+G829,

PO (Performance Objective) limit is displayed for ES, SES, and BE respectively.
PO limit is the calculated value by multiplying allocation in Performance
Parameters by the Performance Objective defined in ITU Recommendation.
When the measured value is equal to, or less than PO limit, the result is judged
as Pass.
When the standard of Performance Parameters is set to M.2101.1, BIS

(Bringing-Into-Service) limit is displayed as the Performance Objective.
196
BERT
BIS limit
Items Definition
S1-ES The ES threshold for deciding Accecpted
S2-ES The ES threshold for deciding Unaccecpted
S1-SES The SES threshold for deciding Accecpted
S2-SES The SES threshold for deciding Unaccecpted
S1-ES, S2-ES, S1-SES, and S2-SES are the calculated values according to ITU
Recommendation, and vary depending on Allocation and Period of
Performance Parameters. When the measured ES value is equal to or less than
S2-ES or the measured SES value is equal to or less than S2-SES, the result is
judged as Pass.
PDH Performance Measurement Items

This paragraph describes the performance result items. Measurement time
definitions are as below.
STotal
Total measurement time. This is the total time of the measurement excluding
the time of power failure.
SAvail
Available time of measurement. Calculated from the following formula:

SAvail=STotal-SUnavail
SUnavail
Unavailable time of the measurement. Refer to UAT definition.
Performance Parameters
Items Definition
Errored Second
ES Within SAvail, the number of seconds during which one or more errors
occurred.
Severely Errored Second
Within SAvail, the number of seconds during which any of the following is
detected.
SES
10-3 or more errors
AIS
LOS

BBE* Within SAvail, the number of errors during which SES is not detected.
Alarm Second
ALS detected.
AIS
LOS
Unavailable Time
197
When SES or ALS continues for ten seconds, UAT starts from the
beginning of the time. When items other than SES continues for ten
seconds, UAT ends at one second before the time. Refer to the figure of
Example of Unavailable Time Detection.
UAT
First, the time (when determining the start of UAT) is not counted as
UAT, and then if determined, the UAT is recounted.
First, the time (when determining the end of UAT) is counted as UAT,
and then if determined, the UAT is recounted. In a word, the values of
UAT may be reduced later. The same is applied to other items.
Available Time
AVT The available time of the measurement
Error Free Second

EFS
Within SAvail, the number of seconds during which no errors occurred.
*: Appears when the standard of Performance Parameters is set to G.826.
Example of Unavailable Time Detection
The performance objectives defined in ITU Recommendation are shown in the

following table. When the measured value is equal to or less than these values,
the cell is displayed in green.
Performance Objectives
Items G.821 G.826 M.2100
ES Ratio 0.08 0.04 0.02
SES Ratio 0.002 0.002 0.001
198
RTD
5.10 RTD
The Round-Trip Delay (RTD) test measures the time that the data which is transmitted
by the transmitter returns to the receiver.
The RTD test described in this section is applicable for SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn

interfaces.
For RTD test of OTN interface, refer to RTD in "OTN Application".

E1 Setup and Status
E3 Setup and Status
E4 Setup and Status
5.10.2 Test Setup
5.10.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the RTD application, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen allows you to configure the RTD test conditions for the currently
selected port(s).
199
Test Condition Allows you to define the test duration in one of two ways:
Mode
Single - Used to perform RTD test once.
Repeat - Used when a persistent RTD test is needed.
Measurement period
Select the measurement period from 0.5 seconds to 10 seconds.
5.10.2.2 Threshold
Touching the Threshold button in the navigation area displays the following
items.
Threshold
Maximum limit
Allows you to specify a threshold value of RTD in micro seconds (μs).
5.10.3 Test Results
5.10.3.1 Summary
shown below.
This screen presents a summary of the RTD test results, for all of the ports
included in the test. For each port, the information consists of:
Measurement count
Minimum, average, and maximum round-trip delay times in micro seconds
Threshold value
5.10.3.2 Detailed
Touching the Detailed button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
200
RTD
Buttons for selecting the relevant port are displayed at the top of the screen,
with a color indication of the pass/fail status of the test.
This screen presents the detailed results of an RTD test. The result is shown in
both list-form and in a graphical presentation. This screen contains the
summary field displayed below the list.
Summary field Consists of the minimum, average, and maximum round-trip delay times in
microseconds, the number of measurements, the specified threshold value and
measurement period.
List-form information Presents the results of an RTD test in list-form.
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a bar diagram of the round-trip delay
presentation
times.
5.10.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
5.10.3.4 Statistics
201
202
6 Ethernet Applications
and major dialogs) related to Ethernet applications. Sub-screens and dialogs
are described under the main screen from which they are activated/launched.
The following setting and applications are available:

Ethernet Setup and Status
BERT
Cable
Channel Statistics
Mon/Gen
Pass Through
Ping
Reflector
RFC 2544
RFC 6349
SAT 1564
Traceroute
Sync Test
Discovery
203
Ethernet Applications
6.1 Ethernet Setup and Status

Ethernet is globally used for data communication. Ethernet transmits variable length
frames up to 1500 bytes in length, each containing a header with the source and
destination addresses and a trailer that contains error correction data.
When setting an Ethernet application on OTN, in the navigation area of the

Ports Setup screen, the Ethernet layer may initially be shown as a single
Ethernet button which will change into a row of buttons when you touch it.
Each button represents an aspect of Ethernet port setup and gives you access
to the related setup options.
The Ethernet interface uses the Electrical RJ45 connectors or the optical ports.
6.1.1 Physical Port Setup
When the port is set up with an Ethernet interface, touching the Port button in
the navigation area will display the following screen.
This screen allows you to specify the physical port configuration of the
currently selected Ethernet port. It can also be used to inspect the current
status of the selected port.
204
6.1.1.1 Port configuration parameters
Port definition You can use either a 'quick mode' or a 'detailed mode' to set up the port.
Touching the long button at the top of the setup area will launch the Port Setup
dialog box. Touching the right part of the button ( ) will open the quick
setup menu.
The quick setup menu contains a number of predefined port configurations

(e.g. Electrical | Forced 100 Mbps FDX). The detailed mode dialog allows you
to specify the configuration yourself.
The detailed mode (Port Setup) dialog box is described in a separate section
below.
Clock Configuration
Timing source
Select a source to synchronize all Ethernet transmitters to.
The possible sources are:

Internal
External
205
GPS
Received
IEEE 1588v2
Received appears when the interface type is set to SFP or SFP+.

Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information.
6.1.1.2 Port Setup (detailed mode)
The contents of the dialog box (i.e. which parameters are displayed) depends
on your combined choice of interface type and port mode.
Port Mode = Off Selecting the Off port mode will shut down the Ethernet port and stop the
physical link.
Electrical + Selecting the Autonegotiate port mode with interface type specified as
Autonegotiate
Electrical will display the following parameters:
Auto Negotiation Advertisement

Allows you to set the speed and duplex capabilities that are advertised to the
link partner.
FDX can be set to 10, 100 and 1000.

HDX can be set to 10 and 100.
Using the Select all will automatically set check marks in every check box.
The selected negotiations are

indicated by the icon on the button.
1000 Mbps Specific Advertisement
206
Open the Clock drop-down menu to select one of the following settings:
Prefer master, Prefer slave, Master, or Slave.

Electrical + Forced Selecting the Forced port mode with interface type specified as Electrical will
display the following parameters:
Forced Mode Selection

Allows you to select the forced mode speed and duplex capabilities. Available
choices are:
10 HDX, 10 FDX, 100 HDX, and 100 FDX

When autonegotiating with a port that is forced (i.e. not using autonegotiation), the
duplex for the port that is using autonegotiation will automatically be set to Half Duplex
(HDX) and the speed to the speed used by the forced port. It is thus possible to have a
duplex mismatch without knowing it.
SFP + Autonegotiate Selecting the Autonegotiate port mode with interface type specified as SFP will
display the negotiated speed.
Only 1000Mbps FDX is supported by Autonegotiate function.
SFP + Forced Selecting the Forced port mode with interface type specified as SFP allows you
to select the forced mode speed. Available choices are:
100 FDX, 1000 FDX

SFP+ When running 10G only Forced mode is available.
WAN
Select the Enable check box to enable insertion of the WAN interface sublayer
(WIS).
WAN interface sublayer is available for BERT application only.
6.1.2 Ethernet Frame Setup
6.1.2.1 WAN
Touching the WAN button in the navigation area will display the screen shown
below.
207
This screen allows you to specify the configuration of a WAN interface sublayer
for the currently selected Ethernet port. It can also be used to inspect the
current status of the selected port.
Terminology
Allows you to select either Sonet or SDH notation for the naming of alarms,
errors, and pointers on the WAN status and result pages.
Follows
It is possible to let the Port 2 copy the setup from Port 1 by touching the
Follow button. When this button is displayed in green, Port 2 continues to
follow Port 1 change. This button appears when the Port 1 settings can be copy
to Port 2.
Header The buttons varies depending on "Terminology" selection. Touching the
buttons launches the dialog box to set SOH , TOH or POH .
SOH (Section OverHead) for SDH
TOH (Transport OverHead) for Sonet
POH (Path Overhead)
For the operation of dialog boxes, refer to the following sections.

SOH Editor in "SDH Setup and Status"
POH Editor in "SDH Setup and Status"
TOH Editor in "SONET Setup and Status"
POH Editor in "SONET Setup and Status"
6.1.2.2 Streams
Touching the Streams button in the navigation area will display a screen like
the one shown below.
208
This screen contains the setup of the Ethernet frame content transmitted by the
Network Master. The exact layout depends on the current selection of layers
(i.e. the various encapsulation and protocol headers composing the Ethernet
frame). Touching the button in the top left-hand part of the screen will display
the dialog box to set options related to the layers.
Only the most important (i.e. most frequently used) configuration parameters
are displayed here for each specified layer. To access all parameters, launch
the frame composition 'Stream Setup' dialog box accessible via the button in
the top left-hand part of the screen.
Composing the Ethernet frame
The following headers/layers are available for the frame configuration:
You can use either a 'quick' mode or a 'detailed' mode to set up the selection
of headers/layers. Touching the button at the top of the setup area will launch
the detailed mode dialog box (the Stream Setup dialog box ). Touching the
arrow to the right of the button will open the quick selection menu.
209
The quick selection menu contains a number of predefined frame

configurations (e.g. ETH/VLAN/IPv4). The detailed mode dialog box allows
you to specify the frame configuration yourself and also provides you with
access to all configuration parameters available for the individual layers.
The detailed mode (Stream Setup) dialog box is described in detail below.
Follow another port
It is possible to let the Port 2 copy the setup from Port 1 by touching the Follow button.
When this button is displayed in green, Port 2 continues to follow Port 1 change. This
button appears when the Port 1 settings can be copy to Port 2.
Multistreams
When the Multistream is active, the screen contains a Stream slide-out, which
allows you to select the relevant stream to view/configure. The name of the
slide-out control indicates which stream is currently being displayed.
At the top of the slide-out list you can switch between MAC, IP, and VLAN
information as stream identification.
210
Copy frame content to This feature allows you to copy the frame content of the stream that you are
other stream(s)
currently configuring to all streams in another port or to a single stream.
Touching the Copy To button opens a drop-down menu from which you can select the
relevant port and all or a specific stream.
If selecting All streams, All streams copy dialog box appears.
When copying settings to all streams, it is available to change MAC or IP

address with specifying Change type and selecting check boxes. If the check
box is not selected, same address is copied to all streams.
It takes a few moments to copy settings to all streams.
Change range is:

LSB 8 bits for MAC address and IPv4 address
LSB 16 bits for IPv6 address
Example is shown below:
When copied MAC address by When copied IPv6 address by setting with
setting with Decrement Increment
00-00-00-00-00-04 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:FFFC
00-00-00-00-00-03 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:FFFD
00-00-00-00-00-02 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:FFFE
00-00-00-00-00-01 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:FFFF
00-00-00-00-00-00 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:0000
00-00-00-00-00-FF 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:0001
00-00-00-00-00-FE 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:0002
00-00-00-00-00-FD 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:0003
: :
Stream Setup (detailed mode dialog box)
This dialog box provides you with the advanced options for configuring the
Ethernet frame content for a specific stream. Use the buttons in the following
figure to select the stream.
The buttons on the left-hand side of the dialog box allow you to select the
relevant layers. The current selection is shown at the top of the Frame Content
area. Touching one of the layer buttons in the Frame Content area will display
the setup parameters for that layer.
211
The layer buttons are arranged in order from bottom to top and from left to
right. The TCP/UDP protocols are the uppermost layer and Ethernet the
lowermost as depicted below compared to the OSI model.
# OSI layer name Protocol
4 Transport TCP, UDP
3 Network IPv4(1) , IPv6(1) , ICMP(2) , ARP
IEEE 802.2 LLC Type 1/ LLC1 + SNAP(1) ,

2 Data Link VLAN(1) , PBB, MPLS-TP, MPLS,
Ethernet(1)
Electrical / SFP / SFP+,

1 Physical 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps / 1000 Mbps / 10 Gbps,
FDX / HDX
(1)
Protocols can be excluded and the content changed.
(2)
ICMP appears in case of Ping application.
Encapsulation affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. Ping replies will
only be sent if the Ping request contains the same encapsulation as the one selected.
Touching Close will save your current settings and close the dialog. The
settings done in dialog box will be reflected on the ports setup screen.
Layer configuration parameters
The settings related to each layer are described in detail below. The following
layer buttons are available:
Custom (Custom header)
Unframed
ETH (MAC header)
212
MPLS
MPLS-TP
PBB
VLAN
LLC1
SNAP
IPv4
IPv6
UDP
TCP
Payload
Variable
Custom Custom header can be set on BERT application, allows users to edit the
specific area in the header. To set Custom header, touch the Custom button in
Layer 2 or select Custom in Layer 3.
Custom appears for BERT application only.
Length
Touch the field to set header length in bytes. The bit pattern with the specified
length appears in the Custom pattern field.
Touching the Custom pattern field launches the Pattern Editor similar to that of
dialog box.
To add the header corresponding to Ethernet

header, enter 14 in Layer 2 Custom header.
To add the header corresponding to IPv4

header, enter 20 in layer 3 Custom header.
Be sure to set Ethertype in ETH layer.
Import
Touching this button launches the Import Custom Header dialog box. Select
the header file (*.txt), and touch Import button.
213
Export
Touching this button launches the Export Custom Header dialog box. Enter the
file name and touch Export button.
Unframed Following operation on Steam Setup dialog box will display the parameter of
the unframed stream. The frames of Unframed stream do not contain MAC
header, but are consisted from the preamble and the payload pattern.
Touching the ETH button on green in Layer 2
Touching the Custom button on green in Layer 2
Custom button appears for BERT application only.
Frame Content
Touch the Payload patten field to set the pattern for the bit error rate test. Each
frame consists of only preamble and payload pattern.
One byte for the sequence check will be appended by selecting Enable
sequence checking on Stream screen of Test Setup.
ETH Touching the ETH layer button displays the parameters available for the
Ethernet header.
214
The Ethernet (MAC) header contains MAC addresses and Ethertype.
Dst MAC
The Destination MAC address can either be specified manually. This can be
decided based on an ARP lookup when IPv4 is set to Layer 3 or based on an
NDP when IPv6 is set to Layer 3.
To enable ARP or NDP, select the ARP check box or the NDP(NS/NA) check
box to the right of the Dst MAC field.
The ! button is an instant button which when touched will perform an ARP or
NDP lookup immediately, instead of waiting until the transmitter starts.
Broadcast
The Broadcast Share control is used to set the ratio between Unicast and
Broadcast frames transmitting.
Src MAC
The Source MAC address can be specified manually, but the instrument comes
with a default unique MAC address for each port.
If the Default check box is selected, the default unique MAC address is used.
Ethertype
When IPv4 or IPv6 is set to Layer 3, the Ethertype is automatically defined,
based on the next protocol element. When None is set to Layer 3, it can be set
between 0x05DD to 0xFFFF.
MPLS Touching the MPLS layer button displays the parameters available for the
MPLS protocol layer.
215
Level count
Up to eight levels of MPLS fields can be inserted in the frame. The number of
MPLS fields is selected through the Level count drop-down menu, and each
level is set up individually.
Label
Allows you to set up a denoting of the MPLS.
EXP
Allows you to set up the 3 bit value EXP (Experimental - used in MPLS to
support differentiated services (priority)).
TTL
Allows you to set up the 8 bit value TTL (Time To Live).
MPLS-TP Touching the MPLS-TP layer button displays the parameters available for the
MPLS-TP protocol layer.
MPLS-TP control word enable

When selecting the check box, a control word will be inserted in the frame.
216
Auto increment
Selecting the Auto increment check box makes the sequence number in the
RFC4448 control word increment automatically instead of being fixed to zero.
The remaining fields are described under the ETH layer.
When MPLS-TP is active the ARP button and NDP(NS/NA) button will be moved away
from the ETH layer.
PBB Touching the PBB layer button displays the parameters available for the
Provider Backbone Bridges (MAC-in-MAC) header.
B-Tag
Allows you to set a VLAN Identifier (VID), a Drop Eligible Indicator (DEI) and
a Priority Code Point (PCP).
Displays a Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID).
I-Tag
Allows you to set a VLAN Identifier (VID), a Drop Eligible Indicator (DEI), a
Priority Code Point (PCP) and a User Customer Address (UCA).
Displays a Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID).
Dst MAC
The MAC-in-MAC destination address can either be specified manually, or be
decided based on an ARP/NDP lookup.
When Layer 3 is set to IPv4, select the ARP check box to enable the ARP.
When Layer 3 is set to IPv6, select the NDP(NS/NA) check box to enable the
NDP.
The ! button is an instant button which when touched will perform an ARP or
NDP lookup immediately, instead of waiting until the transmitter starts.
Src MAC
Allows you to specify the MAC-in-MAC source address.
Ethertype
217
Shows the type automatically depending on layer configuration. If the value is

selectable, select the value by touching the field.
VLAN Touching the VLAN layer button displays the parameters available for the
Virtual LAN protocol layer.
Virtual LAN (VLAN) is used to create independent logical networks within a

physical network. When enabled, it adds a 16 bit IEEE 802.1Q field and a 16
bit Ethertype field to the header. The 802.1Q is separated into 3 parts.
VLAN affects the Ping and RFC2544/Router Latency test, i.e. when VLAN is enabled,
only frames with VLAN tag will be accepted. Furthermore, Ping replies will only be sent if
the Ping request contains the same VLAN ID as the one selected.
Level count
Up to eight levels of VLAN can be inserted in the frame. The number of VLAN
fields is selected through the Level count drop-down menu, and each level is
set up individually.
For Ping application, the VLAN level count is supported up to 2.
When the VLAN level count is 2, the two VLAN levels will be designated S-VLAN and C-
VLAN. S-VLAN is short for Service provider VLAN and C-VLAN is short for Customer
VLAN.
218
ID
Touching the ID (VLAN ID) button launches a setup dialog box from which it
is possible to set up a denoting of the virtual LAN.
DEI
Selecting the DEI check box sets a 1-bit flag denoting whether MAC addresses
inside the frame are in canonical format.
Priority
It is possible to set up the priority level of each frame.
Ethertype
When the Level count is more than one, select the type from 0x8100, 0x88A8,
0x9100 or 0x9200.
When IPv4 or IPv6 is set to Layer 3, the Ethertype of the highest level is
automatically defined, based on the next protocol element. When None is set to
Layer 3, it can be set between 0x05DD to 0xFFFF.
LLC1 Touching the LLC1 layer button displays the parameters available for the
Logical Link Control protocol layer.
The DSAP, SSAP and Control fields are set automatically, based on the upper
protocol layer.
DSAP: Destination Service Access Point value (8 bits)

SSAP: Source Service Access Point value (8 bits)
Control : Control field value (8 bits or 16 bits)
219
SNAP Touching the SNAP layer button displays the parameters available for the Sub
Network Access Protocol protocol layer.
The Protocol ID is fixed to 0, and the Ethertype field depends on the upper
protocol layer.
'SNAP' is not possible without 'LLC1'.
IPv4 Touching the IPv4 layer button displays the parameters available for the
Internet Protocol version 4 layer.
IPv4 header is defined in RFC 791 as below.
220
Version, Header length

Shows Version and Header length in the IPv4 header.
Total length
Shows Total length in the IPv4 header.
DSCP/TOS
When changing the DSCP/TOS (Differentiated Service Code Point/Type of
Service) setting, it is possible to define some handling characteristics of the
datagram, originally defined in RFC 791. Other uses of the DSCP/TOS setting
are VoIP, DiffServ and ECN.
Identifier
The Identifier is mainly used for uniquely identifying fragments of an IP
datagram. When the Auto increment check box is selected, the Identifier will be
different for each sent frame.
Flags, Fragment Offset

If the MF (More Fragments) flag is set: When a packet is fragmented, all
fragments have the MF flag set except the last fragment.
If the DF (Don't Fragment) flag is set: When fragmentation is required to route
the packet, then the packet will be dropped.
RES (Reserved) must be zero (i.e. not set).
TTL
TTL (Time To Live) defines the number of 'hops' a datagram can do before it
no longer is forwarded.
Protocol
The Protocol field defines the upper/next layer protocol encapsulated in the IP
datagram. Typical values in hex are: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP etc.
Src IP/Dst IP
Source IP address and Destination IP address can be entered using the format:
255.255.255.255.
When Multistream traffic is sent from one port to another, make sure that the source
address on one port is the same as the destination address on the other port for each of
the active streams. This applies both if the two ports are in one instrument and if they are
in two different instruments.
221
Selecting the DHCP check box located next to the Src IP field will enable the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol function.
Selecting the DNS check box located next to the Dst IP field changes the field
name to Hostname, allowing you to specify the domain name server.
Touching the Setup button next to the virtual Lamp in the Src IP line will open
the DHCP/DNS Setup dialog box.
Selecting the Renew lease when link is reestablished check box enables the
function that automatically renews the lease when the link is reestablished.
Selecting the Get gateway servers through DHCP check box enables the
function that automatically assigns the gateway.
Selecting the Get DNS setup through DHCP check box enables the function
that automatically assigns the DNS server.
Primary DNS and Secondary DNS allow you to define these IPv4 addresses for
the specific stream.
When allocating IP addresses using DHCP, it is 'leased' for a certain period of

time defined by the network. The time when the lease expires is indicated as
Current lease expire time.
Touching the Renew now button will renew the allocation of the IP address.
Touching the Close button closes the dialog box.
Gateway/Network mask
Select the Gateway check box to enable the use of a gateway. When gateway is
enabled and the gateway/source address mask falls outside the network mask,
an ARP lookup for the gateway IP address will be made. The resulting MAC
address is used as destination. Gateway is usually used with ARP enabled as
well.
Touching the Setup button next to the Gateway check box will open the
Gateway Setup dialog box, in which you can set up the default gateway and/or
the network mask.
222
IPv6 Touching the IPv6 layer button displays the parameters available for the
Internet Protocol version 6 layer.
IPv6 header is defined in RFC 791 as below.
Version
Shows Version in the IPv6 header.
Traffic class
Traffic class is similar to IPv4's DSCP/TOS and is used for the class and
priority. This is defined in RFC 2474.
Flow label
The Flow label indicates that the datagram belongs to a specific sequence of
traffic between a source and destination. The default value is 0.
Payload length
223
Shows Payload length in the IPv6 header. This value is calculated

automatically.
Next header
The next header indicates the upper/next layer protocol encapsulated in the IP
datagram. Typical values in hex are: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP etc.
Hop limit
The hop limit defines the number of 'hops' a datagram can do before it no
longer is forwarded.
Src IP
Select setting mode using drop-down menu.
Manual : touch the field to enter 32 Hex values.
Stateless: configures the address automatically. The lamp lit in green if the
automatic configuration has succeeded.
This option is available when PBB nor MPLS-TP is not set to Layer 2.
Touching the Setup button next to the virtual Lamp in the Src IP line
will open the Stateless IPv6 Setup dialog box.
Selecting the Use src MAC check box configures the interface ID from
the MAC address.
When the check box is clear, touch the field to set the interface ID.
Touching Renew now starts the source IP address configuration.
Dst IP
Touch the field to enter 32 Hex values.
UDP Touching the UDP layer button displays the parameters available for the User
Datagram Protocol layer.
224
User Datagram Protocol is a core protocol of the Internet protocol suite. The
UDP provides a minimal and simple interface between a network layer below
and a session layer or application above. This protocol does not guarantee
reliable and in-order delivery from sender to receiver.
UDP header is defined in RFC 768 as below.
Src Port
Source port identifies the sending port and should be assumed to be the port to
reply to if needed. If not used, then it should be zero.
Dst Port
Destination port identifies the destination port and the setting is required.
Length
Shows the packet length in bytes.
Checksum
Optionally, the Checksum may be forced to zero, by selecting the Null check
box.
TCP Touching the TCP layer button displays the parameters available for the
Transmission Control Protocol layer.
225
Transmission Control Protocol is a core protocol of the Internet protocol suite.

It is the intermediate layer between the Internet Protocol below it and the
application above it. This protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery
from sender to receiver.
The Network Master supports sending frames that resemble TCP frames, but the
traffic transmitted will not constitute a real TCP stream, as no handshake is
performed.
TCP header is defined in RFC 793 as below.
Auto connect
By enabling Automatic TCP connect, it is possible to force the transmitter to
establish a TCP connection before the actual traffic frames are sent. This makes
it possible to pass a firewall/nat router from the inner side.
Listen mode
226
When Listen mode is enabled, the transmitter will await an external TCP
connection before the actual traffic frames are sent. This makes it possible to
pass a firewall/nat router from the other side (Remark: you must have
something establishing the TCP connection from the inner side e.g. Network
Master). In this mode the peers MAC, IP, and Port are taken from the incoming
TCP connection.
Src Port
Source port identifies the sending port.
Dst Port
Destination port identifies the receiving port.
Seq number
If the SYN flag is present, this is the initial sequence number and the first data
byte is the sequence number plus 1.
If the SYN flag is not present, then the first data byte is the sequence number.
The Auto increment check box may be selected in order for the Sequence
number to follow the number of data bytes sent (Remark: the first data byte will
be number zero in this mode, and not the number entered into the Seq number
field).
Ack number
If the ACK flag is set then the value of this field is the sequence number that the
sender of the acknowledgment expects next.
Data offset
Data offset specifies the size of the TCP header in 32-bit words. This is set
automatically.
Reserved
Reserved for future use and should be set to zero.
Flags
Contains 8 bit flags (control bits). The flags may be programmed individually,
however when Automatic TCP connect is enabled, most of the flags are
controlled by the TCP state engine.
Window
Specifies the size of the sliding window (i.e. the maximum receiver buffer). The
window defines the number of bytes that may be sent before waiting for an
acknowledgement from the receiver.
Checksum
The 16-bit checksum field is used for error-checking of the header and data.
Urgent pointer
If the URG flag is set then this 16-bit field is an offset from the sequence
number indicating the last urgent data byte.
Payload The Payload layer allows you to set the pattern of the Payload of the
transmitted frames.
227
Open the Pattern drop-down menu to select the relevant pattern.
FOX : ASCII code bit sequence of "THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER
THE LAZY DOG".
5555: Repetition of "0101010101010101".
PRBS9 to PRBS31: Pseudo-random bit sequence. For PRBS9, its bit length is
511 (=29-1).
HF TEST: High frequency test pattern. (Defined in IEEE802.3 Annex 48A)
CRPAT: Continuous random test pattern. (Defined in IEEE802.3 Annex 48A)
JTPAT: Jitter tolerance test pattern.
SPAT: Supply noise pattern.
User 32 bit: Repetition of the user defined 32 bits.
If you select the User 32 bit pattern, a button appears with which you can open
the Pattern Editor dialog box.
Selecting Cross pattern at successive frames sets the payload in Ethernet

frames as successive payload pattern through multiple frames.
Cross pattern at successive frames is available for BERT application only.
Following is the explanation of an example when:

Payload pattern is set to PRBS15.
In this case, the pattern length is 32767 bit (≈ 4096 byte).
Frame size is set in Stream on Test setup screen so that the payload
length will be 1024 byte.
When the check box is not selected, Top of 1024 bytes in the payload pattern
are set to the payload in Ethernet frames.
228
When the check box is selected, Payload pattern is divided and set to the
payload in Ethernet frames so that the payload pattern is successive through
Ethernet frames.
Variable The Variable allows you to set variables in the transmitted frames.
When ETH button in layer 2 is green.
When Custom button in layer 2 is green.
Variable No.
Select which of the two variables you want to define.
Field
Use the drop-down menu to select the type of field. Note that the contents of
the drop-down list depends on which protocol layers are currently chosen for
the Ethernet frame.
Position
229
Allows you to specify a bit position and bit length for the variable by Offset and
Length field. The position of a variable is shown in green. 'X' means four bits.
When Custom button in Layer 2 is green, row of boxes appears. A box indicates
eight bits.
The part in green shows that all bits are variable. The part in yellow shows that
partial bits are variable.
Value
Use the Change Type drop-down menu to specify how the variable will change:
Increment, Decrement or Random .
Specify Start and End values for the variable, as well as the number of Steps.
6.1.2.3 Swap
Touching the Swap button in the navigation area displays the following screen.
Swap button appears in Reflector application.
This screen is where you configure the traffic loop by specifying how addresses
and/or ports are to be swapped and reflected.
Selecting Swap all MAC addresses will transmit/reflect all received frames with
their MAC addresses swapped. Use Swap specific MAC address to swap and
reflect only the frames with a specific MAC address.
The IP addresses and UDP/TCP ports may also be swapped inside the reflected
frames. Additionally, the ACK flag may be forced set inside reflected TCP
frames.
6.1.2.4 Settings
Touching the Settings button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
230
This screen allows you to specify how the Network Master handles incoming
frames on the currently selected Ethernet port. It can also be used to inspect
the current status of the selected port.
Follows
Follows button. This button appears when you can copy the Port 1 settings to
Port 2.
Incoming Frames
Respond to PAUSE frame

Selecting this check box will force the transmitter to pause for a short period of
time if a pause frame (defined in IEEE 802.3x) is received, e.g. in case of
congestion of the foreign receiver.
Answer incoming Ping requests

When this function is enabled, the Network Master will reply to ping requests,
using the Source MAC and IP addresses in the replies.
Note that when using the Ping application, this setting is ignored, and replies
will always be sent - also from the passive port.
Answer incoming NDP(NS) requests

When this function is enabled, the Network Master will reply to incoming NS
(Neighbor Solicitation) requests, using the Source MAC and IP addresses in
sending out replies.
NDP: Neighbor Discovery Protocol
Answer incoming ARP requests
231
When this function is enabled, Network Master will reply to incoming ARP
requests, using the Source MAC and IP addresses in sending out replies.
ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
Accept Network Master configuration frames

This setting appears in the RFC2544 and SAT1564 applications.
When the check box is selected, Network Master can be configured by another
Network Master via test interface.
Receiver Setup
Expected preamble length

Allows you to specify the preamble length that the receiver should consider as
'normal' that is, non-erroneous). The default setting is 8 bytes. The range is
from 3 to 15 bytes.
Ignore preamble violations

Select this check box if you want to ignore preamble violations.
IFG lower threshold

Allows you to specify the minimum allowed receiver interframe gap. The
default setting is 12 bytes. The range is from 8 to 15 bytes.
Filter IFG violations caused by master/slave clock synchronization

Applies only to Gigabit mode, where the IFG will not be constant, which leads
to a larger number of IFG violated frames than expected. Select this function to
hide those violations.
Jumbo frame size upper limit

Allows you to specify the size of the Jumbo frames (that is, Ethernet frames
longer than 1518 that are not counted as oversized/erroneous). The default
setting is 9018 bytes. The range is from 1519 to 16000 bytes.
In-band Setup
This tab provides the settings for the remote control using commands via the
test interface.
In-band control communication supports the following protocols.
Ethernet/IPv4/TCP
Ethernet/VLAN/IPv4/TCP
The TCP port number is set in Remote Control on the Instrument Tool bar.
Allow In-band control

Selecting the check box enables the remote control using commands via test
interface.
232
Only one port is able to allow In-band control. When In-band control is allowed at
another port, this setting cannot be made.
When Port Setup is set to 10Gbps WAN, In-band control is not performed.
This tab is not displayed in the Cable, Pass Through, and Discovery applications.
For the Discovery application, In-band control is allowed internally and the remote
control via test interface is enabled.
For the Reflector application, selecting Allow In-band control selects the following
settings in the Swap forcibly.
Swap IP address
Swap UDP/TCP ports
Src. MAC
Set a MAC address of the port used for the In-band control communication.
Selecting Default uses the MAC address assigned to the port hardware.
When the following MAC addresses are set, Network Masters are not searched in the
Discovery application.
Multicast MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00
Src. IP
Set an IP address of the port used for the In-band control communication.
Selecting DHCP obtains an IP address automatically. Following setting values
are fixed.
DSCP/TOS: 0x00
TTL: 20
Do not set the same IP address as the IP address set at Ethernet in the Network screen
on Instruments tool bar.
When setting the IP address to 0.0.0.0, it is impossible to switch applications in the
Network mask
Set a network mask for In-band control.
Set a network mask and IP address so that the network does not duplicate with one
specified in Ethernet in Network screen on Instruments tool bar.
Gateway
Selecting check box allows users to set the default gateway IP address.
Password
When the check box is selected, a password with 4 to 8 characters can be set.
VLAN Level
When VLAN is set to the In-band control communication, set Level and ID.
Following setting values are fixed.
DEI: OFF
Priority: 0
Ethertype: 0x8100 (IPv4)
Miscellaneous
Allow changes to interface setup while a test is running
233
Select this check box if you want to be able to make changes to the following
interface setup during a measurement.
WAN
Stream
Settings
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
OAM
Filter
Compatible pattern with CMA3000

Select this check box if you want the PRBS pattern for CMA3000 compatibility.
(CMA3000 is the previous model of Network Master Pro.)
Compatible configuration frames with CMA3000 and V2.X or older

This check box appears in SAT (Y.1564) application.
Select this check box if you want the configuration frames to support
communication with CMA3000 and Network Master Version 2.X or older.
6.1.2.5 SyncE
Touching the SyncE button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
This screen allows you to configure the setup parameters related to

Synchronous Ethernet. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the
selected port.
Enable SyncE
Select this check box to enable statistics of the quality level reported in the
received ESMC (Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel) messages and
the generation of Sync Alarm when such messages are missing.
234
Due to the properties of 10 Mbps Ethernet, the transfer of SyncE timing cannot be
guaranteed at this rate.
Follows
to Port 2.
Setup
Mode
Non-sync/Monitor: Does not transmit an ESMC message.
Synchronous: Forces the quality levels specified in QL to be transmitted in an
ESMC message every second.
Ql Type
Allows you to select a protocol/option. This changes the textual representation
of the quality levels on the result- and status pages.
Ql
Allows you to specify the quality level to be indicated in the transmitted
Ethernet signal.
Combination of Ql Type and Ql
G.781 G.781 G.781 G.8264
option I option II option III
QL-INV0 QL-STU QL-UNK QL-INV0
QL-INV1 QL-PRS QL-INV1 QL-INV1
QL-PRC QL-INV2 QL-INV2 QL-INV2
QL-INV3 QL-INV3 QL-INV3 QL-INV3
QL-SSU-A QL-TNC QL-INV4 QL-INV4
QL-INV7 QL-ST2 QL-INV7 QL-INV7
QL-SSU-B QL-INV8 QL-INV8 QL-INV8
QL-INV10 QL-ST3 QL-INV10 QL-EEC2
QL-SEC QL-INV11 QL-SEC QL-EEC1
QL-INV12 QL-SMC QL-INV12 QL-INV12
QL-INV13 QL-ST3E QL-INV13 QL-INV13
QL-INV14 QL-PROV QL-INV14 QL-INV14
QL-DNU QL-DUS QL-INV15 QL-INV15
Src MAC
235
Allows you to specify the MAC address to be used in ESMC messages. You can
either use the Default check box to force an instrument-specific default value,
or touch the address field to enter an address yourself.
Event flag
When Mode is set to Synchronous, sets the event flag of packets.
Dynamic: Sets to 1 to the first packet, sets to 0 to other packets.

Static Off: Sets to 0.
Static On : Sets to 1.
Capture
Selecting this check box enables recording of ESMC messages. The captured
packet data are saved to file with extension "pcap" when the measurement has
ended. The destination folder of the captured data file is the same folder where
the measurement result file is saved.
When capturing the packets concerning SyncE protocol, FCS values of Ethernet frames
are not included in the captured packet data file.
6.1.2.6 IEEE 1588v2
Touching the IEEE 1588v2 button in the navigation area will display the
screen shown below.
This screen allows you to configure the IEEE 1588 clock (based on the IEEE
1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which is used to distribute absolute time
across the Ethernet network). An IEEE 1588 clock can act either as a timing
master or as a slave. The screen also contains information about the current
236
The clock may be set up in either normal or unicast mode. In unicast mode the
clock must be explicitly told whether it is a master or a slave, and the clock
must never change away from this setup automatically.
Enable IEEE 1588v2

Select this check box to start the clock. The settings of the Slave mode and
Unicast check boxes in Setup tab will determine whether the clock runs as a
slave or will become the grandmaster clock.
When the Network Master becomes a grandmaster, and if the internal clock is selected
(or if the GPS is not available), the IEEE 1588 clock is set from the Network Master's
internal time (offset by the selected UTC offset). This action only takes place when the
clock is restarted (e.g. disable/enable the clock will force this).
When the Network Master is grandmaster in unicast mode, only one slave will be
accepted at a time. Other slaves are just ignored.
Ext. Log
Used to record the external log. If you select this, the IEEE1588v2 Log button
appears in the navigation area of Test Result.
Capture
Used to capture the packets concerning IEEE 1588 v2 protocol. The captured
packet data are saved to file with extension "pcap" when the measurement has
ended. The destination folder of the captured data file is the same folder where
the measurement result file is saved.
When capturing the packets concerning IEEE 1588v2 protocol, FCS values of Ethernet
frames are not included in the captured packet data file.
Follows
to Port 2.
237
The setup area of this screen contains the following groupings of parameters,
placed on separate tab pages:
General setup parameters
Master clock specific parameters
Timing-specific parameters
Setup tab page
The Setup tab page contains the general setup parameters for IEEE 1588v2.
Transport protocol
You can set up the transport protocol(s) for PTP messages either by selecting
one of the predefined configurations from the quick selection menu (e.g.
ETH/VLAN/IPv4/UDP) or by configuring the protocols via the detailed mode
dialog box. Touching the protocol button will launch the detailed mode dialog
box (the IEEE 1588v2 Protocol dialog box). Touching the arrow to the right of
the button will open the quick selection menu.
Depending on the transport protocol setting, Profile setting will be forced to

User Defined.
Profile
Select the profile of PTP (Precision Time Protocol) from below.
User Defined: Allows you to define the PTP profile. Available IEEE 1588v2
domain is 0 to 255. Unicast/Multicast and the delay mechanism can be set.
G.8265.1: Uses the PTP profile defined ITU-T G.8265.1. This profile is used for
unicast mode. Available IEEE 1588v2 domain is 4 to 23. Transport protocol
will be set to ETH/IPV4/UDP.
G.8275.1: Uses the PTP profile defined ITU-T G.8275.1. This profile is used for
multicast mode. Available IEEE 1588v2 domain is 24 to 43. Transport protocol
will be set to ETH.
IEEE 1588v2 domain
238
Touch the button to set the domain. The PTP messages and data sets are
associated with a domain and therefore the PTP protocol is independent for
different domains.
In multicast mode, review the attributes in the timing section when changing the domain.
Otherwise the best master algorithm may fail for all IEEE 1588v2 clocks in the domain.
Step mode
Allows you to choose between the two step modes: One-step and Two-step.
One-step: The transmitted timestamp of a frame is inserted into the frame
itself.
Two-step: The timestamp is sent in a follow-up message.
Delay mech.
Allows you to choose which mechanism to use for calculating the mean path
delay: Delay request/response or Peer delay.
Slave mode
Used to specify that the port can only act as a slave clock. Used in both
multicast (normal) and unicast mode.
Unicast
Used to enable the unicast profile. For domains 0 to 3 static unicast is enabled.
For domains 4 to 23 the Telecom Profile (ITU-T G.8265.1 IEEE 1588 v2 profile
for telecommunication) is used.
If Slave mode is checked, the clock will always run as a slave in both normal and unicast
mode. If Slave mode is not checked in normal mode, the best master clock algorithm is
run and the result of this will determine if the Network Master can become a
grandmaster clock. In unicast mode, if the Slave mode is not checked, the Network
Master will become a grandmaster clock.
Unicast negotiat
Selecting the check box enables the unicast negotiation. This check box is
available when Profile is set to User Defined and the Unicast is selected.
Clock tab page
The Clock tab page contains the parameters related to the clock-specific setup.
Note that it is not enabled if the port is set in Slave Mode.
239
Source
Allows you to specify where the time of the clock should come from.
Internal : Current instrument time

GPS: GPS time (Requires external GPS receiver)
Priority #1/#2
Allows you to specify the priority 1 and priority 2 values. Acceptable values are
between 0 and 255.
Class
Allows you to specify the clock class. Acceptable values are between 0 and
255.
Identity
Allows you to specify the 64 bit clock identity. You can either use the Source
MAC to generate the identity (by selecting the Use src MAC check box) or you
can type the identity yourself (using the address field).
Time source
Either choose one of the predefined time sources in the drop-down menu, or
select User defined and enter a value manually. Acceptable values are between
0x00 and 0xFF.
Accuracy
Either choose one of the predefined accuracy in the drop-down menu, or select
User defined and enter a value manually. Acceptable values are between 0x00
and 0xFF.
PRTC connected and PRTC not connected are available when:

Profile is set to G.8275.1 or User Defined and Slave mode is cleared.
PRTC: Primary Reference Time Clock
Timing tab page
The Timing tab page contains the timing-specific parameters.
240
In multicast mode, it is important that all IEEE 1588v2 clocks in the same domain uses
the same announce interval and announce timeout values. Otherwise the best master
algorithm may fail. Sync interval and Min. delay Req. interval should also match the
domain.
Announce interval
Allows you to specify the interval between transmitted announce messages.
Available values are between 1/8 s and 32 s.
The data to send actually is displayed in hexadecimal.
Announce timeout
Allows you to specify the number of missed announce intervals before
announce timeout. Acceptable values are between 2 and 255.
The calculated time is displayed right hand of the field.
UTC offset
Set the time difference between the internal clock or Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC) and Internal Atomic Time (TAI). For the time of January 2017, set
37 seconds as the difference between UTC and TAI. This value is used when
converting the internal time or a GPS based UTC time to TAI based time, which
is used in an IEEE 1588 clock. The correct UTC/TAI offset value changes when
leap seconds are applied to the UTC time.
GPS antenna cable

Allows you to specify the delay time of GPS antenna cable connected to the
Network Master in nano second unit.
When calculating the delay time from the cable length, it is recommendable to
use 5 ns/m as the conversion factor.
When using the following GPS provided by Anritsu, set 25 ns.

G0325A
MU100090A (When using J1706A GPS antenna of the standard accessory)
Sync interval
241
Allows you to specify the interval between transmitted sync messages.

Available values are between 1/128 s and 32 s.
Min delay Req. interval

Allows you to specify the minimum interval between transmitted delay request
messages. Available values are between 1/128 s and 32 s.
Unicast duration
In unicast slave mode, you ask a master to emit announce, sync and delay
response messages for some time. This setting is enabled when the Setup tab is
set to either of the following.
Profile is set to G.8265.1 and Slave mode is selected.
Profile is set to User Defined and Slave mode, Unicast, Unicast negotiat are
selected.
After this period, the master forgets everything about your request. The Unicast
duration is this period in seconds. Legal values are from 60 to 1000 seconds. A
Network Master unicast slave will renew the request 10 seconds before
timeout.
Transport Protocol The IEEE 1588v2 Protocol dialog box is launched by touching the protocol
button on the Setup tab page. The dialog box allows you to configure the
protocols in detailed mode.
In the IEEE 1588v2 Protocol dialog box, the buttons on the left-hand side
allow you to select the relevant layers. The current selection is shown at the top
of the Frame Content area. Touching one of the layer buttons in the Frame
Content area will display the setup parameters for that layer.
The following layers and parameters are available:
ETH layer
When the Layer 3 is set to None, you can set Src MAC and Select Multicast
MAC address only.
242
Dst MAC - Type in the destination MAC address to be used with all PTP
unicast frames.
Touch the ARP button to solve any MAC setup in connection with IPv4.
Touch the NDP (NS/NA) button to solve any MAC setup in connection with
IPv6.
Src MAC - Type in the source MAC address to be used with all PTP frames.
Select Default to use the default MAC that comes with the Ethernet port.
Ethertype - Ethernet type is user-selectable only in case of VLAN use.
Select Multicast MAC address - The Multicast MAC address to be used in PTP
frames.
Automatic select: - Multicast MAC address will be set depending on the
message.
01-80-C2-00-00-0E: - Multicast MAC address used for non-peer-delay
measurement mechanism messages.
01-1B-19-00-00-00: - Multicast MAC address used for peer-delay
measurement mechanism messages.
VLAN layer
Select the number of levels using Level count drop down menu.
For each level select ID, DEI, Priority, and Ethertype.
MPLS layer
Select the number of levels using Level count drop down menu.
For each level select Label, EXP, and TTL. Stack displays the stack bit.
IPv4 layer
Src IP - Type in the IPv4 source address.
Dst IP - In unicast mode type in the IPv4 destination address.
DSCP(PTP events message) and DSCP(PTP other message) - Set the DSCP
value to be used for transmitted PTP event frames and a value for all other
PTP frames. Acceptable values are between 0x00 and 0x3F.
IPv6 layer
Src IP - Select setting mode using drop-down menu.
Manual : touch the field to enter 32 Hex values.
Stateless: configures the address automatically. The lamp lit in green if
the automatic configuration has succeeded.
Touching the Setup button next to the virtual Lamp in the Src IP
line will open the Stateless IPv6 Setup dialog box.
Selecting the Use src MAC check box configures the interface ID
from the MAC address.
When the check box is clear, touch the field to set the interface
ID.
Touching Renew now starts the source IP address configuration.
Dst IP - In unicast mode type in the IPv6 destination address.

Multicast scope - Select one of the predefined IPv6 multicast scope values or
choose User defined to manually enter a value. Acceptable values are
between 0x0 and 0xF.
Enable extension header -Appends the IPv6 extension header. Touching
Extension header opens the Extension Header dialog box.
243
Type
Select the extension header type from Hop-by-Hop, Routing (Type 0),
Destination .
Length
Set the byte length of the custom pattern.
The value setting to the actual header is the truncated value after the
decimal point of (Length + 2)/8.
Custom pattern
Touch the field to edit the pattern by using Pattern Editor.
6.1.2.7 OAM
Touching the OAM button in the navigation area will display the screen shown
below.
OAM (Operation, Administration and Management) is a group of management

functions that provides system or network fault indication, performance
monitoring, security management, diagnostic functions, configuration and user
provisioning.
This screen allows you to configure the OAM application (i.e. the OAM
functions). It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port.
Protocol
Touch the button in the top left-hand part of the screen to select the protocol.
The setup parameters are grouped according to protocol.
802.3ah protocol - Applies to the connectivity of point-to-point connections

across one hop.
244
802.1ag protocol - Applies to the connectivity of bridges and paths that pass
through bridges. Handles both multipoint connections and point-to-point
connections.
Y.1731 protocol - An extension to the 802.1ag standard and relies upon the
802.1ag protocol for transport. Applies to both multipoint and point-to-point
connections.
In addition, the 802.1ag and Y.1731 protocol screens contain a special

Discovery setup.
To change to a different protocol, the state of the current protocol will be set to 'Off'.
Follows
to Port 2.
OAM Protocol
In the OAM Protocol dialog box the buttons on the left-hand side allow you to
select the relevant layers. The current selection is shown at the top of the
Frame Content area. Touching one of the layer buttons in the Frame Content
area will display the setup parameters for that layer.
The following layers and parameters are available:
OAM layer
Src MAC -The MAC address of the source that sends the OAM Protocol Data
Units, which is a unicast address.
PBB layer
Refer to PBB in "Stream" subsection.
VLAN layer
Refer to VLAN in "Stream" subsection.
245
MPLS, MPLS-TP layer

Refer to MPLS in "Stream" subsection.
802.3ah protocol Selecting the 802.3ah protocol will display the screen shown below.
setup
Discovery tab page
The Discovery tab page contains the following parameters:
State
Allows you to set the state of the protocol to either On or Off. Note that when
State is set to On, the Link mode, Vendor OUI and Vendor specific info
parameters are disabled.
Link mode
Allows you to set the DTEs to Active or Passive mode. Active DTEs initiate the
exchange of information, while passive DTEs react to the initiation by the
remote DTE. Note that active DTEs operate in a limited respect if the remote
OAM entity is in passive mode.
Vendor OUI
Allows you to specify the 24-bit Organizationally Unique Identifier of the
vendor. Touch the field to launch an editor dialog box.
Vendor specific info

Allows you to specify a 28-bit identifier that may be used to differentiate a
vendor's product models/versions. Touch the field to launch an editor dialog
box.
Unidirectional
Select this check box to make the device operate in unidirectional transmission
mode.
Link event
This setting is reserved for future use and cannot be set.
246
Remote loopback
This setting is reserved for future use and cannot be set.
Variable retrieval
Select this check box to make the DTE support sending Variable Response
OAMPDUs.
Defects tab page
The Defects tab page allows you to enable/disable local defects.
Link fault
Select this check box to enable a message if the PHY determines that a fault
has occurred on the receive direction of the local DTE.
Dying gasp
Select this check box to enable a message if an unrecoverable local failure
condition has occurred.
Critical event
Select this check box to enable a message if an unspecified critical event has
occurred.
802.1ag protocol Selecting the 802.1ag protocol will display the screen shown below.
setup
The screen contains two views: the default Setup view and the Discovery view.
Use the Setup and Discovery buttons at the bottom of the screen to switch
between the two views.
The Setup view is described below. The Discovery view is described in a

separate section.
General parameters
State
State is set to On, the other general parameters are disabled, but the tab pages
and their contents are enabled.
247
MEP ID
Allows you to specify the Local Maintenance Point ID, which will identify the
unit in the MA.
Domain
Allows you to identify the network or part of the network for which faults in
connectivity are managed.
MD Level
Use the drop-down menu to specify the level at which the MEP exists.
Association
Allows you to specify the Main Association Identifier.
CCM tab page
The CCM tab page contains the following parameter:
CCM interval
Use the drop-down menu to specify the frequency at which CCMs are
transmitted and expected to be received.
LBM tab page
The LBM tab page contains the following parameters:
Optional TLV
Use the drop-down menu to select a TLV type, if relevant. The possible types
are: Data TLV and Test TLV. If you select one of the TLV types, fields for
specifying the length and value will appear.
Length
Only available if a Data or Test TLV type has been selected. Allows you to
specify the length of the TLV.
Value
specify the value of the TLV. Note that for the Data TLV type, this field is an
entry field where you open an editor and type the value; for the Test TLV type,
it is a drop-down menu.
LTM tab page
The LTM tab page contains the following parameters:
TTL
Allows you to specify a TTL value. Used to indicate whether or not an LTM
should be terminated by the receiver.
Trans ID
Allows you to specify the transaction number for the LTM.
Y.1731 protocol setup Selecting the Y.1731 protocol will display the screen shown below.
248
The screen contains two views: the default Setup view and the Discovery view.
Use the Setup and Discovery buttons at the bottom of the screen to switch
between the two views.
The Setup view is described below. The Discovery view is described in a

separate section.
General parameters
State
State is set to On, the other general parameters are disabled, but the tab pages
and their contents are enabled.
MEP ID
Allows you to specify the Local Maintenance Point ID, which will identify the
unit in the MEG.
MEG ID
Allows you to identify the MEG to which the MEP belongs.
MEG level
Use the drop-down menu to specify the MEG level at which the MEP exists.
CCM tab page
The CCM tab page contains the following parameter:
CCM interval
Use the drop-down menu to specify the frequency at which CCMs are
transmitted and expected to be received.
LBM tab page
The LBM tab page contains the following parameters:
Optional TLV
249
specifying the ID will appear.
Length
specify the length of the TLV.
Value
specify the value of the TLV. Note that for the Data TLV type, this field is an
entry field where you open an editor and type the value; for the Test TLV type,
it is a drop-down menu.
LTM tab page
The LTM tab page contains the following parameters:
TTL
Allows you to specify a TTL value. Used to indicate whether or not an LTM
should be terminated by the receiver.
Trans ID
Allows you to specify the transaction number for the LTM.
TST tab page
The TST tab page contains the following parameters:
Frames to send
Allows you to specify the number of frames to be transmitted.
Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate at which frames are transmitted.
Optional TLV
Use the drop-down menu to select the Test TLV type, if relevant. Fields for
specifying the length and value will then appear.
Length
Only available if the Test TLV type has been selected. Allows you to specify the
length of the TLV.
Value
Only available if the Test TLV type has been selected. Use the drop-down menu
to select the value of the TLV.
MCC tab page
The MCC tab page contains the following parameters:
OUI
Allows you to specify the Organizationally Unique Identifier for the
organization defining a specific format and meaning of ETH-MCC.
250
Data
Allows you to specify any required additional information. The type of
information depends on the specific application of ETH-MCC.
LCK tab page
The LCK tab page contains the following parameters:
Client MEG level

Allows you to specify the MEG level of the client MEG.
LCK rate
Use the drop-down list to select the rate of the LCK frames being transmitted.
AIS tab page
The AIS tab page contains the following parameters:
Client MEG level

Allows you to specify the MEG level of the client MEG.
AIS rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate of the AIS frames being transmitted.
1DM tab page
The 1DM tab page contains the following parameters:
Type
Use the drop-down menu to select the relevant operation type (On-demand
operation or Proactive operation). The same 1DM frame format can be used for
both.
Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate at which 1DM frames are
transmitted.
Frames to send
Allows you to specify the number of frames to transmit.
Optional TLV
Length
Only available if a Data TLV type has been selected. Allows you to specify the
length of the TLV.
Value
value of the TLV. Note that for the Data TLV type, this field is an entry field
where you open an editor and type the value.
251
ID
Only available if a Test TLV type has been selected. Allows you to specify the
value of the ID.
DMM tab page
The DMM tab page contains the following parameters:
Type
Use the drop-down menu to select the relevant operation type (On-demand
operation or Proactive operation).
Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate at which DMM frames are
transmitted.
Frames to send
Delay threshold
Allows you to specify a delay threshold that is used when a DMM test is active.
If the delay meets or exceeds that threshold, the user is alerted.
Optional TLV
Length
length of the TLV.
Value
value of the TLV. Note that for the Data TLV type, this field is an entry field
where you open an editor and type the value.
ID
Only available if a Test TLV type has been selected. Allows you to specify the
value of the ID.
LMM tab page
The LMM tab page contains the following parameters:
Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate at which LMM frames are
transmitted.
Frames to send
Loss threshold
252
Allows you to specify a loss threshold that is used when an LMM test is active.
If the loss ratio meets or exceeds that threshold, the user is alerted.
SLM tab page
The SLM tab page contains the following parameters:
Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select the rate at which SLM frames are
transmitted.
Frames to send
Loss threshold
Allows you to specify a loss threshold that is used when an SLM test is active. If
the loss ratio meets or exceeds that threshold, the user is alerted.
EXM tab page
The EXM tab page contains the following parameter:
Data
Allows you to specify a string which you can send in a message to other remote
maintenance points.
VSM tab page
The VSM tab page contains the following parameter:
Data
Allows you to specify a string which you can send in a message to other remote
maintenance points.
Discovery view (802.1ag/Y.1731 protocols)
Touching the Discovery button available for the 802.1ag or Y.1731 protocol
253
The contents of the Discovery view screen is the same for both protocols. The
screen contains the following parameters:
CCM/LBM
Select the radio button for the relevant method of discovery.
CCM - Passive method. Discover Remote Maintenance points by looking at
incoming CCM frames. This is the preferred method of discovery and the
default selection.
LBM - Active method. Discover other devices by sending out a multicast
loopback message and discover the devices' MAC addresses.
Discovery interval
Use the drop-down menu to specify the time period during which to wait and
discover messages.
Max discovered devices

Allows you to specify the maximum number of devices that will be discovered.
Discovering devices To discover devices, touch the Discover button on the left side of the screen.
This will display the Discovery dialog box.
Devices will appear in the dialog's list as they are discovered. Select the device
in the list and touch the Add button in the dialog box. The device is added to
the list displayed on the Discovery view screen.
Adding devices To add devices manually, touch the Add button on the left side of the
manually
Discovery view screen. This will launch the Add Rmp dialog box where you
can enter identification data for a specific remote device.
254
The Add Rmp dialog box contains the following parameters:
Domain
Allows you to specify the MD to which the MEP belongs. You can set the
domain when 802.1ag is selected.
MEG ID
Allows you to specify the MEG to which the MEP belongs.
Level
Use the drop-down menu to select the MD level at which the MEP exists.
MEP ID
Allows you to specify the Maintenance Point ID that the unit will be known as
in the MA. Note that this is the only required parameter.
MAC
Allows you to specify the MAC address of the remote unit.
Accept
Touch the Accept button when you have entered the desired data in the dialog
box. The identified unit is then added to the list displayed on the Discovery
view screen. Note that the Accept button is enabled only when you have
entered a value in the MEP ID field.
Removing devices To remove a device from the list displayed on the Discovery view screen, select
the device and then touch the Remove button on the left side of the screen.
6.1.2.8 Filter
Touching the Filter button in the navigation area will display the screen shown
below.
255
This screen allows you to set up filters and masks for the reception of Ethernet
frames. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port.
Enable filters
Select this check box to be able to set up new filters or make changes to the
existing ones.
Select Filter
Opens the dialog box to set target fields to be filtered.
Pattern Offset
The button will be enabled if Pattern is selected in Select Filter dialog box. Set
the number of bytes counted from top of destination MAC address byte.
Follows
to Port 2.
Columns are The filter and mask table shows the currently existing filters. There are 8 rows,
"AND'ed", rows are
"OR'ed".
each representing a filter which (when enabled) is applied to each received
frame. Each filter is composed as a set of values and/or masks (e.g. MAC
destination address, IP addresses etc.). If all values in at least one enabled
row/filter matches, the frame will pass.
If the mask for a specific value is enabled, only bits that are "1"/on are
compared to the frame. For instance, if MAC Destination value is '00-12-34-56-
78-9A' and the mask is set to '00-FF-00-FF-FF-FF', only frames with MAC
addresses 'XX-12-XX-56-78-9A' will pass.
To specify the set of values and/or masks available for each filter (i.e. the
columns of the table), touch the Select Filter button. This will launch the filter
editor dialog box, which contains a number of check boxes for enabling filters
and masks on different addresses.
256
To set up / edit a filter, touch the relevant table cell. This will launch the
filter/mask NumPad dialog box.
Allow the following At the bottom of the screen, it is possible to only allow certain encapsulation
encapsulation types
types.
Ether type: allows passing of Ethernet frames.
SNAP: allows passing frames which has SNAP header.
LLC: allows passing of frames which has LLC header.
If none are selected, all frames including other than Ethernet frame will pass
the filter.
Select Filter
The filter editor dialog box contains a number of check boxes for enabling
filters and masks on different addresses. Selectable check boxes depend on
frame structure. The selected filters appear in row of the table.
MPLS Filter, VLAN Filter setting
MPLS Filter and VLAN Filter can be selected up to eight levels because these
layers may have up to eight levels. The parameters in each filter can be set
independently.
For setting parameters, refer to MPLS or VLAN in "Stream" subsection.
Pattern filter setting
With the pattern value, it is possible to match a user-defined 32 bit value to a

specific offset defined by Pattern Offset. The pattern offset applies to all 8 filters
but will only affect the enabled ones.
1. Select check box of Pattern on the Select Filter dialog box.
2. Touch Pattern Offset button.
3. Specify the Pattern Offset. This is the number of bytes counted from top of
destination MAC address byte. If you specified "7", the four bytes of source
MAC address are set to the object of filtering.
4. Touch the cell of Pattern in the table on the setup area.
5. Specify the pattern of four bytes.
6. Select the check box at left-side of the table.
257
For MPLS/VLAN pattern setting, the dedicated dialog box will launch.
MPLS
Enter the number of MPLS label and TTL (Time To Live). You can select
Bottom of Label Stack or Experimental Bits.
VLAN
Enter the number of VLAN Priority and VLAN ID. You can select CFI Flag.
This section describes the status information available in the status area of the
Ethernet ports setup screen.
The status summary displayed for the Ethernet interface consists of the
following information:
The actual summary information displayed depends on the type of the Ethernet
interface.
information.
258
Interface Status The middle part of the status area gives you access to alarm and error
You can choose whether to view only the current alarm and error status, or to
view all alarms and errors in the alarm trap since it was last reset.

all alarms/errors.
Monitor Buttons At the bottom of the status area are the following buttons that give you access
to various monitor information. By touching a button, you can launch the
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
OAM
OH Capture
Frame Capture
Transceiver
the received signal at the Ethernet interface.
The physical status information consists of the following parameters:

Bit rate, which shows the current bit rate.
Bit rate difference, which shows the difference in bit rate between received
signal and reference source signal.
Accumulated difference, which shows the accumulated bit rate difference
between the received signal and the reference source signal.
Link, which shows the link status of Ethernet.
Link partner abilities, which shows the abilities of the opposite interface port.
(Only available for Electrical)
259
Timing Bit rate

The currently received bit rate is shown in bits per second (bps).
Bit rate difference

The current difference between the received signal and the reference source
signal is shown in both parts per million (ppm) and bits per second (bps).
Accumulated difference
The accumulated difference between the received signal and the reference
source signal is shown. The information is presented as number of bits of
difference detected over the accumulation period.
This is important information for identifying small frequency differences, which may not
be visible by showing the current bit rate difference.
The accumulated difference information is accumulated continuously. The

accumulation is reset when measurement is started or restarted.
Link
LOS
Indicates whether LOS (Loss of Signal) of the transceiver is occurred or not.
Link
Indicates whether Ethernet link is established or not.
Auto negotiation complete

Indicates whether Auto negotiation is completed or not.
Speed
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps is shown.
Duplex
FDX: Full Duplex, HDX: Half Duplex.
MDI/MDIX
MDI: Medium Dependent Interface, MDIX: Medium Dependent Interface
Crossover
Local clock
Master or Slave is shown.
Link partner abilities When Electrical interface type is selected, the Link partner abilities is shown.
Pause capable
Indicates in green when the device is capable of flow control using Pause
request.
Asym. pause request

Indicates in green when the device is capable of asymmetric flow control using
Pause request.
Remote fault
Indicates in green when the device is sending the remote fault signal.
Speed/Duplex
260
Available speed and duplex are indicated in green.
6.1.3.3 Interface
This screen presents key interface status indicators, with Lamp icons showing
the current status. These indicators give a quick overview of the condition of
the lines.
LAN Status Frame Present: Ethernet frames are detected.
MPLS frame: Label of MPLS (Multi-Protocol Label Switching) is detected.
MPLS-TP frame: Label of MPLS-TP (Multi-Protocol Label Switching Transport
Profile) is detected.
VLAN frame: Virtual LAN tag is detected.
Multi stream frame loss: Multi stream frame loss is detected.
BER alarms: BER Alarms are detected.
Bit errors: Bit errors are detected.
Multi stream frame loss appears in case of Mon./Gen. application.

View mode Status display other than LAN Status can be switched by touching a button.
You can select the status to display from following items:
WAN
WAN button appears when Port is set to 10 Gbps WAN.
PCS
PCS button appears when the SFP+ is set to Interface Type .
Sync Test
Sync Test button appears when Sync Test application is running.
The icon indicating the summary is displayed on each button.
WAN Alarms, WAN Errors

For the detail of items, refer to the following descriptions in
"SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn Applications".
261
SDH Alarms
SDH Errors
SONET Alarms
SONET Errors
PCS Alarms
LFS local fault: Local fault is detected.
LFS remote fault: Remote fault is detected.
High BER: High BER is detected. Appears when Port is set to 10 Gbps LAN.
PCS Errors
Invalid sync header: Invalid sync header (Sync bit is 00B or 11B.) is detected.
Invalid block: Invalid block is detected.
PCS Status
LOBL: Sync Header Lock is detected.
Sync Test Alarms

Ext. ref. clock: The valid external reference 10MHz Clock signal is detected.
Ext. ref. 1PPS: The valid external reference 1PPS signal is detected.
1PPS: The valid 1PPS signal to be measured is detected.
Sync Test Status

Clock route: Displays the clock source used for the IEEE 1588v2.
System route: Internal clock that is generated by system.
10MHz external reference clock: The 10 MHz clock input to Ext Clock
connector of MT1000A.
6.1.3.4 OH Capture
This function is enabled when interface is set to 10G WAN . Touching the OH
Capture button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen launches the dialog
box similar to the SDH/SONET OH Capture screen.
Refer to OH Capture in the "SDH Setup and Status" section.
6.1.3.5 SyncE
Touching the SyncE button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen displays
262
This screen presents information related to the status of synchronous Ethernet.

SSM/QL Synchronization Status Message and Quality Level status
Last received
Shows the latest QL value.
SSF
Server signal fail. The Lamp icon becomes red when no ESMC message has
been received within the last five seconds.
6.1.3.6 IEEE 1588v2
Touching the IEEE 1588v2 button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
This screen presents information about the status of the IEEE 1588 clock.
Local Clock
State
Shows the current clock state of the ports (MASTER/SLAVE). INIT. appears
when a unicast slave is stuck in INIT-state until the master clock grants access.
263
Offset
Shows the current offset from the master clock.
Mean path delay

Shows the mean path delay, which is the time from master to slave back to
master again, divided by two.
Sync timeout
Shows the current status of Sync Message reception. The Lamp icon becomes
red if no Sync Message has been received within five times the Sync interval.
Wall Clock
UTC
Shows the current UTC time. Requires an external GPS receiver.
Current
Shows the current wall clock time.
UTC offset
Shows the offset between the wall clock time and the UTC time.
This is available when the GPS is used as reference.
Parent Clock
Identity
Shows the identity of a slave's parent clock.
Port number
Shows the port number of a slave's parent clock.
Grandmaster Clock
Identity
Shows the identity of the grandmaster.
Class
Shows the class of the grandmaster.
Accuracy
Shows the accuracy of the grandmaster. The hexadecimal value of the accuracy
in the PTP packet data is displayed right-hand.
Variance ann/est.
Shows the offset variance of the grandmaster. Both the announced value and a
calculated estimate are shown (in s2).
Variance Raw
Shows the offset variance of the grandmaster in hexadecimal.
Priority 1/2
Shows priority 1 and 2 of the grandmaster.
Steps removed
Shows the number of communication paths traversed between the local clock
and the grand master clock.
Time source
264
Shows the time source. The hexadecimal value of the time source in the PTP
packet data is displayed right-hand.
Foreign Masters Provides a list of detected foreign masters. The identity of the current master is
shown in the field, the other masters are listed in a drop-down menu.
Port number
Shows the port number of the currently selected foreign master.
Announce count
Shows the number of Announce Messages received from the currently selected
foreign master.
6.1.3.7 OAM
Touching the OAM button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen displays
This screen presents information about the status of the OAM functions. The
information is split up on a number of tab pages. Note that the layout of the
dialog depends on the currently selected OAM protocol.
802.3ah status
information
265
Loop button
Touch the Loop button to send the far-end device into loopback mode and
reflect frames.
Devices tab page
Shows the status of the remote and local devices.
Variables tab page
On the Variables tab page you can request various variables. Select the relevant
variable from the drop-down menu and then touch the Request button.
802.1ag status
information
Message buttons
Allows you to send messages either to a remote MEP ID or to a unicast MAC
Address.
U-LBM: Data-path integrity to/from the far-end to/from one address (unicast).
M-LBM: Data-path integrity to/from the far-end to/from multiple addresses
(multicast).
LTM: Enumerate and identify all hops between two end points.
Fault button
The fault messages are sent when the button is active.
CCM: Continuity Check Messages.
Devices tab page
Shows the current status of the devices.
The outer circle of the colored Lamp in the Status column represents the CCM
status (green means that CCMs are received from that RMP, red means no
CCMs are received). The inner circle indicates whether the RDI bit in the CCM
frame is set (red) or not set (green).
Decode tab page
266
Shows extra information about LTM frames.
Y.1731 status
information
Message buttons
Allows you to send messages either to a remote MEP ID or to a unicast MAC
Address.
U-LBM: Data-path integrity to/from the far-end to/from one address (unicast).
M-LBM: Data-path integrity to/from the far-end to/from multiple addresses
(multicast).
LTM: Enumerate and identify all hops between two end points.
MCC: Maintenance communication channel message.
EXM: Experimental message and response.
VSM: Vendor-specific message and response.
TST: Test message used for Bit Error Rate measurement and /or throughput
measurement.
LMM: Determine packet loss.
SLM: Determine frame loss.
DM1: One-way delay measurements.
DMM: Propagation delay between two end points.
Fault buttons
The fault messages are sent when the button is active.
CCM: Continuity Check Messages.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal.
LCK : Locked Signal Function.
Devices tab page
Shows the current status of the devices.
The outer circle of the colored Lamp in the Status column represents the CCM
status (green means that CCMs are received from that RMP, red means no
CCMs are received). The inner circle indicates whether the RDI bit in the CCM
frame is set (red) or not set (green).
Decode tab page
267
Shows extra information about the various frame types.
6.1.3.8 Frame Capture
Touching the Frame Capture button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
launches the screen shown below.
This screen allows you to set up and execute capture of transmitted frames.
Capture Setup
Frame slicing
Use the Frame slicing drop-down menu to specify which part of the frame will
be captured. The available options are: Whole frame, Top 64 Byte, Top 128
Byte.
Buffer handling
Use the Buffer handling drop-down menu to choose either Stop when full or
Overwrite.
Buffer size
Use the Buffer size drop-down menu to specify the size of the buffer. The
specified size will be reflected in the Buffer Usage indicator at the bottom of the
screen.
Capture transmitted frames

Select the check box if capturing the transmitted frames.
Clear the check box to capture the incoming frames.
During the 10 Gbit/s rate state, transmitted streams the traffic generator sends can't be
captured.
Transmitted protocol frames can be captured. 'Protocol frames' are the frames which
used for information such as ARP, SyncE, IEEE1588v2, OAM.
This is the same for 10GbE over OTN (OTU2e - 10GbE mapping).
Trigger Setup
Trigger
Manual
This is the default setting, which captures all frames. All other trigger setup
parameters are disabled.
Error
268
Frame capture starts when the error specified by Error Type drop-down menu
has occurred.
Field match
Frame capture starts if the field in transmitted frame matches to one defined
by Frame Field Trigger Definition .
Trigger position
Select the position of a trigger frame in the captured data.
Top
The trigger frame will be located at top of the captured data.
Middle
The trigger frame will be located at center of the captured data.
Error Type
The possible values are: Any Type, Fragment, Oversized or undersized,
Oversized, Undersized, FCS error, Oversized & FCS error and IP checksum
error.
Frame Field Trigger Touching the left field opens the Field offset dialog box, which enables you to
Definition
specify a value between 0 and 15999 in the field.
Touching the center field opens the Pattern Editor dialog box, which enables
you to specify the relevant pattern in the field.
Capturing frames
Start/stop capture
Touch the Start button to start the capturing. The button changes to the Stop
button. Capture progress is shown in Buffer Usage.
To stop the frame capture, touch the Stop button.
Save capture data

When the capture is complete, you can save the captured data as a PCAP file,
which can be used by a variety of open-source decoding tools. You can also
save the data and then view them on the Network Master.
Touching the Save button allows you to create a PCAP file and view the data on
the Network Master. Touching the View button allows you to view the data on
the Network master.
When saving capture files using the MX100001A Remote Control Software, the
destination folder is automatically set to the "Internal" folder of the Network Master.
6.1.3.9 Transceiver
269
This screen presents status information about the optical transceiver (Pluggable
module installed on the connector panel).
Information
Tune wavelength
This section describes the errors or alarms insertion for the Ethernet layer on
the Application toolbar.
270
Others
Ethernet LAN: Inserts errors or alarms related the Ethernet frame, IP packet
or the pattern error.
Ethernet PCS alarms/errors: Inserts errors or alarms to PCS blocks.
Ethernet WAN: Inserts errors or alarms to the WAN header.
Ethernet frequency: Adds the frequency offset to the Ethernet bit rate.
6.1.4.1 Ethernet LAN
1. Select Alarms or Errors/Violations using the radio button.

2. Select Destination using the drop down menu.
3. Select the Insertion in case of Errors/Violations.
Alarms will be inserted continuously.
Off: Turns off inserting errors.
Insert icon.
Burst / sec: Inserts errors in the specified counts in one second
periodic.
Burst / 10 sec: Inserts errors in the specified counts in ten second
periodic.
Burst*1E-02 to Burst*1E-07: Inserts errors of burst length in the
specified rate continuously.
For example, Error burst length is set to 3 and Burst*1E-06 is selected,
the three errors will be inserted per one million blocks. The Error
Insert icon shows only status.
4. Touch the Burst length field to set the errors insertion counts.
5. When Insertion is set to Manual , Touch the Error Insert icon.
271
Destination Description
FCS Sends an Ethernet frame which has FCS error.
Sends a preamble in which pattern is different from the normal
Preamble
pattern.
PAUSE frames. Sends PAUSE frames.
Wrong IP
Sends data which IPv4 Header checksum is wrong.
checksum
Fragmented IP Sends IPv4 data which is fragmented.
Wrong Layer4 Sends data which checksum in TCP header or UDP header is
checksum wrong.
BERT pattern
Inserts an error into the payload pattern.
error
Inserts an error into the sequence number which is used to check
BERT Seq. error
the pattern sequence in BERT.
When the interface bit rate is 10 Gbps, sends data that 64/66B
Error block format in PCS is set to incorrect pattern.
symbol/block When 1 Gbps or less, inserts TX_ER of MII Media Independent
Interface).
6.1.4.2 Ethernet PCS alarms/errors
When Port is set to SFP+ 10 Gbps LAN , the PCS alarms/errors is available in
following applications.
BERT
Mon.Gen.
Ch Stat
1. Select Alarms or Errors using the radio button.

2. Select the Destination inserting the alarm or the error.
272

Insert icon.
Burst: Inserts errors or alarms in counts you have specified.
Rate: Inserts errors in the specified rate continuously.
frames.
All : Inserts errors to all Ethernet frames.
6.1.4.3 Ethernet WAN
When Port is set to SFP+ 10 Gbps WAN , inserting the WAN alarms/errors is
available.
1. Select Alarms or Errors/Violations using the radio button.
2. Select Destination using the drop down menu.
3. Select the Insertion in case of Errors/Violations.
Insert icon.
4. Touch the WAN burst length field to set the errors insertion counts.
5. When Insertion is set to Manual , Touch the Error Insert icon.
6.1.4.4 Ethernet frequency
Touch the field to set Ethernet frequency. Enter the desired deviation in the Tx
Deviation field. A positive value increases the frequency.
273
6.2 BERT
The Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) described in this section is applicable for Ethernet
interfaces.
The setup options and status information related to the Ethernet interface are
described in a separate section:
For applications also including an OTN interface, you can find a description of
the setup options and status information for OTN in the following section:
6.2.2 Test Setup
6.2.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the Ethernet BERT application, the following
screen is displayed.
This screen contains the parameters that are generally required in a test setup.
Interval length
Allows you to specify the duration of the BERT intervals. The drop-down menu
contains the following values: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 seconds, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30
minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours or No intervals.
Start action
274
BERT

the right.
Stop function
button.
right.
right.
Memory allocation

before the whole memory will be filled out by the test. The estimated value is
dependent on the current interface and selections concerning this interface.
During an ongoing measurement, the estimate will be recalculated periodically,
meaning that the estimate will get better and better. The estimate can be seen
on the status line during a measurement.
Performance The titles of ITU-T Recommendation are below.
Parameters
G.826 End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for
international, constant bit-rate digital paths and connections
G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
M.2100 Performance limits for bringing-into-service and maintenance of
international multi-operator PDH paths and connections
M.2101.1 Performance limits for bringing-into-service and maintenance of
international multi-operator SDH paths and multiplex sections
275
OTN-related
These items appear if OTN Tx and OTN Rx are selected on Setup screen.
OTN
G.8201, M.2401 (M.2110)
Time period
Allocation
Ethernet-related
10G WAN appears if Port on the Test Setup screen is set to '10 Gbps WAN'.
ETH
M.2100
10G WAN
G.826, G.826+G.829, M.2101.1(M.2100)
BERT Options
This option appears in the BERT application.
Count lost frames as pattern errors

Enabling this function means that if a frame is lost then all test pattern bits in
the frame are considered errored and will be included in the pattern error
counter.
Include addresses in frame filter on receiver

When enabling this function, the Ethernet frames which their destination
addresses match to following items will appear on the Streams screen.
Src MAC
Src IP
VLAN ID
Src Port
This setting makes the effect to only following measurement results on the
Statistics screen.
BERT Mon./Gen
BERT Multi Stream Transmit
Latency Multi Stream Throughput
Jitter Multi Stream Frame Loss
Multi Stream Latency
Multi Stream Jitter
This setting does not effect to Frame Capture.
276
BERT
Only show BER Alarms when measuring

BER alarms in Interface status dialog box is enabled only when the
measurement is running. This function allows to avoid the BER alarms
occurrence when no data is input.
Ignore the Frame loss secs on BERT statistics

The"Frame loss secs." on BERT statistics will not be used for judging the Status
Summary. This function allows to avoid the Status Summary alarms occurrence
when no frames are input.
6.2.2.2 Generator
Touching the Generator button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
The Follow button appears when the Port 2 settings can follow Port 1.
This screen contains the traffic-related parameters.

Traffic Duration Allows you to set conditions concerning frames transmission. Choosing
Continuous will make a continual test sequence. Alternatively, the duration can
be set manually in either Seconds or Frames, coupled with a specification of
the number of seconds/frames in the adjacent field.
Automatically start the traffic generator when a test is started

In case of Continuous, you can select this check box to make the traffic
generator start synchronously with the test starting.
6.2.2.3 Stream - Profile
Touching the Stream - Profile button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
277
This screen contains the parameters for specifying a profile and pattern for
each stream and for specifying which measurements are made.
Transmission mode Normal : Does not generate the bursts. The normal Ethernet frames are sent.
Burst: Generate the bursts.
Stream profile Allows you to specify and configure a profile type for the currently selected
stream. Using the radio buttons, you can select the stream profile as either
Data, Video or Voice.
Encoding
Open the drop-down menu to select the relevant encoding type. The available
values depend on the selected profile type.
Number of channels
Specify the number of stream channels selected at Encoding.
Line load When Profile type is set to Data, you can select the line load profile as either
Constant or Ramp. If you select Ramp, you can touch the adjacent button to
display the Ramp Line Load Setup dialog box.
When Profile type is set to Video or Voice, the line load calculated from
Encoding and Number of channels is displayed.
278
BERT
The line load unit can be specified from Percent, Mbps, and IFG.
When IFG (Inter frame gap) is specified to the unit, 12 byte setting means the
100% utilization. The value set to the field is an average of Inter frame gap.
When Transmission mode is Normal, 100% or more line load can be set in
specific case.
Touching Off at left-bottom stops sending the stream.
The dialog box contains the following settings:
Line load start

The line load at which the ramp will start.
Line load end
The line load at which the ramp will end. (This is the value shown on the line
load button.)
Step size
The step size from start to end.
Step duration
The duration of each step.
Selecting msec-Ramp check box allows to set the step duration in 1
millisecond increments.
Ramp mode
How the ramp should continue. 3 modes are available:
Keep end: The specified end line load is maintained after the ramp is
ended.
Repeat ramp: The ramp is repeated.
Invert ramp: The ramp is inverted.
279
Frame size When Profile is set to Data, four setups are available:
Constant
Uses the fixed frame size specified by the Start value for the duration of the
test. The following figure shows an example of frame sizes when Constant is
selected.
Stepped
Steps the frame size from Start to End in increments of Step. Each frame size
is transmitted for the period in seconds specified by Duration . The following
figure shows an example of frame sizes when Stepped is selected.
If the traffic duration is set to Continuous on the Generator screen, the step
sequence will be repeated indefinitely. If traffic duration is set to a number of
seconds, the step sequence will be terminated when the specified total period
has elapsed. Similarly for traffic duration set to a number of frames, the step
sequence will be terminated when the total number of transmitted frames
reaches the specified count.
Random
Sends a continuous stream of frames of random sizes, evenly distributed
between Start and End. The following figure shows an example of frame sizes
when Random is selected.
280
BERT
1-Byte incremental
Steps the frame size from Start to End in increment of one byte in frame-by-
frame. The following figure shows an example of frame sizes when 1-Byte
incremental is selected.
Frame size is protocol headers and payload combined. Frame size does not include
preamble and interframe gap.
When setting Frame size to 52 byte or less and Interface type is SFP+ , the actual rate
(Utilization) does not reach to 100% even if line load is set to 100%.
Burst mode Set the burst generation mode. The normal Ethernet frames are not sent in the
burst mode.
Off: stops sending the stream.

Const: generates the bursts that the burst length and the gap length are
constant.
281
Ramp: generates the bursts while changing the burst length.
Number of Bursts
Selecting Num of Burst allows to set the number of the bursts to generate. If
sending specified number bursts has finished, sending stream will stop.
Burst length Set the burst burst length and the gap length.
When Burst mode is set to Const:
Touch the field of Burst length and Gap length to set the value.
Burst length can also be set by specifying Duty and Period.
The value set to the Gap length field is an average of inter burst gaps.
When Burst mode is set to Ramp:
Touch the Ramp mode field to set how to vary the burst length.
If Keep end is set, the burst length varies as below.
or
If Repeat ramp is set, the data length varies as below.
or
Touch the field of Burst start and Burst end to set the range that the burst
length varies.
Touch the Gap length field to set the value. The value set to the Gap length
field is an average of inter burst gaps.
Frame size Set the frame size used for the burst length calculation. 20 bytes (preamble and
IFG) adding to the value set in this field is used as the one frame size of the
burst length setting.
6.2.2.4 Stream - Measurement
Touching the Stream - Measurement button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
282
BERT
Select one or more of the measurements (Jitter, Latency and Service

disruption) and then specify a threshold value for each.
When Service disruption is selected, select Disruption Type from "Packet" or

"LOS".
Enable sequence checking

Appears when "Unframed" is selected to the protocol in Stream of Port Setup
screen.
Select the check box if enabling the frame sequence checking.
6.2.2.5 Thresholds
screen.
283

using the Count, Ratio and Ratio (%) radio buttons, and then specify the value
Sequence errors Allows you to enable monitoring of sequence errors and to set up the relevant
threshold value.
Service disruption If you specify a threshold value for the service disruptions (using the Threshold
field), any disruption whose maximum duration time exceeds the threshold
value will be marked in red on the Test Result screen.
Total Frame Allows you to select the reference port to measure the differential time, using
Difference
Difference from: drop down menu.
Transport This setting appears in case of following applications on OTN.
BERT
Mon./Gen.
Reflector
When you select the check box, you can enable alarm or error thresholds.
Interface
Fixed to OTN.
Evaluation item
menu appears.
Evaluation type

Ethernet When you select the check box, you can enable various thresholds. Touch the
Setup button to display the Ethernet threshold setup dialog box.
284
BERT
In the dialog box, select the check boxes for the relevant thresholds and then
touch the Close button to list them on the Thresholds screen. You can
select/deselect all check boxes in the dialog box by using the Select all / Clear
all buttons. Touch the individual value fields either in the dialog box or in the
list on the screen to specify the threshold values.
Example
Measured Result
Setting
Pass Fail
< 100 100 or greater less than 100
<= 100 greater than 100 100 or less
>= 100 less than 100 100 or greater
> 100 100 or less greater than 100
The Network Master transmits the 32-bit "jam sequence" eight times when the Ethernet
frames collide at any point in the frame. This collision motion is different from the
definition of the IEEE Standard.
In the "back off" process of the Network Master, the maximum wait time is expanded up
to the 12 power of 2. Moreover, the Network Master does not discard the frame when
the collision has occurred 16 times.
6.2.3 Test Results
6.2.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet BERT application, the following
285
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Ethernet BERT test. The
information includes such things as number of pattern errors, average and
maximum disruption time, and number of exceeded thresholds.
The three dials showing utilization/throughput results, pattern errors and

errored frames can be enlarged by clicking on them. The black needle points
the measured value in the latest period.
To view throughput information, select Throughput in the drop-down menu

and then expand the dial. Use the drop-down menu above the expanded dial to
select the relevant layer.
When Ethernet is selected on 'Threshold' of the Test Setup screen, the Ethernet
information appears in the upper right-hand corner, shows pass/fail status
summary. Touching the Details button allows you to inspect the individual
pass/fail status.
286
BERT
Pattern Allows to change the payload pattern. Cross pattern check box is the same as
Cross pattern at successive frames of Payload pattern setting.
Pattern Error insertion This provides the same Error insertion as Stimuli setup options in Application
Toolbar.
Insertion
If selecting Manual, error(s) are inserted when you touch the Alarm/Error
Insert icon ( ) button.
Set Off to stop the error insertion.
Burst length
If 'Insertion' is set to Manual, touch the button and set the number of errors to
insert.
6.2.3.2 IEEE1588v2 Log
Touching the IEEE1588v2 Log button in the navigation area will display the
screen shown below.
287
This screen presents an IEEE1588v2 Log of the test results. You can search the
messages by specifying the type.
Search
Message type Select the message type from below.
Announce
DelayReq
DelayResp
FollowUp
Management
PDelayReq
PDelayResp
PDelayRespFollowUp
Signaling
Sync
Select the search method.

Filter
Previous
Next
6.2.3.3 OAM Log
Touching the OAM Log button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
288
BERT
This screen presents an OAM Log of the test results. Note that the layout of the
dialog box depends on the currently selected OAM protocol.
6.2.3.4 Event Log
BERT application.
6.2.3.5 Statistics
below.
289
time

time. The start time of the current interval is displayed on the button.
functions:
Time format
field.
the measurement.
results
OTN - Alarms/Errors
OTN - Performance
BERT
Performance
Frame
Burst
Size Distribution
Transmit
Latency
Jitter
WAN Alarms/Errors
WAN G.826
WAN G.826+G.829
WAN M.2101.1(M.2100)
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
PCS
802.3ah
802.1ag/Y.1731
OTN options appear if the Ethernet signal is carried by OTN.
290
BERT
result
Statistics tab page is also available. Use the Back button or touch the zoom
filed to return to the statistics screen.

Results
The result items varies depending on the configuration in Ports Setup screen.

BERT Results BERT
Service disruption
M.2100
Throughpu
Performance Results Utilization
Throughpu
Frame rate
Frame Results Alarms
Good Frames
Errored Frames
Layer3 Error
Other Frames
Last Received
Frame diff.
Burst Results Frames
Burst Size
Size Distribution Results Total Frames
291
Size Dist.
Frame Size
Transmit Results Traffic
Latency Results Latency(ns)
Jitter Results Jitter(ns)
WAN Alarms/Errors Alarms
Errors
WAN G.826 Results MUX
SPE
WAN G.826+G.829 MUX
Results SPE
WAN M.2101.1(M.2100) MUX
Results SPE
SyncE Results SSM Statistics
Alarms
Rx SSM QL
IEEE 1588v2 Results Offset Stat
Offset Variance
Mean Path Delay
PDV
Message Stat
Clock Status Stat.
GPS - Wall clock
PCS Results PCS 10G
802.3ah Results
802.1ag/Y.1731 Results
For the parameters of the following WAN performance measurements, refer to

"SDH/SONET Performance Measurement Items" in SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn
Applications.
Note that the same results are displayed because Pass/Fail judgement is not
performed.
SPE stands for Synchronous Payload Envelope.
WAN G.826
WAN G.826+G.829
WAN M.2101.1(M.2100)
M.2100 Performance Measurement Items

This paragraph describes the performance result items. Measurement time
definitions are as below.
STotal
Total measurement time. This is the total time of the measurement excluding
the time of power failure.
SAvail
Available time of measurement. Calculated from the following formula:

SUnavail
292
BERT
Unavailable time of measurement. Refer to UAT definition.
M.2100 Performance Parameters

Items Definition
Errored Second
ES Within SAvail, the number of seconds during which one or more pattern
errors occurred.
Severely Errored Second
detected.
SES
10-3 or more pattern errors
LOF
LOS
Alarm Second
detected.
ALS Link is not established.
Remote Fault
LOF
Errored Frame Count
Unavailable Time
When SES or ALS continues for ten seconds, UAT starts from the
beginning of the time. When items other than SES continues for ten
seconds, UAT ends at one second before the time. Refer to the figure of
Example of Unavailable Time Detection.
UAT
First, the time (when determining the start of UAT) is not counted as
UAT, and then if determined, the UAT is recounted.
First, the time (when determining the end of UAT) is counted as UAT,
and then if determined, the UAT is recounted. In a word, the values of
UAT may be reduced later. The same is applied to other items.
Available Time
AVT The available time of the measurement
Error Free Second

EFS
Within SAvail, the number of seconds during which no errors occurred.
About Sequence Error and Sequence Sync Loss
293
Sequence Error and Sequence Sync Loss are measured as following:
Ethernet frames sent by Network Master include special bytes that indicates
sequence number. When receiving this Ethernet frames, Network master sets
the sequence number of next incoming Ethernet frame.
Network Master checks sequence numbers in every four straight incoming
frames. When the sequence number does not match the expected value, a
Sequence Error or a Sequence Sync Loss will occur.
Sequence Error: When one frame arrived after next sequence number frame.
Sequence Sync Loss: Other case of Sequence Error. For example, when one or
more sequence number were lost.
294
Cable
6.3 Cable
The Ethernet Cable Test uses Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) to validate and
detect open and short circuited CAT5/CAT5E cables. This test is convenient for
installation and troubleshooting of cables.
Time Domain Reflectometry Principle
The TDR method can be used for control of electrical cables. The TDR
transmits a short pulse which will be fully absorbed if the cable is perfectly
terminated. In case of open or short circuited cables, the pulse will be reflected.
An open circuited cable will result in an increase of impedance.
A short circuited cable will result in a decrease of impedance.
These conditions will give a pulse reflection in an either positive or negative

mirrored pulse. If the time is measured and the speed of the signal in the cable
is known, a distance to the problem can be estimated.
The magnitude of the reflection (called the reflective coefficient P) can be

found from a formula involving the impedance to the load (Zt) and the
resistance in the media (Z0):
P = (Zt - Z0) over (Zt + Z0).
P = 0 indicates no reflection. +1 indicates an open circuit, and -1 indicates a

short circuit.
Wiring of Ethernet Cables
A CAT5/CAT5E cable consists of 4 twisted pairs which typically are terminated

in a RJ45 connector.
CAT5
Defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A. The color code referring to this standard is
called T568A.
CAT5E
Defined in TIA/EIA-568-B. The color code referring to this standard is called
T568B.
295
6.3.1 Test Setup
When you go to the test setup of the Ethernet Cable Test, the following screen
is displayed.
This screen allows you to control and monitor an Ethernet Cable Test.
Test setup controls
Color Coding Standard
Allows you to select the color coding used for the graphical representation of
the cables. In the drop-down menu, you can choose between T-568A (CAT5)
and T-568B (CAT5E).
Test monitoring
Pair
information
Lists the individual cable pairs in relation to the pin number and color coding.
Status
Shows the status of the wires inside the cable. The Lamp indicator will be green
if there is no problem and red if there is a problem.
OK indicates a fully functional cable.

Short indicates a short circuited cable.
Open indicates an open circuited cable.
Distance to fault
In case of cable troubles (i.e. an open or a short circuit) the distance to the
problem will be indicated approximately in this field.
Detectable distance to the fault is up to 100 m.
296
Channel Statistics
6.4 Channel Statistics

The Channel Statistics test separates incoming frames into channels based on a
number of defining characteristics (Definitions) and shows information about each
channel (Statistics). The test is mostly used for in-service monitoring, where it
provides data for detailed analysis of the traffic types present in the network.
6.4.2 Test Setup
6.4.2.1 Control
Refer to "Control in "BERT" section for the operation.
6.4.2.2 Generator
Refer to "Generator in "BERT" section for the operation.
6.4.2.3 Stream - profile
Refer to "Streams - profile in "Mon/Gen" section for the operation.
6.4.2.4 Stream - Meas.
Refer to "Streams - Meas. in "Mon/Gen" section for the operation.
6.4.2.5 Definitions
Touching the Definitions button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
297
This screen is where you specify which frame characteristics are considered
when performing the channel separation (i.e. which frame characteristics are
active during the test). The maximum number of channels is 231.
6.4.3 Test Results
6.4.3.1 Summary
shown below.
This screen presents the results of the Channel Statistics test. The screen
contains two lists, one which lists the created channels and another which
shows the results for each channel. Each channel is shown as a row in the two
lists.
The lists can be shown either above each other (with the channels list on top)
or beside each other (with the channels list to the left). Use the button in the
top row of fields and buttons to switch between the two layouts.
Merging channels To get a better overview of a certain aspect of the received traffic, you can
combine channels using the Merge functionality.
298
Channel Statistics
Open the Merge drop-down menu to combine all channels where one specific
definition value (e.g. the source MAC address) is identical. The drop-down
menu contains all currently active definitions.
When the test results are shown in merged mode, definitions that are not
uniquely defined will be hidden, so that only the merge criterion, channel
number, and protocol information will be visible. The protocol information
field, which shows which protocols are detected in a channel, will in merged
mode show all protocols present in the frames contained in the merged
channel.
Unlike the setup of active definitions, the merge setting works on already
collected channels - that is, it does not affect how the system separates
channels, and it will work on both running, stopped and loaded tests.
Modifying columns To select which columns are shown in the two lists, touch the Modify columns
button. This will launch the Modify shown columns dialog box.
Definitions
The selected check boxes correspond to the columns currently shown in the
channels list on the Summary screen.
Statistics
The selected check boxes correspond to the columns currently shown in the
results list on the Summary screen. Note that the check boxes are placed under
categories.
Frame statistics
IP size distribution
MPLS statistics
IP statistics
IPv4 statistics
IPv6 statistics
299
TCP statistics
UDP statistics
Select/Clear all
To select all check boxes in the dialog box, touch the Select All button.
To clear all check boxes in the dialog box, touch the Clear All button.
6.4.3.2 IEEE1588v2 Log
If Ext. log is selected in IEEE1588v2 screen of Ethernet Frame Setup, the

IEEE1588v2 Log button appears in the navigation area. Refer to IEEE1588v2
Log in "BERT" for the operation.
6.4.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
6.4.3.4 Statistics
providing the statistics data. Refer to Statistics of Mon/Gen for the operation.
The frame count result in the Statistics screen may not match to the result in the
Summary screen, because the measurement start time and the stop time are different
between Summary screen and Statistics screen.
300
Mon/Gen
6.5 Mon/Gen
Ethernet Monitor/Generate is typically used for out-of-service and performance
testing. It is possible to perform a passive, non-intrusive monitoring or at the same
time transmit test data, which can be reflected for further evaluation and testing of
the network.
6.5.2 Test Setup
Copy frame content to other stream(s)
This feature allows you to copy the frame content of the stream that you are
currently configuring to all streams in another port or to a single stream.
relevant port and All or a specific stream.
6.5.2.1 Control
Refer to "Control in BERT Test Setup subsection for the operation.
6.5.2.2 Generator
Refer to "Generator in BERT Test Setup subsection for the operation.
6.5.2.3 Streams - Profile
Touching the Streams - Profile button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
301
Stream selection Use the slide-out panel on the left-hand side of the screen to select the relevant
stream. Enable the stream by touching the button on the slide-out panel.
Transmission mode Normal : Does not generate the bursts. The normal Ethernet frames are sent.
Burst: Generate the bursts.
Stream X profile Allows you to specify and configure a profile type for the currently selected
stream. Using the radio buttons, you can select the stream profile as either
Data, Video or Voice.
Encoding
Number of channels
Specify the number of channels.
Line load When Profile type is set to Data, you can select the line load profile as either
Constant or Ramp. If you select Ramp, you can touch the adjacent button to
display the Ramp Line Load Setup dialog box.
When Profile type is set to Video or Voice, the line load calculated from
Encoding and Number of channels is displayed.
The sum of the line load of each stream is displayed under the button.
302
Mon/Gen
The line load unit can be specified from Percent, and Mbps. Touching Off at
left-bottom stops sending the stream.
The dialog box contains the following settings:
Line load start

The line load at which the ramp will start.
Line load end
The line load at which the ramp will end. (This is the value shown on the line
load button.)
Step size
The step size from start to end.
Step duration
The duration of each step.
Ramp mode
How the ramp should continue. 3 modes are available:
Keep end: The specified end line load is maintained after the ramp is
ended.
Repeat ramp: The ramp is repeated.
Invert ramp: The ramp is inverted.
Frame size When Profile is set to Data, three setups are available:
Constant
Uses the fixed frame size specified by the Start value for the duration of the
test. The following figure shows an example of frame sizes when Constant is
selected.
303
Stepped
Steps the frame size from Start to End in increments of Step. Each frame size
is transmitted for the period in seconds specified by Duration . The following
figure shows an example of frame sizes when Stepped is selected.
If the traffic duration is set to Continuous on the Generator screen, the step
sequence will be repeated indefinitely. If traffic duration is set to a number of
seconds, the step sequence will be terminated when the specified total period
has elapsed. Similarly for traffic duration set to a number of frames, the step
sequence will be terminated when the total number of transmitted frames
reaches the specified count.
Random
Sends a continuous stream of frames of random sizes, evenly distributed
between Start and End. The following figure shows an example of frame sizes
when Random is selected.
Burst mode Set the burst generation mode. The normal Ethernet frames are not sent in the
burst mode.
Off: stops sending the stream.
304
Mon/Gen
Const: generates the bursts that the data length and the gap length are
constant.
When Const is selected, "Burst" is displayed on multi stream slide.
Number of Bursts
Selecting n-Burst allows to set the number of the bursts to generate. If sending
specified number bursts has finished, sending stream will stop.
Duty Set the burst data length and the gap length.
Touch the field of Duty and Period to set the value.

Frame size Set the frame size used for the burst data length calculation. 20 bytes
(preamble and IFG) adding to the value set in this field is used as the one
frame size of the burst data length.
6.5.2.4 Streams - Meas.
Touching the Streams - Meas. button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
Select one or more of the measurements (Frame loss, Jitter and Latency) and
then specify a threshold value for each.
6.5.2.5 Thresholds
For Total Frame Difference and Ethernet, refer to "Thresholds in BERT Test
Setup subsection for the operation.
305
6.5.3 Test Results
6.5.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet Monitor/Generate application,

the following screen is displayed.
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Ethernet

Monitor/Generate test. The information includes such things as number of
errored frames and number of exceeded thresholds.

errored frames can be enlarged by touching on them. The black needle points
To view throughput information, select Throughput in the drop-down menu

and then expand the dial. Use the drop-down menu above the expanded dial to
select the relevant layer.
306
Mon/Gen
pass/fail status.
Transport
Displays the results of Transport test. This result appears if 'Transport' check
The stream slide-up at the bottom of the screen allows you to configure and
inspect the measurements of each individual stream. Display/Hide the slide-up
by touching the handle icon. You can set up thresholds for frameloss, latency
and jitter for each stream as well as inspect the measurement results.
6.5.3.2 IEEE1588v2 Log

307
6.5.3.3 OAM Log
The operation of OAM Log screen is the same as that of BERT application.
Refer to OAM Log in BERT for the operation.
6.5.3.4 Event Log
BERT application.
6.5.3.5 Statistics
below.

time
The Current button is displayed at left bottom when the measurement is

running. Touching the Current button shows the measured values in the current
interval time. The start time of the current interval is displayed on the button.
functions:
Time format
308
Mon/Gen
field.
the measurement.
results
Performance
Frame
Burst
Size Distribution
Transmit
Multi Stream Transmit
Multi Stream Throughput
Multi Stream Frame Loss
Multi Stream Jitter
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
802.3ah
802.1ag/Y.1731
result

Results
Results are displayed according to your choice.
Performance
Utilization
Throughput
Frame rate
309
Frame
Alarms
Good Frames
Errored Frames
Layer3 Error
Other Frames
Last Received
Frame diff.
Bursts
Frames
Burst Size
Size Distribution
Total Frames
Size Dist.
Frame Size
Transmit
Traffic
Traffic
Throughput
Frame Loss
Latency(us)
Multi Stream Jitter
Jitter(us)
SyncE
SSM Statistics
Alarms
Rx SSM QL
IEEE 1588v2
Offset Stat.
Offset Variance
Mean Path Delay
PDV
Message Stat
Clock Status Stat.
802.3ah
802.1ag/Y.1731
310
Pass Through
6.6 Pass Through

Ethernet Pass Through enables non-intrusive in-service monitoring for both fast
troubleshooting and detailed analysis of the live traffic on a network. All traffic
received on a port is forwarded on the other port and vice versa. Traffic between the
two network DUT elements is monitored as illustrated below.
311
6.6.2 Test Setup
6.6.2.1 Control
6.6.2.2 Thresholds
screen.
Setup button to display the Ethernet threshold setup dialog box.
312
Pass Through
6.6.3 Test Results
6.6.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet Pass Through application, the
following screen is displayed.
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Ethernet Pass Through
test. The information includes such things as number of errored frames and
number of exceeded thresholds.

When Ethernet is selected on 'Threshold' of Test Setup screen, the Ethernet

pass/fail status. Refer to Summary in BERT section.
6.6.3.2 Event Log
BERT application.
6.6.3.3 Statistics
313
6.7 Ping
The Ethernet Ping test is a quick and easy way for testing, troubleshooting and
verification of connectivity and latency. Packets are sent from the source address to
the destination address and back again - allowing the user to determine whether
traffic is possible.
6.7.2 Test Setup
When you go to the test setup of the Ethernet Ping application, the following
This screen allows you to configure the Ping test conditions for the currently
selected port.
Test Duration Allows you to define the test duration in one of three ways:
Continuous - Used when a persistent Ping test is needed.
Seconds - Used to define the test duration in seconds.
Ping requests - Used to define the test duration in number of ping requests.
Threshold Allows you to specify the Timeout threshold value in milliseconds (ms).
Traffic
Request interval
Allows you to specify the interval between frames in seconds.
Frame size
Allows you to specify the frame size in bytes.
314
Ping
Frame size is protocol header and payload combined. Frame size does not include
6.7.3 Test Results
The results of an Ethernet Ping test relate to a specific port and consist of the
Round Trip Times of the ping requests. The data is shown in both list-form and
in a graphical presentation.
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a bar diagram of the Round Trip Times
presentation
and of a pie chart showing the percentage distribution of echo replies and
timeouts.
6.7.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet Ping test, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen presents a summary of the results of an Ethernet Ping test. The
results relate to a specific port and consist of information about
sent/received/lost packages and the minimum/maximum/average Round Trip
Time.
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a pie chart showing the percentage
presentation
distribution of received/lost packages.
6.7.3.2 IEEE1588v2 Log

6.7.3.3 Detailed
Touching the Detailed button in the navigation area will display the following
screen.
315
This screen presents the detailed results of an Ethernet Ping test. The results
relate to a specific port and consist of the Round Trip Times of the individual
Ping requests. The data is shown in both list-form and in a graphical
representation.
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a bar diagram of the round trip times.
presentation
6.7.3.4 Event Log
BERT application.
6.7.3.5 Statistics
316
Reflector
6.8 Reflector
In Ethernet Reflector mode the Network Master loops incoming traffic on a port
swapping MAC and/or IP addresses.
HDX (Half Duplex) is not possible in 'Reflector' mode.

Multicast or Broadcast frame are not reflected in 'Reflector' mode.
In Ethernet Setup for Reflector mode, two buttons appear in Navigation area.
Swap
Settings
Only "Incoming Frames" tab and "Receiver Setup" tab appear.
Incoming Frames tab is different from that in other applications.
In Src MAC and Src IP, set the source MAC address and the source IP address
of ARP request and Ping request.
317
6.8.2 Test Setup
6.8.2.1 Control
6.8.2.2 Thresholds
screen.
This screen allows you to set up a number of special monitoring items related
to the various interface types. When specified and enabled, these threshold
values (i.e. limits) for errors and Pass/Fail status will be used during the
monitoring.
Total Frame Allows you to select the reference port to measure the differential time, using
Difference
Difference from: drop down menu.
Setup button to display the same Ethernet threshold setup dialog box as BERT.
318
Reflector
6.8.3 Test Results
6.8.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet Reflector application, the
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Ethernet Reflector test.
The information includes such things as number of errored frames and number
of exceeded thresholds.

pass/fail status. Refer to Summary in BERT section.
6.8.3.2 Event Log
BERT application.
6.8.3.3 Statistics
319
6.9 RFC 2544

The RFC 2544 is a benchmarking methodology and defines a number of tests to be
used for describing the performance characteristics of a network device (or a
complete network). The Network Master includes several physical setups (test modes)
and four different tests.
Throughput Test
The throughput is the fastest rate at which a DUT (Device Under Test) can
forward frames without frame loss for a specific frame size. That is, the fastest
rate at which the count of test frames transmitted by the DUT is equal to the
number of test frames sent to it by the test equipment.
Frame Loss Test
Used to determine the frame loss rate of a DUT throughout the entire range of
input data rates and frame sizes.
Latency Test
Used to determine the duration from when the frame left the unit to when the
frame returned to the unit. The test is done for different line loads for a
specific frame size.
Burst Test
This is also called burstability or back-to-back test. The burst value is the
number of frames in the longest burst that the DUT will handle without the
loss of any frames.
If your test parameters are identical for the throughput and the frame loss test, use the
combined test 'Throughput and Frame loss' to save time and enhance overview at the
results pages.
320
RFC 2544
6.9.2 Test Setup
Restriction of Number of Steps

RFC 2544 measures the throughput, frame loss, latency, and burst while
changing the load applied to the DUT by changing the transmission rate and
size of the Ethernet frame. In addition to the final results, Network Master
retains the measurement results at each load as an intermediate results, but
500 steps are retained at maximum. Depending on the setting of the steps, it is
possible to retain more than 500 steps, but in that case the oldest measurement
result(s) will be discarded.
Also, depending on the setting, only the results of one category (throughput,
frame loss, latency, or burst) may be retained in large amount
disproportionately. In order to avoid this, Network Master organizes the results
so that results at least 100 steps remain as shown in the examples below.
Example 1
Number of Steps set in Number of steps in which

Test the measurement results
Setup are retained
Throughput 100 100
Frame loss 200 200
Burst 500 200*
*: Measurement results for the first 300 steps are discarded.
Example 2

Setup are retained
Throughput 500 300*1
Frame loss 200 100*2
Burst 100 100
*1: Measurement results for the first 200 steps are discarded.
However, when the test mode is End to End, results up to 100 steps are
retained.
Example 3 When the test mode is End to End.

Setup are retained
Throughput 100 100
Frame loss 200 100*1
Burst 500 100*2
In the test setting, the total number of steps can be set to more than 500. In this
case, a warning is displayed on the Summary screen when the measurement is
started.
The number of test steps can be calculated by the following formula.
321
Number of steps = f × (r+1) × l

f: Number of Frame Size steps
r: Repeats
l: Number of Line Load steps
In the following setting example, the number of steps is 100.
f=5 Five frame sizes, 64, 256, 512, 1024, and 1518 bytes are selected.
r=3 One measurement is repeated three times after the first measurement, which
means four times for each.
l=5 With the settings of Min. 20%, Max. 100%, and Step 20%, line load steps are five,
20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100%.
Number of steps= f × (r+1) × l = 5 × (3+1) × 5=100
When Accumulate repeated steps in the Advanced screen is selected, r=0 regardless of
the set value of Repeats .
6.9.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the RFC 2544 application, the following
322
RFC 2544
This screen allows you to specify your test mode and select which RFC 2544
tests to carry out.
Select Test Mode 4 different test modes are available:
Switch/Router test
Router latency test
End to end network test
Single ended network test
Select the test mode to define your test configuration. See the description of the
test modes below.
Test Selection Select one or more of the following RFC 2544 tests:
Throughput
Frame loss
Throughput and frame Loss
Latency
Burst
For each test that you select, a separate test setup screen will become available,
containing the relevant setup parameters for that test. Similarly, the test results will
include only the tests that you have selected in 'Test Selection'.
Test Mode Descriptions

Switch/Router test
In this test mode one instrument is able to test, e.g. the data link layer of a
switch or router. Both ports must be active and linked in this mode, with port 2
in follow port 1 mode. IP and MAC-addresses must be swapped, ensuring that
the switch will forward frames from port 1 to port 2 and vice versa.
Testing in this mode

Throughput test
Frame Loss test
Throughput and Frame Loss test
Latency test
Burst test
323
Both ports must be activated in order to perform the Switch/Router test.

You cannot select 'Throughput and Frame Loss' and 'Throughput' / 'Frame Loss' at the
same time.
Router latency test
In this test mode, the latency-test sends out ping frames, used for measuring the
response time for router equipment. The maximum line load for the Router
Latency Test is 1 Mbps.
The Network Master is capable of responding to incoming ping frames, and can
thus be used to run the Router Latency Test port to port, if required.
When the instrument is used to reply to incoming ping frames, the settings of the
Encapsulation type and VLAN/no VLAN in port traffic setup will decide which ping
requests to answer. So do VLAN ID and Address setups.
The Router Latency Test works with both IPv4/ICMPv4 and IPv6/ICMPv6.

Latency test
End to end network

test
In this test mode, two Network Master units will work together performing an
RFC 2544 test. The unit initiating the test is the Local unit and the other unit is
the Remote unit. Control information is sent from the 'remote' unit on port 1
(alternative, port 2 will be used, if port 1 is turned off). When the test is started
on the 'local' unit, the unit will try to contact the 'remote' unit on the control
port using the Destination IP and MAC address (or use ARP if selected). If the
'remote' unit receives the communication on a port with a matching Source
address, the test will begin. Apart from the Address setup, both the 'local' and
the 'remote' unit should have the Accept Network Master Configuration frames
option enabled.
The only needed setups on the 'remote' side are the source addresses and the
enabling of Accept incoming configuration frames. The complete RFC 2544
setup is transferred from the 'local' unit when the test is started (except for the
address setup which is optional).
When the test is started on the 'local' unit, a popup will appear on the 'remote' unit, telling
that the unit is being remotely controlled - providing a 'break connection' button. The
popup will disappear when the test is completed or stopped on the 'local' unit.
When the test is completed, the test results are transferred from the 'remote'
unit to the 'local' unit. Remote 1 and Remote 2 buttons appear in Navigation
area for displaying the 'remote' side test results.
The local results and 'remote' results are related in the way that Tx statistics for the local
ports match up with the Rx statistics for the remote ports and vice versa.
324
RFC 2544
The End to End Test can be run in several modes: By default, both ports are
used for transmitting and receiving on both the 'local' unit and the 'remote'
unit. Depending on the address setup the test will run either Local port 1 >
Remote port 1, and Local port 2 > Remote port 2 or vice versa.
If One Way is selected, the test will transmit frames from either the 'remote' unit
or the 'local' unit.

Throughput test
Frame Loss test
Burst test
Note that you cannot select 'Throughput and Frame Loss' and 'Throughput' /
'Frame Loss' at the same time.
Single ended network
test
This test is used when testing network by reflecting traffic back to the Network
Master. This requires a device to reflect the traffic back e.g. a second Network
Master.
If both ports are active, the test will require both ports to be linked and do a dual 'Single
ended network test'. Turn off one of the ports to only test on one of the ports.

Throughput test
Frame Loss test
Latency test
Burst test
Note that you cannot select 'Throughput and Frame Loss' and 'Throughput' /
'Frame Loss' at the same time.
6.9.2.2 Throughput
Only available if you have specified a Throughput test on the 'Control' of the
Test Setup screen.
Touching the Throughput button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
325
This screen allows you to configure the following parameters related to an RFC
2544 Throughput test:
The changes affect both Port 1 and Port 2 when the Switch/Router Test mode is
selected.
Frame Size (Bytes) Frame size can be specified in 3 ways. Observe that the screen layout changes
depending on the type of Frame Size selected.
User defined
Check boxes for the following predefined sizes are available: 64, 128, 256, 512,
768, 1024, 1280, 1518 and 1519 to 16000(Using the field at right bottom).
Stepped
Setup of Start frame size, End frame size and Step frame size is available. The
frame size starts at Start frame size and increases/decreases in intervals of
Step frame size until the frame size is above/below End frame size (the
increase or decrease depending on the specified start and end values).
Constant
A Frame size field for specifying the constant size is available.
The 'stepped' mode is convenient for testing different frame sizes consistently and
equally distributed. As a consequence it produces more smooth and detailed graphs
when the step frame size is arbitrarily low. The test extends in time for smaller step frame
sizes.
326
RFC 2544
Line Load (Mbps) The different test line loads used in the test are specified as a Minimum (Min)
and Maximum (Max) - varied in intervals of the value specified in the Step
field. The test always starts at Maximum line load and decreases until the line
load is less than Minimum. The results can be presented in either Mbps or as
Percent.
Valid range of Min, Max, Step depends on the unit and Ethernet interface.
Percent
0.0008 to 100.0000 %.
Mbps
10M interface: 0.00008 to 10.000 Mbps *1
100M interface: 0.0008 to 100.00 Mbps *1
1G interface: 0.008 to 1000.00 Mbps *1
10G interface: 0.08 to 10000.00 Mbps *2
*1: Setting is only available with the Ethernet 10/100/1000 interface.
*2: Setting is only available when the Ethernet 10 Gig option is installed.
Stop on no frame loss at maximum utilization

The test will continue to test the next frame size if the current test step at a
specific line load and frame size does not have any frames lost.
Auto search
Allows you to let the test automatically find the maximum line load that gives
zero frame loss, using a specified resolution. Auto Search can run in one of the
two following modes:
Smart that assumes that there is a higher probability of frame loss occurring
closer to Max, and therefore makes a skewed binary search searching the
higher line loads first.
Binary that will perform a binary search of the specified line load interval
from Max to Min.
The Resolution field lets you specify the precision of the auto search. A higher
precision extends the duration of the test. Available resolutions are: 0.1, 1.0
and 10.0 %.
The check boxes are enabled except when selecting 'End to End network test' on Control
screen.
Duration
Step
Specify the approximate duration in time of each step of the test. It can be set
to a number of seconds (minimum 3 seconds).
Repeats
Specify the number of times the complete test will repeat. Valid range: 0 to
1000.
6.9.2.3 Frame Loss
327
Only available if you have specified a Frame Loss test on the 'Control' of the
Test Setup screen.
Touching the Frame loss button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
2544 Frame Loss test:
Frame Size
Line Load
Duration
The parameters are identical to the ones described in the Throughput section
above.
6.9.2.4 Throughput and Frame Loss
Only available if you have specified a 'Throughput and Frame Loss' test on the
'Control' of the Test Setup screen. Use this test if you want to perform both a
Throughput test and a Frame Loss test while using the same test parameters for
both.
Touching the Throughput and frame loss button in the navigation area will
launch the screen shown below.
328
RFC 2544
2544 Throughput and Frame Loss test:
Frame Size
Line Load
Duration
The settings for 'Throughput and Frame Loss' are identical to the ones
described in the Throughput section above.
6.9.2.5 Latency
Only available if you have specified a Latency test on the 'Control' of the Test
Setup screen.
Touching the Latency button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
This screen allows you to configure the parameters related to an RFC 2544
Latency test:
Frame Size
Line Load
329
Duration
Most of the settings for Latency are identical to the ones described above in the
Throughput section. Please see the detailed descriptions in that section in
addition to the Latency-specific information provided here.
Only run steps where other test passed

If selecting the check box, the latency test will be done only on the line load
steps where other test has passed (i.e. no frame loss).
The other tests can be selected from: Throughput, Frame Loss, and Throughput
and Frame Loss.
You can specify a tolerance level of the line load in percent ratio of the
utilization.
Example when other test is Throughput and Tolerance level is 80:

Throughput test
Line load of
Frame size Utilization Result Latency test
(byte) (%)
64 100 Fail (Not tested)
64 60 Pass 48
64 20 Pass 16
When 'Only run steps where other test passed' is selected, all other settings are forced
identical for the Frame Loss and Latency tests.
'Only run steps where other test passed' is enabled in case of 'Switch/Router test' or
'Single ended network test'.
If duration 'Repeats' is set to 0 (zero), the test will run a single time. If it is set to 1, the
test will run two times (repeated once).
330
RFC 2544
6.9.2.6 Burst
Only available if you have specified a Burst test on the 'Control' of the Test
Setup screen.
Touching the Burst button in the navigation area will display the screen shown
below.
2544 Burst test:
Frame Size
Frames per burst (burst length) or Seconds per burst (burst length)
Duration
Frame Size and Duration are identical to the ones described above in the
Throughput section. Please see the detailed descriptions in that section in
addition to the Burst-specific information provided here.
Burst mode Select how to set burst length.
Based on frames: sets burst length by multiples of Ethernet frame size.
Based on seconds: sets burst length by time.
Frames per Burst The number of frames per burst can either be varied (selecting Stepped in the
(Burst Length)
drop-down menu) or constant (selecting Constant).
Stepped works like Stepped for frame sizes, i.e. the test starts with Start burst
Size and in intervals of Step burst size increases or decreases to End burst size.
Constant allows you to specify a Start burst size.
Stop on no frame loss at maximum burst size

If selected, the burst test stops on no frame loss at maximum burst size.
Auto search
If selected, the burst length is searched automatically. Select the search method
from Mode. Select the search resolution from 0.1 %, 1.0 %, or 10.0 %.
331
The check boxes are enabled except when selecting 'End to End network test' on Control
screen.
If duration 'Repeats' is set to 0 (zero), the test will run a single time. If it is set to 1, the
test will run two times (repeated once).
Seconds per Burst Touch a button to set seconds per burst.
(Burst Length)
When setting burst length by seconds, the burst length is searched
automatically. Select the search resolution from 0.1 %, 1.0 %, or 10.0 %. Select
the search method from Mode.
6.9.2.7 Advanced
Touching the Advanced button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
This screen allows you to specify various advanced settings for the RFC 2544
test(s).
Pretest Options
End to End Test (master side)
Miscellaneous
Throughput Calculation Layer Selection
Throughput Type
Pretest Options Transmit learning frames

When this option is enabled, the RFC 2544 test will send out a number of
'learning frames' before the first test-step starts on each port. This happens to
train network equipment, so that initial latency results will not be invalid.
End to End Test
In One-Way test, transmit frames from
(master side)
This parameter defines the direction of the frames when transmitted during an
End to End test with the One-Way setting enabled. Available directions are:
Local or Remote.
Use local source addresses for destination on remote side
332
RFC 2544
When this function is enabled, the Network Master does not use the IP or MAC
addresses for differentiating frames during the RFC 2544 test. An exception is
End to End test control, but routing equipment in the network may need the
addresses to be set up correctly. To limit the amount of needed setups on the
Remote side, this setting can be enabled to transfer the source address setup
from the Local using it as destination on the Remote. However, the source
addresses must still be correctly setup on the remote in order to make the End
to End test work.
Store test results on remote side

When this function is enabled, test results will be stored on the remote
instrument.
Miscellaneous
addresses match the following items will appear on the Streams screen.
Src MAC
Src IP
VLAN ID
Src Port
This setting has an effect on only the following measurement results on the
Statistics screen.
Multi Stream Latencyt
Multi Stream Jitter
This setting does not have an effect on Frame Capture.
Measure jitter by means of latency test

When selected the Latency Test will measure jitter instead of latency.
Accumulate repeated steps

The RFC 2544 test (Throughput, Frame loss, Latency, and Burst) is performed
by steps by means of changing a parameter value. When selecting the check
box, the results of each steps are accumulated by each test when the tests are
repeated.
Throughput Select the layer on which the throughput calculation is done. As described in
Calculation Layer
Selection the Throughput calculation section there are 6 different layers:
Utilization layer throughput
Physical layer throughput
Physical layer throughput (without preamble)
Link layer throughput
Network layer throughput
Data layer throughput
Data layer throughput appears when UDP or TCP is set to the layer 4 of the
Ethernet frame on 'Ports Setup' screen.
333
Throughput Type Select whether to register Average throughput or Maximum throughput.
6.9.3 Test Results

Graphical The results of the performed RFC 2544 tests can be presented in either tabular
presentation
form or as graphical representations. The graphical presentation mode provides
an overview of the results and the progress of the test.
On the test-specific result screen, you switch between the two modes by using
the Graph and Table buttons.
6.9.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet RFC 2544 application, the
This screen presents the current status of the test(s) (Configured / Not Started,
Running, Completed or Not Configured). Touching the status button for a
specific test will display the result screen of the test.
334
RFC 2544
6.9.3.2 Throughput
shown below.
This screen presents the results from the Throughput test.
The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters
Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameter Frames lost.
The order of the tables will vary depending on the test mode and the relation of the ports.
Test Mode Port 1 Port 2

Port 1 Tx Port 2 Tx
Switch/Router test
Port 2 Rx Port 1 Rx
End to End test
Port 1 Tx Port 2 Tx
Router latency test
Port 1 Rx Port 2 Rx
Single ended network test
6.9.3.3 Frame loss
Only available if you have specified a Frame loss test on the 'Control' of the Test Setup
screen.
Touching the Frame loss button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
335
This screen presents the results from the Frame loss test.
Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameter Loss rate.
Refer to the table in "Throughput" subsection of "Test Results".
6.9.3.4 Throughput and frame loss
Touching the Throughput and frame loss button in the navigation area will
display the screen shown below.
This screen presents the results from the Throughput and frame loss test.
Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameters Frames lost and
Loss rate.
336
RFC 2544
6.9.3.5 Latency
Touching the Latency button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
This screen presents the results from the Latency test.
Frame size and Throughput and the performance parameters Min, Avg and Max
latency stated in micro seconds.
6.9.3.6 Burst
Touching the Burst button in the navigation area will display the screen shown
below.
This screen presents the results from the Burst test.
337
The most important columns of the tables are the varied main parameters Burst
size and Frame size and the performance parameter Frames lost.
6.9.3.7 Event Log
BERT application.
6.9.3.8 Statistics
6.9.4 Throughput Calculation
Throughput may be calculated on 6 different layers.
Each calculation is done on a one second base. It is possible either to register

the maximum throughput (actually showing only the second with the highest
throughput), or to register an average throughput per second taken over a
selected part of the test period.
The calculation depends on the setting of the transmitted frame contents. Even in cases
where the transmitter is not used, the calculation will be based on this setting.
The part of the test from which the average throughput is calculated, is selected
in a way to avoid influence from latency and missing frames. The drawing
below illustrates this.
338
RFC 2544
The Tx graph shows the transmitted periods, and the Rx graph shows the
received periods. Due to latency the receiver will first see the transmitted
frames some time later than when transmitter actually sent the frames (the L-
period). This is also why the receiver may have more periods than the
transmitter, in order to await delayed frames. However the receiver will
maximum wait for 10 extra periods (seconds) before it times out, as frames
may actually physically be lost somewhere in the network.
The average calculation is triggered when the receiver actually sees the first
frame. The frames in this first I-period are ignored. Then the average
calculation is started and runs over the next duration-2 A-periods. Frames in
the last I-period are also ignored. Frames in the remaining S-periods have no
influence on the average calculation.
339
6.10 RFC 6349
The RFC 6349 Framework for TCP Throughput Testing describes a practical
methodology for measuring end-to-end TCP Throughput in a managed IP network.
For using RFC 6349 application, TCP Throughput option is required to the test module.
If the option has been installed, RFC 6349 icon will appear in Application Selector.
The Network Master has the test sequence according to RFC 6349.
1. Path MTU
Identifies the maximum IP packet size passing through the network without
fragmentation.
2. Baseline Round Trip Time (RTT)
Measures the lowest RTT assuming that packets pass through the network
without congestion.
3. Window Scan and Throughput
While scanning the TCP window size, measures the maximum bit rate of the
end-to-end network path.
The window size scanning method can be set by Test Mode.
4. Multi-Service
Measures multiple-TCP connection throughput. Multiple TCP connection
throughput test is called "Multi-Service" in Network Master.
The RFC 6349 also defines TCP metrics as Transfer Time Ratio, TCP Efficiency
and Buffer Delay.
In Ethernet Setup for RFC 6349 test, three buttons appear in Navigation area.
Streams
Layer 3 setting is fixed to "IPv4", Layer 4 settings is fixed to "TCP".
Settings
"Miscellaneous" tab does not appear.
Filter
6.10.2 Test Setup
6.10.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the RFC 6349 application, the following
340
RFC 6349
This screen allows you to specify your test mode and select which RFC 6349
tests to carry out.
General
Test Port
Touch the fields to set the port number.
On Local side, "Test port" is used as the TCP destination port.
On Remote side, "Test port" is used as the TCP source port.
Full Auto Test Sequence

If selecting check box, followings are selected:
Local -> Remote, Remote -> Local, Simultaneous in Both Directions, Path MTU,
Baseline RTT, Window Scan and Throughput The Test Mode will be set to Auto .
Connect to iPerf Server is cleared.
Connect to iPerf Server

If selecting check box, Network Master will connect to the iperf server. "iperf" is
the tool to measure the network throughput.
Followings are cleared:

Remote -> Local, Simultaneous in Both Directions, Full Auto Test Sequence.
Site Names (Short, Touch the fields to set the Site Names :
Long)
Local : The site name for Network Master side.
Remote: The site name for the opposite instrument.
Test Directions Setup Select the one or more check boxes, then touch the fields to set the port
number of the communication.
Local -> Remote: Tests the throughput of outgoing stream to Remote.

Remote -> Local : Tests the throughput of incoming stream from Remote.
Simultaneous in Both Directions: Tests the both throughput of outgoing and
incoming streams.
Communication Port
Touch the fields to set the port number.
CIR Touch the fields to set the committed information rate (CIR).
Upstream CIR: CIR of outgoing stream.
341
Downstream CIR: CIR of incoming stream.
Test Sequence Select the check boxes of the test defined in RFC 6349, which you wish to run.
Path MTU
Runs a test to determine the Path MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit). If
cleared, set the Upstream MTU and Downstream MTU.
Baseline RTT
Runs a test to determine the Baseline RTT. If cleared, set the Baseline RTT
value in the field.
Window Scan and Throughput

Runs a test to determine Throughput test while scanning the TCP window size.
Test Mode
Auto: Scans at the window size of 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of BDP.
Expert: Scans the window size defined by user.
Multi-Service
Runs a test to measure the throughput with multiple TCP connections.
6.10.2.2 MTU / RTT
MTU / RTT button in the navigation area is enabled if Path MTU check box or
Baseline RTT check box is selected on "Control" screen.
This screen allows you to specify test parameters.

MTU Discovery The field will be enabled if Path MTU check box is selected on "Control"
screen.
Touch the Minimum MTU or Maximum MTU fields set the bytes range used
when discovering MTU.
Baseline RTT The field will be enabled if Baseline RTT check box is selected on "Control"
screen. Touch the fields to set the running time of the Baseline RTT test.
342
RFC 6349
6.10.2.3 Windows Scan / Throughput
Windows Scan / Throughput button in the navigation area is enabled if

Windows Scan and Throughput check box of Test Sequence is selected on
"Control" screen.
The contents of the screen depend on the test mode selected on "Control"
screen.
The arrow buttons in navigation area switch the test direction of settings. The
right arrow button shows to Local -> Remote direction, and left arrow button
shows Remote -> Local direction.
If Auto is selected on "Control" screen, following screen appears.
If Expert is selected on "Control" screen, following screen appears.
BDP (Bytes)
Appears when Test mode is set to Auto. If CIR and Baseline RTT are set on
"Control" screen, calculated BDP (Bandwidth-Delay Product) appears.
Desired Max Window Size
343
Appears when Test mode is set to Auto. The nominal window size to be used if
possible. If specified window size is lower than BDP/16, a larger window size
will be calculated and used automatically.
Window Scan
Touch the Step Duration field to set the duration of each steps.
Select the check boxes to execute the step in the table.
Auto
Test parameters are set automatically.
Expert
Window Size: Touch the field to set TCP window size.
Connections: Touch the field to set TCP connection number.
Total : Calculated bytes are displayed.
Throughput
Select the Enable Threshold check box if enabling the PASS/FAIL test.
Touch the % of Ideal field to set the threshold of throughput.
Touch the Step Duration field to set the duration of a step.
Auto
Test parameters are set automatically.
Expert
Select the check box if executing the Throughput test.
Set the parameters as same as Window Scan.
6.10.2.4 Multi-Service
Multi-Service button in the navigation area is enabled if Multi-Service check

box of Test Sequence is selected on "Control" screen.
This screen allows you to set of connections by specifying TOS (Type of

Service) or DSCP (differentiated Service Codepoint) used for Diffserv.
Touch the Test Duration field to set the duration of Multi-service test.
Auto (BDP)
344
RFC 6349
Select the check box if setting Window Size automatically. The window size is
calculated from bandwidth delay product (BDP).
Connection
Select the check box of the stream number to enable a connection.
Destination Port
Touch the fields to set the destination port number.
DSCP/TOS
Touch the fields to set a Diffserv or TOS codepoint to be included in frames
belonging to the connection.
Application Name
Touch the fields to set a text string that identifies the application on the port
number (for reporting purposes only). For example, HTTP, POP3, etc.
6.10.3 Test Results

Test Directions Local -> Remote
Remote -> Local
Local -> Remote of Both Directions
Remote -> Local of Both Directions
Graphical The results of the performed RFC 6349 tests can be presented in either tabular
presentation
form or as graphical representations. The graphical presentation mode provides
an overview of the results and the progress of the test.
6.10.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet RFC 6349 application, the
This screen presents the summary of current measurement values.

Local -> Remote: Shows the results of Upstream (Local to Remote) test.
Remote -> Local : Shows the results of Downstream (Remote to Local) test.
345
The measurement results are displayed in white cells.
Throughput and RTT

Window Size: The window size used for the step.
Connections: The number of TCP connections.
Threshold: The threshold of the throughput.
Avg Throughput: The average value of measured Throughputs.
Avg RTT: The average value of measured RTT.
Network Parameters
MTU / MSS: Maximum Transmission Unit / Maximum Segment Size
RTT: Round Trip Time
CIR: Committed Information Rate
RFC6349 Metrics
Transfer Time Ratio
TCP Efficiency
Buffer Delay
6.10.3.2 RFC 6349 Metrics
RFC 6349 defines three metrics.
Transfer Time Ratio

Defined as below:
Actual TCP Transfer Time

TCP Transfer Time Ratio =
Ideal TCP Transfer Time
Ideal TCP Transfer Time is calculated from bit rate, MTU and TCP payload
bytes. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is obtained from Path MTU test.
TCP Efficiency
TCP Efficiency is the ratio of transmitted bytes without retransmission in
transmitted total bytes. Defined as below:
Transmitted Bytes - Retransmitted Bytes

TCP Efficiency (%) = × 100
Transmitted Bytes
If 100 000 bytes were sent, and 2 000 had to be retransmitted, the TCP
Efficiency percentage would be calculated as:
102000 - 2000
TCP Efficiency (%) = × 100 = 98.03
102000
Buffer Delay
Buffer Delay shows the ratio of increased RTT against baseline RTT. Defined as
below:
Total RTTs during transfer

Average RTT during transfer =
Transfer durations in seconds
Average RTT during transfer - Baseline RTT
Buffer Delay (%) = × 100
Baseline RTT
346
RFC 6349
For example, a baseline RTT of network path is 25 ms, and average RTT across
the entire transfer increases to 32 ms. Buffer Delay percentage would be
calculated as:
32 - 25
Buffer Delay (%) = × 100 = 28
25
6.10.3.3 Window Scan
Touching the Window Scan button in the navigation area will display the
screen shown below.
This screen presents the results from the Window Scan test. The ideal
throughput and the actual throughput are shown in the chart. If touching on the
Graph bars, step details appear in the right hand table.
6.10.3.4 Throughput
shown below.
347
This screen presents the Throughput results in graph or table. Touch the Graph
and Table buttons to switch between the tabular form and a graphical
presentation of the results.
The ideal throughput, RTT and TCP Efficiency are shown in the graphical
presentation.
THPT/EFF : Throughput and TCP Efficiency
THPT/RTT: Throughput and Round Trip Time
Following results are displayed in the tabular form.

Avg Throughput
Ideal Throughput
Actual Transfer Time
Ideal Transfer Time
Transfer Time Ratio
Window Size / Conn
Transmitted Bytes
Retransmitted Bytes
Retransmitted %
TCP Efficiency
Baseline RTT
Min RTT
Avg RTT
Max RTT
Buffer Delay
In bidirectional mode, the measured throughput in bidirectional mode is less

than the ideal in one way mode. This is due to the overhead caused by
interleaving returning ACK frames into the transfer. The ideal throughput of the
instrument in bidirectional mode is calculated by considering the estimated
interleaving returning ACK frame.
In case of connecting iPerf server, the "Interval" result of iPerf server is

displayed more 1 second than the "Actual Transfer Time" result of the
instrument. When you check the result of iPerf server, it is recommended to set
the duration of the test by sufficient long period.
6.10.3.5 Multi-Service
Touching the Multi-Service button in the navigation area will display the screen
shown below.
348
RFC 6349
This screen presents results by each TCP connection of RTT, Throughput and
TCP Efficiency. Use the Graph and Table buttons to switch between the tabular
form and a graphical presentation of the results.
Touching the button in navigation area switches the Test direction of results.
The results in Connection are:

Connection : Connection number of the stream
Min RTT: Minimum Round Trip Time
Avg RTT: Average Round Trip Time
Max RTT: Maximum Round Trip Time
Tx THPT: Transmitter throughput
TCP Efficiency: The ratio of actual throughput against ideal throughput
The results in Total are:

Min RTT: Minimum RTT in all connections
Avg RTT: Average Round Trip Time
Max RTT: Maximum RTT in all connections
Tx THPT: Sum of throughput in each connections
TCP Efficiency: The ratio of total actual throughput of connections against
total ideal throughput of connections
6.10.3.6 Event Log
BERT application.
6.10.3.7 Statistics
providing the statistics data.
Refer to Statistics of BERT for the operation.

Performance and Frame are displayed as RFC 6349 Statistic result.
349
6.11 SAT 1564

Service Activation Test is an out-of-service test used to assess the proper
configuration and performance of Ethernet services. The test methodology, which is
described in the ITU-T recommendation Y.1564, applies to point-to-point and point-
to-multipoint connectivity in the Ethernet layer and to the network portions that
provide (or contribute to) the provisioning of such services.
The recommendation also defines the terms used in the Network Master
screens related to Service Activation Test.
ITU-T Y.1564 is designed around three key objectives:

To serve as a network service level agreement (SLA) validation tool, ensuring
that a service meets its guaranteed performance settings in a controlled test
time.
To ensure that all services carried by the network meet their SLA objectives at
their maximum committed rate, proving that under maximum load network
devices and paths can support all the traffic as designed.
To perform medium- and long-term service testing, confirming that network

elements can properly carry all services while under stress during a soaking
period.
6.11.2 Test Setup
6.11.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the SAT 1564 application, the following
350
SAT 1564
This screen allows you to configure the test mode and other general parameters
related to a Service Activation Test.
Test Mode Use the radio buttons to select the relevant test mode.
One-Way Test
In this test mode, two Network Master units will work together performing the
test. When the test is started on the local side, the unit will try to contact the
remote side, using the Destination IP and MAC address (or use ARP if selected)
for the first enabled service. If the remote side receives the communication on
a port with a matching Source address, the test will begin.
The remote side Network Master must have "Accept Network Master Configuration
frames" on the Test Setup screen enabled, in order to detect the communication.
Enable "Compatible configuration frames with CMA3000 and V2.X or older" to support
communication with CMA3000 and Network Master V2.X or older. The setting is locate
under Ports Setup screen > Ethernet > Settings.
Frames from Service 1 on the local side must reach Service 1 on the remote side and
vice versa. This applies to all services.
When the End to End test is started, a popup will appear on the remote side,
telling that the unit is being remotely controlled and allowing the user to break
the connection, if required. The popup will disappear when the test is
completed or stopped on the local side.
When the End to End test is completed, the test results are transferred from the
remote side to the local side.
Round-Trip Test
This test mode is used when testing network by reflecting traffic back to the
instrument. This requires a device to reflect the traffic back, for instance a
second Network Master.
A remote side Network Master in Reflector mode must have Swap IP address and Swap
Ports on UDP and TCP frames enabled.
Site Names (Short, Touch the fields to set the Site Names :
Long)
Local : The site name for Network Master side.
351
Remote: The site name for the opposite instrument.
End to End Test Setup This setup is enabled when One-Way Test is selected.
Direction
Use the check boxes to specify which directions to test.
Line
Use the drop-down menu to select how the service attributes for the directions
are set up.
Symmetrical : The same service attributes are used for both directions.
Asymmetrical : Service attributes are set up for each direction.
Test Sync. Mode

Use the drop-down menu to select the method for synchronization of the two
instruments performing the test. Synchronization is required for correct
measurement of FTD and FDV in End to End Test mode.
Select GPS if external GPS receivers are available at both the local and the
remote site. This gives the most accurate measurements.
Select Pre-test sync. if GPS is not available for both instruments. In this mode,
synchronization is obtained using proprietary protocol prior to the first step of
the Service Configuration Test.
External GPS sensor is available from Anritsu (part no. G0325A or MU100090A).
Use local SRC as DST on remote side

Select this to transfer the local source IP address to the remote side, to be used
as destination IP address. If ARP is enabled locally, it will also be enabled on
the remote side. If IP is disabled, the local source MAC address will be
transferred to the remote side, to be used as destination MAC address.
Bit Rate Realm The CIR/EIR rates for services refer to either information rate or utilized line
rate. Use the radio buttons to specify which bit realm to operate in.
Information rate
The bit rate of frames starting with the first MAC address bit and ending with
the last FCS bit.
In this realm actual load on the Ethernet line is bigger as minimum inter frame
gap, preamble, and start of frame delimiter (20 octets in total per frame) are not
included. Maximum possible value depends on selected framesize(s).
For instance, a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet port can handle a total information rate of
about 77 Mbit/s to 99 Mbit/s depending on the average frame size of the
transmitted Ethernet frames.
Utilized line rate

The bit rate of the Ethernet line, including the bits for:
The minimum inter frame gap
Preamble
Start of frame delimiter
352
SAT 1564
Frame starting with the first MAC address bit and ending with the last FCS bit.
In this realm the Ethernet line rate defines the maximum combined CIR rate for
all included services.
Service Configuration
Tests Complete despite SAC violation
Select this check box to allow the configuration test to be completed despite
any detected SAC violations. If not selected, the configuration test will stop
when the first SAC violation is detected.
Service Performance
Test Duration
Allows you to set the duration period of the performance test. Either select one
of the predefined values in the drop-down menu or use the field to specify a
custom period.
6.11.2.2 Services
Touching the Services button in the navigation area will launch the screen
shown below.
If the End to End test setup on the 'Control' screen has been set to asymmetrical service
attributes setups, two Services buttons are displayed instead of one: Services L->R
button and Services R->L button.
This screen allows you to configure up to eight services being tested in the
current Service Activation Test. For each service, you can:
Enable/Disable the service
Set up the profile
Set up the bandwidth
Set up the service acceptance criteria (thresholds)
Set up the color aware
Set up the frame size configuration
Enable/Disable Select the services that are to be tested. Up to 8 services can be specified,
service
either by enabling already defined services or by defining new ones. Use the
stream slide-out to select the relevant services. The stream slide-out is
displayed via the tab in the top left-hand corner of the setup area.
353
Use the Enabled check box to enable/disable the service specified in the
Service field.
To define a new service, select the relevant stream, specify a name in the
Service field and then configure the service using the tab pages.
Profile tab
The Profile tab page contains the following parameters:
Profile In case of Round-Trip Test mode, the drop-down menu at the top allows you to
select the service profile as either Data, Video or Voice.
Encoding
Number of channels
Specify the number of channels.
CIR
354
SAT 1564
Allows you to specify the Committed Information Rate (CIR). When set to zero,
the CIR test is excluded. If color awareness is enabled (see below), this is the
bit rate for green frames.
Steps
Step duration
Allows you to specify the test step duration. Valid setting is from 1 to 60
seconds.
Number of steps
Allows you to specify the number of steps in the CIR test. Valid setting is from
1 to 10 steps.
Slope
Use the radio buttons to select an ascending or descending test slope for the
CIR test.
If the descending test slope is selected in round-trip test mode, all remaining
CIR steps are skipped when a CIR step passes.
In one-way test mode, all CIR steps are always performed.
Bandwidth tab
The Bandwidth tab page contains the following parameters:
CIR
Allows you to specify the Committed Information Rate (CIR). When set to zero,
the CIR test is excluded. If color awareness is enabled (see below), this is the
bit rate for green frames.
EIR
Allows you to specify the Excess Information Rate (EIR). When set to zero, the
EIR test is excluded. If color awareness is enabled (see below), this is the bit
rate for yellow frames.
CIR plus EIR for a service must be greater than zero.
355
Traffic policing
Select this check box to enable the traffic policing test. When enabled, you can
specify a margin on the Service Acceptance Criteria tab page and use that
margin for pass/fail evaluation during the service configuration test. The test
will fail if the throughput is greater than CIR + EIR + Margin.
CBS
Allows you to specify the Committed Burst Size (CBS) in bytes. When set to
zero, the CBS test is excluded. If color awareness is enabled (see below), this is
the burst size for green frames.
The CBS test can only be executed if CIR is also greater than zero. Furthermore, it must
be possible to send at least twice the number of CBS bytes with CIR rate within the step
duration.
EBS
Allows you to specify the Excess Burst Size (EBS) in bytes. When set to zero,
the EBS test is excluded. If color awareness is enabled (see below), this is the
burst size for yellow frames.
The EBS test can only be executed if EIR is greater than zero. If CIR is greater than zero,
the EBS test also requires that CBS is greater than zero. Furthermore, it must be possible
to send at least twice the number of EBS bytes with EIR rate within the step duration.
Service Acceptance Criteria tab
The Service Acceptance Criteria tab page contains the following parameters:
Traffic policing margin

Only active when the traffic policing test is enabled. Allows you to specify a
margin for the pass/fail evaluation during the service configuration test. The
test will fail if the throughput is greater than CIR + EIR + Margin.
Frame transfer delay / RT Frame transfer delay

Allows you to specify the maximum acceptable transfer delay in ms (mean).
Frame delay variation / RT Frame delay variation
356
SAT 1564
Allows you to specify the maximum acceptable frame transfer deviation in ms

(mean).
Frame loss rate

Allows you to specify the maximum acceptable frame loss rate.
AVAIL
Allows you to specify the minimum acceptable availability percentage.
Color Aware tab
The Color Aware tab page contains the following parameters:
Select the Enabled check box to enable color awareness. You can then choose
the color method (PCP or IP DSCP), as well as the priority values to mark the
green and yellow frames with.
Choose PCP to use VLAN priority coloring. This requires that VLAN is
enabled.
Choose IP DSCP to use IP priority coloring.
With color awareness enabled, the test will include results for green and yellow
frames for the EIR, Traffic Policing and the EBS tests.
With color awareness, the transmitted frame rate is 100% CIR green-marked frames plus
125% EIR yellow-marked frames. If EIR is less than 20% of CIR, the transmit rate is
100% CIR green-marked frames plus 25% CIR yellow-marked frames plus 100% EIR
yellow-marked frames. Without color awareness, the transmit rate is 100% CIR + 125%
EIR. If EIR is less than 20% of CIR, the transmit rate is 125% CIR + 100% EIR.
Frame Size tab
The contents of the Frame Size tab page depends on your choice of mode.
Frame size has two modes: Constant and EMIX.
Constant
Allows you to either select a constant frame size from one of several predefined
sizes, or to define a custom frame size with MTU or User defined setting.
357
EMIX
Allows you to set up a repeating frame size pattern. The pattern must consist of
at least 1 frame size and at most 16.
Touching EMIX sequence field opens the dialog box.
358
SAT 1564
6.11.2.3 Advanced

addresses match to following items will appear on the Streams screen.
Src MAC
Src IP
VLAN ID
Src Port
This setting makes the effect to only following measurement results on the
Statistics screen.
Multi Stream Latencyt
Multi Stream Jitter
This setting does not effect to Frame Capture.
6.11.3 Test Results
6.11.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Service Activation Test, the following
This screen presents a summary of the results of the Service Activation Test.
Touching the result button for a specific service in either the Configuration Test
or Performance Test result panel will display the relevant screen with detailed
results information.
Item status Lamp

Each result item has a colored Lamp indicating the status for this item and its
sub items:
359
Green The item and all its sub items are passing or have passed the Service
Acceptance Criteria.
Yellow The GPS synchronization has been lost for a following period or more.
G0325A: 10 seconds
MU1000090A: 1 hour
FTD and FDV results could be compromised if the duration of

continuous GPS synchronization loss has been longer the this time FTD
and FDV results are compromised.
Red The items and one or more of its sub items have failed the Service
Acceptance Criteria.
Gray Results for the item are pending.
Blue The measurement is running.
GPS status Lamp

When Test Sync. Mode is set to GPS on Control screen, status
for the GPS time synchronization is displayed at the top of the
screen with colored Lamps - one Lamp for the local side and
one for the remote side.
Green GPS synchronization is OK.

Yellow GPS synchronization has been lost for 10 seconds (1 hour for
MU1000090A) or more. FTD and FDV results could be compromised.
6.11.3.2 Configuration Test
Touching the Configuration Test button in the navigation area will display the
screen shown below.
This screen presents the detailed Configuration Test results for a specific
service. Use the drop-down menu at the top of the screen to select which
service to view.
360
SAT 1564
The results are presented in a table and are related to a specific CIR% (CIR
25.00%, CIR 50.00%, CIR 75.00%, and CIR 100%). Select the relevant CIR%
either by selecting the corresponding bar in the bar graph or by using the CIR
drop-down menu.
Touching a cell in table displays Minimum, Maximum, Mean value and the
Threshold, at bottom of screen.
Test results Select a cell in the results table to see the details. The following information is
presented:
IR / ULR
Shows the minimum, mean and maximum bit rate in Mbps. Depending on the
test setup, the bit rate is either Information Rate (IR) or Utilized Line Rate
(ULR).
FL
Shows the number of lost frames and the frame loss ratio. The frame loss ratio
is frames lost divided by frames transmitted.
FTD / RT FTD
Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Transfer Delay in
milliseconds. Depending on the test setup, the result is either one-way delay or
round-trip delay.
FDV / RT FDV
Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Delay Variation in
milliseconds. Depending on the test setup, the result is either one-way or
round-trip.
6.11.3.3 Performance Test
Selecting the Performance Test button in the navigation area will display the
screen shown below.
This screen presents the detailed Performance Test results.
361
Test results Select a cell in the results table to see the details. The following information is
presented:
IR
Shows the minimum, mean and maximum bit rate in Mbps. Depending on the
test setup, the bit rate is either Information Rate (IR).
FL
Shows the number of lost frames and the frame loss ratio. The frame loss ratio
is frames lost divided by frames transmitted.
FTD
Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Transfer Delay in
milliseconds. Depending on the test setup, the result is either one-way delay or
round-trip delay.
FDV
Shows the minimum, mean, maximum and current Frame Delay Variation in
milliseconds. Depending on the test setup, the result is either one-way or
round-trip.
Avail
Shows Availability, which is the percentage of one-second in intervals that are
categorized as available. An available second occurs when the line is in the
available state. The available state begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-
SESeth outcomes. A SESeth is defined as a second with a frame loss rate of 0.5
or more. See ITU-T Y.1563 Ethernet frame transfer and availability
performance clause 9.
6.11.3.4 Event Log
BERT application.
6.11.3.5 Statistics
362
Traceroute
6.12 Traceroute
The Traceroute test is used to determine the route taken by packets in an IP network.
The intermediate routers traversed are identified by the sending of a sequence of
ICMP Ping packets to the desired destination, each packet with a too low Time-to-
Live (TTL) or hop limit so that it terminates in one of the routers and makes the router
return an error message. Routers decrement the TTL and discard a package when the
TTL value has reached zero.
Traceroute works by gradually increasing the TTL value for each packet,
starting at "1". The first set of packets terminates at the first router, the second
set at the second router, and so on until a ping reply is received from the
destination. This is used to build a list of the hosts that the packets must pass
through to reach the intended destination.
The test will send regular ICMP type 11 Ping packets to each host that is
detected in this way, and display the resulting RTT (Round Trip Times).
363
6.12.2 Test Setup
When you go to the test setup of the Ethernet Traceroute test, the following
This screen allows you to configure the parameters related to a Traceroute test.
Test Duration
Number of attempts
Used to specify the maximum number of times that Ping packets with each TTL
value are transmitted. If no ICMP type 11 or ping reply is received after this
number of attempts, the test will move on to a higher TTL value.
Max number of hops

Used to specify the maximum number of hops performed in the test. The test
will gradually increment the TTL value until a regular ping reply is received. If
no ping reply is received before this number of hops, the test will stop.
Ping each hosts

Used to specify the number of times each host is pinged to determine the RTT.
For each hop that responds with ICMP 11 type packets, and for the desired
destination, this number of Ping packets is sent.
Threshold
Timeout
Used to specify the timeout limit for Ping packets sent by the test.
364
Traceroute
6.12.3 Test Results
6.12.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Ethernet Traceroute test, the following
This screen shows the status/results of a running Traceroute test, or the results
of the most recently completed test.
Each row in the table represents a hop in the chain of host servers of the
traceroute. For each hop/host the following information is shown:
The IP address of the host
The Min., Max. and Average ping RTTs
The number of ping timeouts during the determination of the RTT
In the results table for a successfully completed test, the last row will represent the
destination of the traceroute.
6.12.3.2 IEEE1588v2 Log

6.12.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
6.12.3.4 Statistics
365
6.13 Sync Test

Sync Test application provides One Pulse Per Second (1PPS) measurement and One
Way Delay (OWD) measurement.
1PPS measurement measures phase difference between the 1PPS signal

under test and the reference 1PPS signal.
OWD measurement measures the time error of PTP packet against the
reference time obtained from GPS satellites.
Ground Master Clock, Boundary Clock, etc will be assumed as the device under test.
To perform Sync Test application, the MT1000A-005 and the MU100090A are
necessary.
Using the MU100090A allows you to perform 1PPS comparison and OWD measurement
based on GPS signal.
The connection between the MU100090A connectors and MT1000A connectors are
described in the following section:
GPS Disciplined Oscillator Interfaces
Click the GPS icon ( ) on Status bar， and set Sync. Mode to GPS. When selecting
1PPS sync in, the clock accuracy of Network Master is not guaranteed.
A connection example between the DUT and the Network Master is shown
below.
Connection Example of Sync Test
1PPS Measurement
Measures Phase error, Deviation, and Filtered TE from 1PPS signals which are
input to two BNC connectors of AUX conversion adaptor.
Reference
1PPS signal
1PPS signal
under test
366
Sync Test
Measurement Result Example

n 1 2 3 4 5 6
δn 0.1 0 0.05 0 0.2 0
Deviation 0.1 0 0.05 0 0.2 0
Phase error 0.1 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.35 0.35
The difference between two BNC cable lengths makes time difference of 1PPS
signals. Therefore it affects the phase error measurement result. You can set the
correction of the time difference caused from the cable length difference at
1PPS cable correction in the Control screen.
Filtered TE displays the phase error passed through the 0.1 Hz bandwidth low
pass filter. The phase error is displayed with suppressed noise.
OWD Measurement
This part explains how to measure the OWD. To perform the OWD
Measurement, select both of Enable IEEE1588v2 and Slave mode on the IEEE
1588v2 screen.
1. DUT (Device Under Test) sends Sync message to Network Master. T1 is the
timestamp of DUT at the time Sync message has been sent. When not using
Follow_Up message, T1 is notified to Network Master by Sync message.
2. τ2 is the timestampe of Network Master at the time Sync message has
arrived.
3. If using Follow_Up message, T1 is notified to Network Master by Follow_Up
message.
4. Network Master sends Delay_Request message to DUT. τ3 is the timestamp
of Network Master at the time Delay_Request message has been sent.
5. T4 is the timestampe of DUT at the time Delay_Request message has arrived.
6. Master clock sends Delay_Response message and notifies T4 to Network
Master.
The OWD calculation formula are

below.
Sync OWD = τ2 - T1
Delay_Request OWD
= T4 - τ3
OWD contains the delay of the optical fiber cable between DUT and Network
Master. TEs (Time error) that the cable delay is subtracted from OWD are
defined as:
TE1= −1 × (Sync OWD) + Δms
367
Δms: The cable delay in direction from DUT (master) to Network Master
(slave).
TE4= (Delay_Request OWD) − Δsm
Δsm: The cable delay from Network Master (slave) to DUT (master).
Δms=Δsm is assumed in OWD Measurement. This value can be set at Ethernet

cable correction in Control screen.
In the Ethernet setting of Sync Test, five buttons appear in the Navigation Area.
Settings in the pages are not common between Port 1 and Port 2.
Port
Settings
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
OAM
To measure OWD, it is necessary to set IEEE 1588v2 to enable and set to Slave
mode.
Select the use of Follow_Up message by Step mode in IEEE 1588v2.
One-step: Does not use the Follow_Up message.

Two-step: Uses the Follow_Up message.
6.13.2 Test Setup
6.13.2.1 Control
screen.
368
Sync Test
Interval length
Measurement period
Allows you to set the time from the measurement start to the stop. Following
values are listed in the pull-down menu.
100 sec, 1000 sec, User defined
1PPS cable correction

Allows to set a correction value of the delay time in ns unit that is caused by
difference of 1PPS cable length.
In the measured phase error value, the phase error and the cable delay are
included.
The cable delay is caused by difference of cable length between Reference
1PPS Input and 1PPS Input.
To measure the phase error precisely, set the correction value to 1PPS cable
correction.
When calculating the delay time from the cable length, it is recommendable to
use 5 ns/m as the conversion factor.
If the cable length of 1PPS Input is longer than one of Reference 1PPS Input,
set a negative number as the correction value.
Phase error is calculated by the measured phase error and 1PPS correction
value.
Other result parameters such as cTE(constant Time Error) are calculated by
using the phase error after correction.
Ethernet cable correction
369
Allows you to set a correction value of the delay time in ns unit that is caused
by the Ethernet cable length between the MT1000A and the instrument under
test.
This value is used to correct the measurement results in Packet TE.
In the Packet TE results, the cable delay caused by the Ethernet cable is
included in addition to that caused by communication between the
measurement target and MT1000A.
To measure the Packet TE precisely, set the correction value to Ethernet cable
correction.
For the detail of items, refer to the Sync Test summary descriptions in Result.
6.13.2.2 Thresholds
Touching the Threshold in the navigation area displays the screen shown
below.
(i.e. limits) for Pass/Fail status that are used during the monitoring.
If measured results are out of the threshold, they will be marked in red on the
Statistics screen.
1PPS Threshold
1PPS deviation
Allows to set the threshold range of 1PPS deviation.
1PPS phase error

Allows to set the threshold range of 1PPS phase error.
1PPS filtered TE
Allows to set the threshold range of filtered TE.
One way Delay
Sync OWD
Threshold (OWD)
Allows to set the threshold range of Sync OWD.
Follow up OWD
370
Sync Test
Allows to set the threshold range of Follow_Up OWD.
Delay req. OWD

Allows to set the threshold range of Delay_Request OWD.
6.13.3 Test Results
6.13.3.1 Summary
Touching the Summary in the navigation area displays the screen shown
below.
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Sync Test.

1PPS TE TE (Time error) represents the phase error (time difference) between the
reference 1PPS signal and the 1PPS signal under test. 'N/A' is displayed if the
1PPS signal has not been detected.
cTE (constant Time Error): Mean value of the phase error

dTE (dynamic Time Error): Deviation value of the phase error
max|TE|: Absolute maximum value of the phase error
Packet TE TE (Time error) represents the time difference calculated from timestamps in
IEEE1588.2 messages. 'N/A' is displayed when the messages from DUT have
not arrived or Network Master behaves as Master clock.
cTE1: Mean value of TE1
cTE4: Mean value of TE4
max|TE1|: Absolute maximum value of TE1
max|TE4|: Absolute maximum value of TE4
371
Terr: Time error between DUT and Network Master
The each formula is shown below.
cTE1 = −1 × (avg. Sync OWD) + Δms

cTE4 = (avg. Delay_Request OWD) − Δsm)
Max|TE1| = Greater absolute value of (−1 × (max. Sync OWD) + Δms) and (−1
× (min. Sync) OWD + Δms)
Max|TE4| = Greater absolute value of(max. Delay_Request OWD − Δsm) and
(min. Delay_Request OWD − Δsm)
Δms = Δsm = Ethernet cable delay
cTE1 + cTE4 (avg. Delay_Request OWD) − (avg. Sync OWD)

Terr = =
2 2
6.13.3.2 1PPS
Touching the 1PPS in the navigation area displays the screen shown below.
In this screen, the 1PPS test results are displayed as a graph, showing the
positions of a time error over time.
CSV export
Outputs measurement results in CSV format.
Content
Select the contents corresponding to the test to display.
Phase error: Phase error (time difference) between two 1PPS signals.
Filtered TE: Displays the Phase error waveform passed through the low pass
filter.
Deviation : Pulse period deviation of the 1PPS signal under test.
When selecting Filtered TE, noise will be suppressed as shown in the following
figure.
372
Sync Test
To zoom out, use the view settings below the graph.
View mode
Last 1000s, Last 100s: Shows a sliding graph area with max. width of 1000
second and 1000 second.
Custom: This is automatically selected when the graph area is
touchmanipulated.
Max vertical axis

6.13.3.3 OWD
Touching the OWD in the navigation area displays the screen shown below.
373
In this screen, the one way delay test results are displayed as a graph, showing
the positions of a time error over time.
Pink line shows maximum one way delay values during one second.
Yellow line shows average one way delay values during one second.
Light green line shows minimum one way delay values during one second.
CSV export
Outputs measurement results in CSV format.
Content
Select the contents corresponding to the test to display.
Sync: Displays the one way delay obtained by using the Sync message
timestamp. This is the delay in direction from DUT to Network Master.
Follow up: Displays the one way delay obtained by using the Follow_Up
message timestamp. This is the delay in direction from DUT to Network
Master.
Delay req.: Displays the one way delay obtained by using the Delay_Response
message timestamp. This is the delay in direction from Network Master to
DUT.
Select Sync when Step mode is set to One-step in Setup tab of IEEE1588v2
screen. Select Follow up when Step mode is set to Two-step.
To zoom out, use the view settings below the graph.
View mode
Last 1000s, Last 100s: Shows a sliding graph area with max. width of 1000
second and 1000 second.
Custom: This is automatically selected when the graph area is touch-
374
Sync Test
manipulated.
Max vertical axis

6.13.3.4 Event Log
BERT application.
6.13.3.5 Statistics
below.

time

375
functions:
Time format
field.
the measurement.
results
Frame
Transmit
SyncE
IEEE 1588v2
PCS
802.3ah
802.1ag/Y.1731
Sync Test
result
376
Sync Test

Results
The result items varies depending on the configuration in Ports Setup screen.
Frame Results
Alarms
Good Frames
Errored Frames
Layer3 Error
Other Frames
Last Received
Frame diff.
Transmit Results
Traffic
SyncE Results
SSM Statistics
Alarms
Rx SSM QL
IEEE 1588v2 Results
Offset Stat
Offset Variance
Mean Path Delay
PDV
Message Stat
Clock Status Stat.
GPS - Wall clock
PCS
PCS 10G
802.3ah Results
802.1ag/Y.1731 Results
Sync Test
Bit rate
Bit rate difference
1PPS deviation
OWD
Bit rate and Bit rate difference values appear if the following time has elapsed.
Nominal Bit Rate Required Time

of the Interface
100 Mbps 64 s
1 Gbps 8s
10 Gbps 8s
377
6.14 Discovery
The Discovery application searches for another Network Masters connecting to the
network. It is also able to change the application running in the discovered Network
Master.
The purpose of this application is to switch the application running in the discovered
Network Master for running the RFC 2544, RFC 6349, or SAT (Y.1564) application.
For example, when the test mode is set to End to end network test in the RFC 2544
application, test can be performed cooperating with opposed side slave equipment by
switching Network Master B application to RFC2544 as shown in figure below.
When the test mode is set to Single ended network test in the RFC 2544 application,
test can be performed cooperating with opposed side reflecting equipment by
switching Network Master B application to Reflector as shown in figure below.
When In-band control is allowed at another port, the Discovery application cannot be
started.
Network Master connecting to the network cannot be discovered under the following
conditions.
The Ethernet application is not running in Network Master.
One of the following applications is running in Network Master:
Cable Test
Pass Through
Ethernet over OTN layer
Allow In-band control is not selected.
Port Setup is set to 10 Gbps WAN.
378
Discovery
The first step after running an application is to set the port interfaces. Set the
port interfaces in the Ports Setup screen, which also provides the port status
information.
In the Ethernet setup of Discovery, the following two buttons appear in the
Navigation area.
Port
Settings
6.14.2 Test Setup
6.14.2.1 Control
The following screen is displayed to set the test of the Discovery application.
In this screen, the Discovery test method is set.
Search Type
Touch the field to select the way to search for Network Master.
Multicast search for inside IP network:

Searches for Network Masters using multicast. This searches for Network
Master in short time.
Unicast search for inside and outside IP network:
Searches for Network Masters using unicast. This searches Network Master
existing in the external network via the gateway. It takes a long time, so the
dialog box appears during the searching.
Sender Information
The sending frame information which is set in the Settings screen is displayed.
379
Unicast Search
When Unicast search for inside and outside IP network is set at Search Type,
set the IP address range of unicast. The IP address changes continuously.
Search Target Count: Set the number of IP addresses to search.
Search Target IP: Set the starting IP address. The ending IP address is
displayed at right hand of the field.
6.14.3 Test Results
Perform Discovery
Touching this icon on the Application tool bar starts the processing for discovering
Network Masters.
6.14.3.1 Summary
The following screen is displayed to check the test results of the Ethernet
In this screen, up to 16 results of searching for Network Masters are displayed.

If password is set to the Network Master, an icon appears in Lock row.
Selecting a line by touching the table enables button operation.
Detail
Touching this button displays the detailed information.
Application change
Touching this button opens the dialog box to change the application running in
Network Master.
Update
Touching this button updates the Current Application row in the table.
380
Discovery
Application
Touch the field to select the application to run in Network Master.
The following items appear according to the Application change setting. These
settings are applied to the application that has been changed.
MAC
Set Source MAC address.
IP
Set Destination IP address and Source IP address.
Gateway
Select the check box to enable Gateway and Network Mask settings.
VLAN
Set Level and ID. Following parameters are fixed value.
Password
When a password has been set to the target Network Master, the Password field
appears. Enter the password which is set to the target Network Master.
Increment to all streams

When SAT (Y.1564) is selected at Application and the check box is selected,
the address values (MAC, IP, VAN) at the multi-stream are set incrementally in
each stream.
381
After switching an application, Answer incoming ARP requests in the Settings screen is
selected.
After switching to the RFC 2544 and SAT(Y1564) application, the following settings are
selected.
Accept Network Master configuration frames in the Settings screen
Use local source addresses for destination on remote side in the Advanced
screen
After switching to the Reflector application, the following settings in the Swap screen
are selected.
Swap all MAC addresses
Swap IP addresses
Swap UDP/TCP ports
For other settings, the same values are used after switching the application.
382
7 OTN Applications
and major dialog boxes) related to OTN-only applications. Sub-screens and
dialogs are described under the main screen from which they are
activated/launched.
The following setting and applications are available:

APS
BERT
RTD
OTN Setup and Status may also be part of the test in following applications.
SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn
Ethernet
CPRI/OBSAI
Fibre Channel
383
OTN Applications
7.1 OTN Setup and Status

An OTUk button in the navigation area of the Ports Setup screen gives you
access to the OTN setup for the transmitter and/or receiver of the currently
selected port.
OTN (Optical Transport Networking) provides support for optical networking using
wavelength-division multiplexing (WDM). OTN is defined in the ITU-T
Recommendation G.709 as a set of Optical Network Elements (ONE) connected by
optical fiber links, able to provide functionality of transport, multiplexing, switching,
management, supervision and survivability of optical channels carrying client
signals.
The OTUk interface uses the optical ports.
When the transmitter is set up with an OTUk interface, touching the Tx button
This screen allows you to enable the optical interface of the OTN transmitter. It
can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port by the button
in Navigation area.
Transmitter SFP/SFP+ is displayed for MU100010A.
384
Mode Select the transmission mode.
Off: OTUk frame is not transmitted.

Normal : Transmits OTUk frames generated in the Network Master.
Through (pass through mode):Transmits the received data.
OH overwrite (pass through mode with Overhead overwrite): Overwrite the
overhead of the received data to OH data generated in Transmit side.
when Transmission is set to Through or OH overwrite.
Timing Source

GPS: The clock provided from the external GPS sensor
When External, GPS or Received is set, the right hand lamp indicates whether
clock is detected or not.
Transceiver Displays the Transceiver information when Optical Transmitter is selected.
7.1.1.2 OTUk Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the transmitter's OTN
layer will launch the screen shown below.
This screen allows you to configure OTUk frame of the currently selected
transmitter. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port
in a separated screen.
To setting up the OTU frame, touch Mapping button at first. Then select the
relevant values for the various containers in the structure shown in the setup
area, either by opening a drop-down menu or by touching a button to launch
an editor dialog.
385
OTN Applications
Note that the changes you make will be reflected in the text displayed in the
OTUk button in the navigation area.
Frame Setup
Mapping
Touch the Mapping button and use the launched dialog box to define the OTUk
frame mapping. The following settings are available:
Output Signal
Client Signal
Multiplexing 1
Multiplexing 2
See a description of the setting options in the Mapping Dialog section below.
FEC Control
Use the drop-down menu to select whether or not to transmit FEC (Forward
Error Correction) data.
No FEC: OTUk data is transmitted without FEC encoding.

RS(255,239): OTUk data is transmitted with FEC encoding. RS(255,239) code is
defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709.
TTI Encoding
Use the drop-down menu to select TTI encoding method.
ITU-T: Corresponding to ITU-T Rec. G.709.
ANSI : All TTI 64 bytes can be edited as the operator specification.
OH
Touch an OH button to launch the corresponding Overhead dialog box.
Depending on whether you have selected multiplexing or not in the frame
mapping, there will be one or more overheads to configure.
The dialog box is described in detail in the Overhead Dialog section below.
Dummy CH
Only displayed when the frame mapping is set to multiplexing. Select the
payload of the dummy channel from the drop-down menu.
Copy: Transmit the copy of the main Tributary Port (TP) data to the dummy
Tributary Port (TP).
Unused: Dummy ODUj data which are generated separately from the Main
ODUj data are embedded into the remained TPs.
TP
Only displayed when the frame mapping is set to multiplexing. Touch the TP
button and use the launched dialog box to set the number of TP or TS. The
selected TP number is showed on the button.
The dialog box is described in the TP/TS section.
386
GFP-F
Only displayed when the client signal is Ethernet. Touch the GFP-F button to
launch a dialog box where you can to select parameters.
The dialog box is described in the GFP-F section.
GFP-T
Only displayed when the client signal is GbE. Touch the GFP-T button to
launch a dialog box where you can to select CSF Replacement.
The dialog box is described in the GFP-T section.
Configure
Only displayed when the client signal is PRBS. Touch the Configure button to
launch a dialog box where you can select pattern type.
length of sequence.
PRBS Pattern Inversion is enabled.
7.1.1.3 Mapping
Touching the Mapping button in the upper left-hand corner of the Ports Setup
screen launches the dialog box shown below.
This dialog box allows you to define OTUk frame mapping.
Output Signal
Defines the bit rate the output from the Tx port.
OTU1: 2.666 Gbit/s
OTU2: 10.709 Gbit/s
OTU2(Ext.OPU2): 10.709 Gbit/s
OTU1e: 11.049 Gbit/s
OTU2e: 11.096 Gbit/s
OTU1f: 11.270 Gbit/s
OTU2f: 11.318 Gbit/s
Client Signal
Defines the Client Signal. The available values change depending on the output
signal type and the application.
387
OTN Applications
For the OTN application

PRBS: PRBS
NULL: Null
For the Ethernet +OTN application

GbE: Giga bit Ethernet (1.25 Gbit/s)
10GbE: 10 Giga bit Ethernet (10.3125 Gbit/s)
Ethernet: Variable rate
For the SDH/SONET/PDn/DSn +OTN application

STM64(Async): Synchronous Transport Module-64 (9953.28 Mbit/s)
STM64(Sync): Synchronous Transport Module-64 (9953.28 Mbit/s)
STM16(Async): Synchronous Transport Module-16 (2488.32 Mbit/s)
STM16(Sync): Synchronous Transport Module-16 (2488.32 Mbit/s)
STM4: Synchronous Transport Module-4 (622.08 Mbit/s)
STM1: Synchronous Transport Module-1 (155.52 Mbit/s)
STS192(Async): Synchronous Transport Signal-192 (9953.28 Mbit/s)
STS192(Sync): Synchronous Transport Signal-192 (9953.28 Mbit/s)
STS48(Async): Synchronous Transport Signal-48 (2488.32 Mbit/s)
STS48(Sync): Synchronous Transport Signal-48 (2488.32 Mbit/s)
STS12: Synchronous Transport Signal-12 (622.08 Mbit/s)
STS3: Synchronous Transport Signal-3 (155.52 Mbit/s)
Trans.(PRBS): PRBS without SDH/SONET header (Same setting as PRBS in
OTN application)
Trans.(Null): Null without SDH/SONET header (Same setting as NULL in OTN
application)
For the Fiber Channel +OTN application

FC100: Fibre Channel 100 Mbyte/s (1.0625 Gbit/s)
For the CPRI +OTN application

614.4 M(CPRI): CPRI Option 1 (614.4 Mbit/s)
Multiplexing 1
Applicable when there are two or more levels of multiplexing. Defines into
which higher order the second level ODU is mapped.
None
ODTU12 (PT=20) : Supports 2.5G Tributary Slot (TS).
ODTU12 (PT=21) : Supports 1.25G Tributary Slot (TS).
ODTU2.ts : Supports ODUflex. One to eight TSs can be selected.
ODTU01 : Supports 1.25G Tributary Slot (TS).
Multiplexing 2
388
Applicable when there are three levels of multiplexing. Defines into which
higher order ODU is multiplexed.
None
ODTU01 : Supports 1.25G Tributary Slot (TS).
7.1.1.4 Overhead
Touching an OH button in the setup area of the Ports Setup screen launches a
dialog box similar to the one shown below.
This dialog box presents detailed information about the overhead and allows
you to configure it. Blue fields are OTU overhead. Green fields except FAS and
MFAS are ODU overhead. Orange fields are OPU overhead.
The actual layout of the dialog box depends on which overhead you are
configuring. The description below provides a general description of the OTN
overhead.
The overhead consists of the following parameters:

FAS, which is the signal for the frame alignment.
MFAS, which is the signal for the multiframe alignment.
SM, which shows the Signal Monitoring.
GCC0-GCC2, which shows the General Communication Channel.
RES, which is the reserved for future international standardization.
TCM1-TCM6, which shows the Tandem Connection Monitoring.
FTFL, which shows the Fault Type and Fault Location.
PM, which shows the Path Monitoring.
EXP, which shows the bytes for experimental use.
APS/PCC, which shows the Automatic Protection Switching and Protection
Communication Control channel.
PSI, which shows the Payload Structure Identifier.
FAS Default defined as: F6 F6 F6 28 28 28. To change a byte value, touch the
relevant byte button to launch the editor dialog box.
If FAS(s) value is changed, a receiver which received the signal with changed FAS might
be able not to detect the frame alignment.
MFAS This field counts the OTU frame number. The value changes from 0 through
255 cyclically.
389
OTN Applications
SM SM consists of the following parameters:

TTI byte (Trail Trace Identifier)
BIP-8 byte (Bit Interleaved Parity level 8 code)
3rd byte:
Bits 1-4: BIP violations (BEI/BIAE)
Bit 5: Signal fail status (BDI)
Bit 6: Frame alignment error (IAE)
Bits 7-8: Reserved for future use
The TTI byte and 3rd byte can both be edited by launching the OTUk SM-TTI
dialog box.
TTI
The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) is a 64-Byte signal that occupies one byte of the
frame and is aligned with the OTUk multiframe.
SAPI (Source Access Point Identifier)
DAPI (Destination Access Point Identifier)
Operator (32-Byte Operator specific)
3rd byte Bit 1-4: BEI/BIAE

Bits 1-4 show BIP violations BEI/BIAE (Backward Error Indication / Backward
Incoming Alignment Error). Only 1011 shows BIAE=true.
Bits 1-4 BIP violations
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 to 1111 0
390
3rd byte Bit 5: BDI

BDI (Backward Defect Indication) is set to "1" to indicate a signal fail status,
otherwise it is set to "0".
3rd byte Bit 6: IAE

IAE (Incoming Alignment Error) is set to "1" to indicate a frame alignment
error, otherwise it is set to "0".
3rd byte Bit 7,8: RES

These bits are reserved.
GCC0-GCC2 These fields are used to carry transmission management and signaling
information. These bytes can be edited in hexadecimal value.
TCM1-TCM6 TCM1-TCM6 consists of the following parameters:

3rd byte:
Bits 1-4: BIP violations (BEI/BIAE)
Bits 6-8: Status (STAT)
The TTI byte and 3rd byte can both be edited by launching the OTUk TCMn-
TTI dialog box, which is similar to the dialog box used to edit SM.
TTI
3rd byte Bit 1-4: BEI/BIAE

Bits 1-4 show BIP violations BEI/BIAE (Backward Error Indication / Backward
Incoming Alignment Error). Only 1011 shows BIAE=true.
391
OTN Applications
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 to 1111 0
3rd byte Bit 5: BDI

3rd byte Bit 6-8: STAT

Bits 6-8 show TCM status.
Bits 6-8 TCM status
000 no source TC
001 in use without IAE
010 in use with IAE
011 Reserved
100 Reserved
101 ODUk-LCK
110 ODUk-OCI
111 ODUk-AIS
FTFL The FTFL message consists of two 128-byte fields. Launch the ODUk FTFL
dialog box to edit the fields.
392
Both messages (Forward and Backward) consist of the following parameters:
FIF (Fault indication field)

Byte Fault indication
0x00 No Fault
0x01 Signal Fail
0x02 Signal Degrade
0x03 to 0xFF Reserved
OIF (Operator identifier field)

CC Country code is a three-character ISO 3166 geographic/political
countrycode (G/PCC).
NSC National segment code is a 1-6 character ITU carrier code (ICC).
Operator (Operator-specific field)

This field is available for operator use. Touching the button launches the
Pattern Editor.
PM PM consists of the following parameters:
3rd byte:
Bits 1-4: BIP violations (BEI)
Bits 6-8: Status (STAT)
The TTI byte and 3rd byte can both be edited by launching the ODUk PM-TTI
dialog box, which is similar to the dialog box used to edit SM.
TTI

3rd byte Bit 1-4: BEI

BEI (Backward Error Indication) shows the count of interleaved-bit blocks that
have been detected in error by the corresponding ODUk path monitoring sink
using the BIP-8 code.
Bits 1-4 shows BIP violations.
393
OTN Applications
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 to 1111 0
3rd byte Bit 5: BDI

3rd byte Bit 6-8: STAT

STAT (Path Monitoring Status) indicates the presence of a maintenance signal.
STAT Signal type
000 Reserved
001 Normal path signal
010 Reserved
011 Reserved
100 Reserved
101 ODUk-LCK
110 ODUk-OCI
111 ODUk-AIS
APS/PCC APS/PCC has four bytes. Requests/Status is defined for First byte. The request
or status is shown in bits 1-4.
The protection type is shown in bit 5-8.
394
Bits 1-4 Meaning
0000 NR (No request)
0001 DNR (Do not revert)
0010 RR (Reverse request)
0011 Reserved
0100 EXER (Exercise)
0101 Reserved
0110 WT (Wait-to-restore)
0111 Reserved
1000 MS (Manual switch)
1001 Reserved
1010 SD (Signal degrade)
1011 Reserved
1100 SF (Signal fail)
1101 Reserved
1110 FS (Forced switch)
1111 Lockout
PSI PSI means Protocol Structure Identifier. This field shows the payload type. You
can either enter a new value directly in the field or select the relevant value
from the PSI[0] drop-down menu.
PSI value Payload type

0x01 Experimental mapping
0x02 Asynchronous CBR mapping
0x03 Bit synchronous CBR mapping
0x04 ATM mapping
0x05 GFP mapping
0x06 Virtual Concatenated signal
PCS codeword transparent Ethernet mapping:

0x07
1000BASE-X into OPU0
0x08 FC-1200 into OPU2e mapping
0x09 GFP mapping into Extended OPU2
395
OTN Applications
PSI value Payload type
0x0A STM-1 mapping into OPU0
0x0B STM-4 mapping into OPU0
0x0C FC-100 mapping into OPU0
0x0D FC-200 mapping into OPU1
0x0E FC-400 mapping into OPUflex
0x0F FC-800 mapping into OPUflex
0x10 Bit stream with octet timing mapping
0x11 Bit stream without octet timing mapping
0x12 IB SDR mapping into OPUflex
0x13 IB DDR mapping into OPUflex
0x14 IB QDR mapping into OPUflex
0x15 SDI mapping into OPU0
0x16 (1.485/1.001) Gbit/s SDI mapping into OPU1
0x17 1.485 Gbit/s SDI mapping into OPU1
0x18 (2.970/1.001) Gbit/s SDI mapping into OPUflex
0x19 2.970 Gbit/s SDI mapping into OPUflex
0x1A ESCON mapping into OPU0
0x1B DVB_ASI mapping into OPU0
0x1C FC-1600 mapping into OPUflex
0x20 ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUjk only (AMP only)
ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUk.ts or ODTUk.ts and

0x21
ODTUjk (GMP capable)
0x55 Not available
0x66 Not available
Reserved code for proprietary use (non-standard payload

0x80
mappings)
0xFD NULL test signal mapping
0xFE PRBS test signal mapping
0xFF Not available
396
7.1.1.5 TP/TS
Touching a TP button on the Ports Setup screen launches the TP/TS dialog
box. Note that the contents and layout of the dialog box depends on which
higher order type has been selected.
This dialog box allows you to define OTUk frame mapping.

Main TP/TS: Tributary Port/Slot number of Measurement target for Lower
order ODU frame.
Dummy TP: Condition of TP/TS(s) other than Main TP/TS. Transmitted signal
is selected by Dummy CH.
Copy: The same signal as Main TP/TS is transmitted.
Unused: Lower order ODU frame constructed of PRBS mapping is
transmitted.
7.1.1.6 GFP-T
GFP-T means Transparent Generic Framing Procedure, defined by ITU-T Rec.

G.7041/Y.1303. When OTN layer is added to Ethernet applications, GFP-T
button appears in the setup area of the Ports Setup screen if Client Signal is
selected to GbE. Touching an GFP-T button launches the below dialog box.
CSF Replacement
Setting behavior of GFP-T when CSF (Client Signal Fail) occurs.
Ethernet Block Replacement :Transmits 10B data to indicate the link error.
GFP-T CSF Replacement :Transmits CSF and IDLE frames CSF is transmitted
with 500 ms interval.
397
OTN Applications
7.1.1.7 GFP-F
GFP-F means Frame-mapped Generic Framing Procedure, defined by ITU-T

Rec. G.7041/Y.1303. When OTN layer is added to Ethernet applications, GFP-F
button appears in the setup area of the Ports Setup screen if Client Signal is
selected to Ethernet. Touching an GFP-F button launches the below dialog box.
PTI
Set three bits of PTI (Payload Type Identifier). When setting PTI to 100-Client
Management, all transmitting GFP-F frames is Client Management Frame.
PFI
Set a bit of PFI (Payload Frame Check Sequence Identifier). On presents
payload FCS (Frame Check Sequence). Off absents payload FCS.
EXI
Set four bits of EXI (Extension header Identifier).
UPI
Set eight bits of UPI (User Payload Identifier). When PTI is 000 Client Data , set
the type of payload. When PTI is 100 Client Management, set the type of
management signal.
cHEC Presync Times

The number of continuous receptions of normal cHEC (core Header error
check) until HUNT status is transited to SYNC status
When the receiver is set up with an OTUk interface, touching the Rx button in
398
This screen allows you to make the physical setup of the receiver in OTN
mode. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port by
the button in Navigation area.
Receiver Touch the button to select the interface.
Off: No signal input interface.
SFP/SFP+: Available bit rate is up to 2.5 Gbit/s for SFP, up to 10 Gbit/s for
SFP+.
7.1.2.2 OTUk Frame Setup
Touching the navigation area button which represents the receiver's OTN layer
will launch the screen shown below.
399
OTN Applications
This screen allows you to configure OTUk frame of the currently selected
receiver. It can also be used to inspect the current status of the selected port in
a separate screen.
To setting up the OTU frame, touch Mapping button at first. Then select the
relevant values for the various containers in the structure shown in the setup
area, either by opening a drop-down menu or by touching a button to launch
an editor dialog box.
Note that the changes you make will be reflected in the text displayed in the
OTUk button in the navigation area.
default setting is Tx. Note that the Port 1 receiver cannot follow the Port 2
receiver.
Frame Setup
Mapping
Touch the Mapping button and use the launched Dialog box to define the
OTUk frame mapping. The following settings are available:
Input Signal
Client Signal
Multiplexing 1
Multiplexing 2
See a description of the setting options in the Mapping section under setup of
transmitter.
FEC Control
Use the drop-down menu to select whether or not to transmit FEC (Forward
Error Correction) data.
No FEC: FEC Decoding (Error Correction) is set OFF.

RS(255,239): FEC Error Correction is active based on RS(255,239) code
defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709.
TTI/PLM detection
Launches the TTI/PLM detection dialog box where you can select detection
method for SM, PM, and TCM1-6.
The dialog box is shown and described in the TTI/PLM detection section.
Auto, TP
Only displayed when the frame mapping is set to multiplexing. Touch the Auto
or TP # button and use the launched dialog box to set the number of TP or TS.
When Manual or Auto detect TS are selected, TP number can be detect
automatically, so "Auto" is shown on the button. Auto detect TP is selected, TP
number can be set directly. So "TP #" is shown on the button.
The dialog box is described in the TP/TS section below.
MSIM detection
400
Only displayed when the frame mapping is set to multiplexing. Touch the
MSIM detection button and use the launched dialog box to set the detection
method of MSIM.
The dialog box is shown and described in the MSIM Detection section.
Configure
Only displayed when the client signal is PRBS. Touch the Configure button to
launch a dialog box where you can select pattern type.
length of sequence.
TCM
Use the drop-down menu to select whether or not to enable measuring TCM
(Tandem Connection Monitoring) alarms and errors.
On : Enables measuring TCM alarms and errors.
Off: Disables measuring TCM alarms and errors.
7.1.2.3 TP/TS
Touching a TP or Auto button on the Ports Setup screen launches the TP/TS
dialog box. Note that the contents and layout of the dialog box depends on
which higher order type has been selected.
TP/TS dialog box has three screen depending on the Mode setting.
7.1.2.4 TTI/PLM detection
Touching the TTI/PLM detection button in the upper right-hand corner of the
Ports Setup screen launches the dialog box shown below.
401
OTN Applications
TTI detection
TTI detection allows you to select the detection method for SM, PM, and TCM1-
6.
Off Disables the TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) detection.
SAPI and DAPI
SAPI, DAPI and Operator (32-Byte Operator specific)
PLM detection
Selecting On enables the PLM (Payload Label Mismatch) detection.
7.1.2.5 MSIM detection
Touching an MSIM detection button on the Ports Setup screen launches the
MSIM Detection dialog box.
The dialog box is used to set the detection method of MSIM (Multiplex
Structure Identifier Mismatch).
Setup Follow
Select the source of the Expected MSI in the drop-down menu. The expected
MSI is displayed in the dialog box.
(None) : MSIM is not detected.
402
Tx Data : Expected MSI are copied from OH Preset data.

Received Data : Expected MSI are set from received MSI data.
This section describes the status information available for the OTN layer in the
The status summary displayed for the OTN layer consists of the following
information:
information.
You can choose whether to view only the current alarm and error status, or to
view all alarms and errors in the alarm trap since it was last reset.

all alarms/errors.
Status
OH capture
Tributary scan
Transceiver
403
OTN Applications
the optical signal.
Rx
Signal Level
Shows the input level of an optical signal. A lamp icon indicates the LOS state.
Frequency
Shows the input signal frequency and the deviation of the input signal from the
nominal bit rate in ppm.
Tx
Signal Level
Shows the output level of an optical signal.
Frequency
Shows the output signal frequency and the deviation of the output signal from
the nominal bit rate in ppm.
404
This screen contains detailed alarm and error information related to the OTN
layer. Status is indicated by the use of colored lamp icons.
Level-specific alarms If the ODUk is multiplexed, touch the relevant OTU/ODUk level button.
Alarms
OTU Alarms
LOS: Loss of Signal.
OTU-AIS: Optical channel Transport Unit Alarm Indication Signal.
LOF : Loss of Frame
OOF : Out of Frame
LOM: Loss of Multiframe
OOM: Out of Multiframe
SM-TIM: Section Monitoring Trail trace Indicator Mismatch
SM-BIAE: Section Monitoring Backward Incoming Alignment Error
SM-BDI : Section Monitoring Backward Defect Indicator
SM-IAE: Section Monitoring Incoming Alignment Error
ODU Alarms
LOFLOM: Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe
ODU-AIS: Optical channel Data Unit Alarm Indication Signal
ODU-LCK : Optical channel Data Unit Locked Signal
ODU-OCI : Optical channel Data Unit Open Connection Indication
PM-TIM: Path Monitoring Trail trace Indicator Mismatch
PM-BDI : Path Monitoring Backward Defect Indicator
PLM: Payload Mismatch
FSF : Forward Signal Fail
FSD: Forward Signal Degrade
BSF : Backward Signal Fail
BSD: Backward Signal Degrade
MSIM: Multiple Structure Identifier Mismatch
CI-AIS: Characteristic Information Alarm Indication Signal
CSF : Client Signal Fail
TCM Alarms
TIM: Trace Indicator Mismatch
BIAE: Backward Incoming Alignment Error
BDI : Backward Defect Indicator
IAE: Incoming Alignment Error
LTC: Loss of Tandem Connection
Errors
OTU Errors
FAS: Frame Alignment Signal
MFAS: Multiframe Alignment Signal
SM-BIP8: Section Monitoring Bit Interleaved Parity 8
SM-BEI : Section Monitoring Backward Error Indication
FEC Corr.: Forward Error Correction Corrected
FEC Uncorr.: Forward Error Correction Uncorrected
ODU Errors
PM-BIP8: Path Monitoring Bit Interleaved Parity 8
PM-BEI : Path Monitoring Backward Error Indicator
OPU Errors
405
OTN Applications
Pattern error: Bit error detected in the payload

TCM Errors
TCMi-BIP8: Bit Interleaved Parity 8
TCMi-BEI : Backward Error Indication
(i=1 to 6)
GMP Errors
CRC8 error: CRC8 error occurred
CRC5 error: CRC5 error occurred
Inc over: Cm(t) value exceeds the upper limit.
Dec over: Cm(t) value exceeds the lower limit.
GFP Errors
cHEC Corr.: core Header Error Check Correctable
cHEC Uncorr.: core Header Error Check Uncorrectable
tHEC Corr.: type Header Error Check Correctable
tHEC Uncorr.: type Header Error Check Uncorrectable
eHEC Corr.: extension Header Error Check Correctable
eHEC Uncorr.: extension Header Error Check Uncorrectable
Invalid GFP frame: Invalid Transport Generic Frame Procedure Frame
Superblock CRC: Superblock where CRC error occurred
CSF signal : Client Signal Fail
CSF sync: Client Signal Fail synchronization
FCS error: Frame Check Sequence error detected
CMF signal : Client Management Frame
CMF sync: Client Management Frame synchronization
SSF : Server Signal Failure
PTI Mismatch: Payload Type Identifier Mismatch
UPI Mismatch: User Payload Identifier Mismatch
7.1.3.4 OH capture
Touching the OH capture button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
406
This screen shows OTU/ODU/OPU OH capture data for one frame at time. Use
the Level drop-down menu to select which multiplexing level to display. For a
description of the frame structure, see the Overhead Dialog box section under
the ports setup of OTN.
If higher order layer is mapped, TP/TS button appears. Touching TP/TS will
launch the dialog box displaying tributary ports/slots of both Tx and Rx.
Refreshing
Refresh once
information
When touch the Pause button, the Update button appears at left side of the
Pause one and information is not updated. Touching the Update button will
refresh the dialog information once.
Refresh continuously
When the dialog is open and touch the Pause button at refresh once mode,
information is updated continuously.
Displaying detailed Detailed overhead byte information can be accessed by touching the name of a
information
specific byte. This will launch a separate dialog box containing a description of
and details about the selected byte.
In the byte-specific dialog box, select the display format (ASCII or Hex) using
the Operator Specific Area drop-down menu.
7.1.3.5 Tributary scan
Touching the Tributary scan button in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
407
OTN Applications
A Tributary scan detects errors and alarms over multiple Tributary Ports
depending on the current mapping settings at the receiver port. The screen
displayed by the Tributary scan button can be used to acquire the tributary
status information.
The screen contains the following buttons: Detail, Scan, Scan Start/Stop. The
Scan button is active when the screen is displayed.
Start scanning
Touching the Scan Start button scans one level at a time. With the Scan button
active (displayed in green), you can select the Tributary Port to scan by
touching the number button. The buttons are shown in green or red according
to the scan result. Note that only one ODUk at the first level is displayed.
Detail
Touching the Detail button enables showing details for a specific ODUk. With
the Detail button active, you can see the detail information by touching the
button in red. The Tributary details dialog box contains the following
information:
Path to the selected form (for example, "ODU2-ODTU12(PT=21)-ODU1 #2")
408
Errors and alarms detected at the selected channel.
Touching the button in green does not launch the dialog box.
To change TP to scan, touch the Scan button.
Tributary Scan Results are cleared, when close the dialog box, move other status area or
move other screens.
Stop scanning
Touching the Scan Stop button stops the scanning session.
7.1.3.6 Transceiver
This screen presents status information about the optical transceiver.


Information
Tune wavelength
7.1.4 Error/Alarm Insertion
409
OTN Applications
This section describes the errors or alarms insertion for the OTN layer on the
Others
OTN: Inserts errors or alarms related the OTN overhead or FEC.
OTN frequency: Adds the frequency offset to the OTU bit rate and Payload bit
rate.
OTN justification : Inserts positive or negative justification bytes of AMP
(asynchronous mapping procedure).
7.1.4.1 OTN
If selecting OTN , the Category drop down menu appears.

Alarms/Errors: Inserts errors or alarms related the OTN overhead.
GMP: Inserts errors to the general mapping procedure parameter.
GFP: Inserts errors to the generic framing procedure parameter.
FEC Test: Inserts errors to the forward error correction bytes in the OTU
frame.
Alarms/Errors
1. Select Alarm or Error using Type drop down menu. If selecting Off, Errors and
Alarms are not inserted.
2. Select the Level .
3. Select the Alarm/Error Item.
4. Select the Insertion Mode.
Single: Inserts an error or an alarm if you touch the Error Insert icon.
Burst: Inserts errors or alarms in counts you have specified if you touch
the Error Insert icon.
frames. The Error Insert icon shows only status.
All : Inserts errors or alarms in all OTU frame. The Error Insert icon
shows only status.
Rate: Inserts errors in the specified rate continuously. The Error Insert
410
5. When selecting Single or Burst, touch the Error Insert icon ( ) to insert
errors or alarms.
GMP
1. Select the Level to insert errors.
2. Select the Error Item.
3. Touch the Error Bits field to edit bits.
4. Touch the Error Insert icon. The error is inserted once by touching the icon.
GFP
The available option depends on the Client Signal of Mapping.
2. Select the Insertion Mode.
3. Touch the Error Bits field to edit bits.
4. If Insertion Mode is set to "Single", touch the Error Insert icon. The error is
inserted once by touching the Error Insert icon.
FEC Test
O.182 Poisson (appears only if Client Signal is PRBS.)
Uncorrectable Error
Correctable Error
2. When selecting O.182 Poisson:
a. Insertion Mode is fixed to "Rate".
Touch the Rate field to set the error insertion rate.
b. Select the Exclude FAS.
Selecting On inserts errors at any position excluding FAS when the
411
OTN Applications
rate is 2.0E-3 or larger. This settings avoids the occurrence of LOF by

inserting errors into FAS.
3. When selecting Uncorrectable Error or Correctable Error:
a. Touch the Sub-row field to set the sub-row.
b. Insertion Mode is fixed to "Single".
Touch the Error Insert icon. The error is inserted once by touching the
icon.
For O.182 Poisson, refer to the white paper on Anritsu homepage:

FEC Efficiency New Test Method - Required by ITU-T New Rec. O.182 -
7.1.4.2 OTN frequency
Touch the field to set Frequency Offset. If setting a positive value, the frequency
will shift higher side.
Example:
If setting 100 ppm to the frequency offset for OTU2 output signal, the bit rate
of output signal will be
10 709 225.316 * (1+100*10-6) = 10 710 296.239 (kbit/s).
Nominal bit rates defined in ITU-T are shown below.

OTU type OTU nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
OTU1: 255/238 * 2 488 320 = 2 666 057.143
OTU2: 255/237 * 9 953 280 = 10 709 255.316
OTU1e: 255/238 * 10 312 500 = 11 049 107
OTU2e: 255/237 * 10 312 500 =11 095 730
OTU1f: 255/238 * 10 518 750 =11 270 089
OTU2f: 255/237 * 10 312 500 =11 317 642
If low order ODU is mapped, Payload Offset field appears. Touch the field to set
the payload offset. The calculated Cm and CnD will be displayed when using
GMP.
7.1.4.3 OTN justification
OTN justification is available when ODTUjk is selected to the Multiplexing 1 in

Mapping dialog box.
1. Select Level to insert the justification.

2. Touch the Burst length field, the dialog box will appear.
3. Select the Movement of the justification.
Positive (+1): positive justification
Positive (+2): double positive justification
Negative (-1): negative justification
4. Touch the Apply Move button to insert the justification bytes.
412
APS
7.2 APS
The APS (Automatic Protection Switching) test measures the switching time in
protecting the system from failure
Switching time is defined below.
The start and stop trigger can be selected independently.

Trigger event can be selected from the high order OTU and ODU.
The pass/fail thresholds for switching time can be set.
Test results include pass/fail, switching time (minimum, maximum and
average) and the measurement count of switching.
The setup options and status information related to the OTN interface are
7.2.2 Test Setup
7.2.2.1 Thresholds
The following screen is displayed for the Test Setup.
413
OTN Applications
This screen contains the parameters for setting up the threshold values for
errors and Pass/Fail status.
Start Trigger, Stop Trigger

Use the drop-down menu(s) to select the appropriate trigger. Start and stop
triggers include the following:
Any errors, LOF, OOF, ODU-AIS etc.
If selecting Any errors, all alarms and errors displayed on the list are treated as
the trigger.
The errors which can be set as the Start Trigger and Stop Trigger do not contain all items
listed in Alarm/Error item on Application Toolbar.
For example, PM-TIM and OTU-FAS are not handled as a trigger even if Any errors is
selected.
Error Free Period

Alarms or Errors set up in stop trigger are not in a measured signal within the
time of this cycle, end the switching time measurement.
Threshold
Allows you to specify the maximum duration of the selected trigger(s). Valid
values are from 0.000 ms to 10000.000 ms.
7.2.3 Test Results
7.2.3.1 Summary
shown below.
414
APS
The following information is displayed:

Start Trigger
Stop Trigger
Average switching time : Average time of switching
Max. Time : Maximum time of switching
Threshold : The threshold value used in the test
7.2.3.2 Detailed
shown below.
This screen presents the detailed results of an OTN APS test. The results relate
to a specific port and consist of the Automatic Switching times of the APS
requests. The data is shown in both list-form and in a graphical presentation.
This screen contains the summary field displayed below the list.
415
OTN Applications
milliseconds, the specified threshold value, the number of measurements.
presentation
times. Results affected by unexpected alarms/errors are indicated.
7.2.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
7.2.3.4 Statistics
416
BERT
7.3 BERT
The Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) described in this section is applicable for OTN
interfaces.
7.3.2 Test Setup
7.3.2.1 Measurement Mode
Touching the Measurement Mode button in the navigation area displays the
following screen.
This screen allows users to switch the application.
Measurement Mode
Touch the field to select the application.
BERT
RTD
APS
Measurement Mode button appears in the Navigation area only when starting the BERT
by Application selector.
7.3.2.2 Control
screen.
417
OTN Applications
This screen allows you to configure the test mode and other general parameters
related to the test.
Interval length
contains the following values: 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15
seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes,
1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours or No Intervals.
Start action
the right.
Stop function
button.
right.
right.
Memory allocation
418
BERT

Performance
Parameters OTN
Select the ITU-T Recommendation applying to the test.

M.2401 (M.2110)
Time period
This parameter is displayed if OTN is set to M.2401(M.2110).
Allocation
Touching the Setup button launches the dialog box shown below.
The dialog box is used to set up various performance parameters.
Type
Select the performance type as either G.8201 or M.2401/M.2110. The contents
of the dialog box depends on the selected performance type.
Allocation
Set the Allocation ratio of OTUk, ODUk or TCMi. These parameters are
displayed if Type is M.2401/M.2110.
Section Objective (SESR)
419
OTN Applications
Set the limit of SESR (Severely Errored Seconds Ratio). SES (Severely Errored
Second) is a one-second period which contains 15% or more errored blocks or
at least one defect.
Section Objective (BBER)

Set the upper limit of BBER (Background Block Errors Rate). BBE (Background
Block Error) is an errored block that occurred during non-SES.
The performance objectives defined in ITU Recommendation are shown in the

following table.
Performance Objectives
G.8201 M.2401
Path type
SESR BBER SESR BBER
ODU1 0.002 4×10-5 0.001 2×10-5
ODU2 0.002 10-5 0.001 5×10-6
7.3.2.3 Thresholds
screen.
a threshold value for the bit error ratio. Select the check box to enable the
parameters.

using the Count, Ratio and Ratio [%] radio buttons, and then specify the value
Transport Select the check box to enable the transport-related parameters.
Interface
Fix to OTN .
420
BERT
Evaluation item
Use the drop-down menu to select the item to evaluate. If selecting other than
Any Alarm or Error, another menu appears.
Evaluation type

7.3.3 Test Results
7.3.3.1 Summary
shown below.
This screen shows the summary of all error count and ratio. You can insert the
pattern error in this screen.
BER
Displays the result of pattern errors and threshold.
Statistics Category
The lamp icon in Status column shows the Pass or Fail results. Touching the
Status column displays the statistics results.
Transport
Displays the result of Pass & fail threshold if Transport is selecting in Test Setup
screen.
Pattern
Select the pattern. You can edit bit pattern when the pattern is User[32] bit or
User[2048] bit.
421
OTN Applications
Pattern Error Insertion

Select the check box to enable the pattern error insertion.
Select Insertion Mode to Single or Rate. When Single is selecting, touch

Alarm/Error Insert icon in the Application Toolbar.
7.3.3.2 Event Log
BERT application.
7.3.3.3 Statistics
below.
view either the current results (i.e. results measured during one second) or the
total results from measurement start. You can also zoom in on a specific result
item. The results can be displayed either in table (list) form or as a graph.

time

functions:
422
BERT
Time format
field.
the measurement.
Selecting type of Open the drop-down menu in the top row plus the drop-down menu below it to
results
select which results you want to display on the screen.
OTN - Alarms/Errors
OTN - Performance

Unformatted e.g. 71892
SI prefix e.g. 71.892 k (k means "kilo")
Engineering e.g. 71.892E3
Scientific e.g. 7.1892E4
Results
OTN - Alarms/Errors OTU/ODU OTU alarms

OTU errors
ODU alarms
ODU errors
Stage1 ODU ODU alarms
ODU errors
Stage2 ODU ODU alarms
ODU errors
Client Client alarms
Client errors
ODU TCM ODU TCMi alarms
ODU TCMi errors
Justification
GFP
OTN - Performance OTU/ODU OTU
ODU
Stage1 ODU ODU
Stage2 ODU ODU
ODU TCM TCMi
423
OTN Applications
OTN Performance Measurement Items

This paragaraph describes the performance result items.
EB (Errored Block) is defined as:

A block in which one or more bits are in error
OTN Performance Parameters

Items Definition
Severly Errored Second
Count: The number of seconds during which 15% or more EBs occurred or
Ratio: Ratio of SES to total seconds in availability time (SESR: Severely

Errored Second Ratio)
OTU/ODU, Stage n ODU ODU/TCM

SES
OCI OCI
AIS AIS
LCK IAE
PLM LCK
TIM LTC
BDI TIM
BDI

Count: EBs that excludes blocks which are determined as SES.
BBE
Ratio: Ratio of BBE to all blocks excluding blocks in SES (BBER:
Background Block Error Ratio)
Unavailable Time
When SES continues for ten seconds, UAS starts from the beginning of the
time. When items other than SES continues for ten seconds, UAS ends at
one second before the time. Refer to the figure of Example of Unavailable
Time Detection.
First, the time (when determining the start of UAS) is not counted as UAS,
and then if determined, the UAS is recounted.
First, the time (when determining the end of UAS) is counted as UAS, and
UAS then if determined, the UAS is recounted. In a word, the values of UAS may
be reduced later. The same is applied to other items.
A bidirectional UAS is counted if forward, backward, or both directions are
in the unavailable state.
424
BERT
Pass/Fail is judged after the Time period set at Performance Test Parameters on
the Control screen has elapsed.
425
OTN Applications
7.4 RTD
The Round-Trip Delay (RTD) time is the duration time of the network and the network
equipments.
Network Master measures RTD using a trigger injected in ODU frame. At first,
Network Master transmits the trigger signal. Network Master measures the RTD
by receiving the trigger signal returned from the network to be measured or the
network equipment.
7.4.2 Test Setup
7.4.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the RTD application, the following screen is
displayed.
selected port(s).
Test Condition
Mode
Allows you to define the test duration in one of two ways:
Single - Used to perform RTD test once.
Repeat - Used when a persistent RTD test is needed.
Measurement period
Measurement period can be set the maximum RTD per one Test.
426
RTD
7.4.2.2 Threshold
screen.
selected port(s).
Threshold
Maximum limit
Allows you to specify a threshold value of RTD in micro seconds (μs).
7.4.3 Test Results
7.4.3.1 Summary
shown below.
This screen presents a summary of the RTD test results, for all of the ports
included in the test. For each port, the information consists of:
The total number of measurements
427
OTN Applications
Minimum, Average and Maximum RTD in micro seconds

Threshold value
7.4.3.2 Detailed
shown below.
This screen presents the detailed results of an RTD test. The result is shown in
both list-form and in a graphical presentation. This screen contains the
summary field displayed below the list.
Summary field Consists of the minimum, maximum, and average round-trip delay times in
micro seconds, the number of measurements, the specified threshold value and
measurement period.
List-form information Presents the results of an RTD test in list-form.
Graphical The graphical presentation consists of a bar diagram of the round-trip delay
presentation
times.
7.4.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
7.4.3.4 Statistics
428
8 CPRI/OBSAI Applications
and major dialogs) related to CPRI (Common Public Radio Interface) and
OBSAI (Open Base Station Architecture Interface) applications. Sub-screens
and dialogs are described under the main screen from which they are
activated/launched.
The following applications are available:

BERT
Pass Through
429
CPRI/OBSAI Applications
8.1 CPRI/OBSAI Setup and Status

CPRI (Common Public Radio Interface) is an interface designed for the
communication inside the base station used for the mobile radio communications.
OBSAI (Open Base Station Architecture Initiative) defines the architecture of the
cellular base station, including the interface between base band block and RF block.
In the OBSAI specifications, this interface is defined as RP3 (Reference Point 3).
The nominal bit rates of CPRI and OBSAI are shown in the following table.
CPRI Line bit rates
Bit Rate Multiplier ×

Option (Mbit/s) Reference bit rate ×
Coding (Mbit/s)
1 614.4 1 × 491.52 × 10/8
2 1228.8 2 × 491.52 × 10/8
3 2457.6 4 × 491.52 × 10/8
4 3072.0 5 × 491.52 × 10/8
5 4915.2 8 × 491.52 × 10/8
6 6144.0 10 × 491.52 × 10/8
7 9830.4 16 × 491.52 × 10/8
8 10137.6 20 × 491.52 × 66/64
430
CPRI/OBSAI Setup and Status
OBSAI Line bit rates
Bit Rate Multiplexer ×

(MBaud) Base bit rate (MBaud)
768 1 × 768
1536 2 × 768
3072 4 × 768
6144 8 × 768
The CPRI/OBSAI uses the optical ports.
When the port is set up with a CPRI/OBSAI interface, touching the Port button
in the navigation area will display the following screen.
currently selected CPRI/OBSAI port. It can also be used to inspect the current
Port mode Select the port mode from the drop-down menu. The possible values are:
Off: The transmission will be disabled.

Normal : The Network Master terminates and transmits the signal generated
in the Network Master.
Through: The Network Master transmits the received data by own port.
Line rate Select the bit rate of the line from the drop-down menu.
431
when the Port mode is set to Through.
Timing Source
When External or Received is set, the indicator on the right is on if the clock is
detected.
8.1.2 CPRI/OBSAI Frame Setup
The CPRI Link or Unframe button appears in the navigation area. Touching the
button will display the screen shown below.
This screen allows you to specify the CPRI Link frame structure of the currently
selected CPRI port.
Content Select the frame type. Available options depend on the Line rate setting.
Unframed: Pattern data without frame.
CPRI Link: CPRI frame structure
Pattern Select a predefined pattern or define a user pattern.
User [32] bit: Pattern of 32-bit length.

The field which shows bit length is enabled. Touch the User pattern field to
open the dialog box where you can define the bit pattern. Refer to The User
Pattern Editor.
PRBS15 to PRBS31: Pseudo-random bit sequence. The number indicates the
bit length of sequence.
Touch Inversion field to invert the bit pattern or not.
432
CPRI Link Set the CPRI Link conditions, if Content is set to "CPRI Link" and Port mode is
set to "Normal".
Start up
Enabled: The line rate, protocol version, and C&M Channel will be decided by
auto-negotiation. You can confirm the negotiated settings in Link of the status
information.
Disabled: The specified line rate, protocol version, and C&M Channel are
applied.
Role
Select the port role from Master or Slave.
Timing setting will be changed to "Received" if setting to Slave.
Protocol
If CPRI Link is set to Disabled, select the CPRI Protocol version from 1 or 2.
Protocol version 2 appears if the line rate is set to 4915.2 Mbps or more.
HDLC
Touch the drop-down menu to specify the Rate of slow C&M Channel.
Options depend on the line rate.
Ethernet
Select the check box if setting fast C&M Channel.
Touch the field to specify the Pointer. To set maximum Ethernet bit rate, set
"20" to the pointer. Actual Ethernet bit rate is proportional to the line rate
excluding 10137.6 Mbps.
CPRI/OBSAI ports setup screen.
The status summary displayed for the CPRI/OBSAI interface consists of the
summary, you can open the dialog box where you can view the detailed status
information.
lamp color.

constantly. By touching the summary, you can open the dialog box where you
can view all alarms/errors.
433
Capture/Monitor At the bottom of the status area, a button that gives you access to the monitor
Status
information By touching the button, you can launch the Transceiver
information display.
launches the dialog shown below.
This screen presents information about the current state of the link.
Rx
Signal level : shows the optical signal level in dBm. If the optical signal
detection failed, a red indicator appears on the right.
Bit rate: shows the actual bit rate of the receiver (in bps).
Deviation : shows the deviation from the relevant nominal bit rate.
Pattern bit rate: shows the bit rate of the pattern in received frames (in bps).
Tx
Signal level : shows the output power of the optical transmitter.
Bit rate: shows the actual bit rate of the transmitter (in bps)
Deviation : shows the deviation from the relevant nominal bit rate.
Pattern bit rate: shows bit rate of the pattern in transmitted frames (in bps).
Touching the lower summary box in the status area of the Ports Setup screen
434
This screen contains detailed alarm and error information related to the
CPRI/OBSAI interface. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Remote and Link are displayed only when the content is set to CPRI.
Alarms
Signal loss: This lights in red when the optical signal is not detected.
LOS: Loss of Signal.
For 614.4 to 9830.4 Mbps, this lights in red when at least 16 8B/10B violations
occur among a whole hyperframe.
For 10137.6 Mbps, this lights in red when at least 4 64B/66B sync header code
violations occur among a whole hyperframe.
LOF : Loss of Frame.
This lights in red when the hyperframe alignment cannot be achieved or is lost
based on CPRI specification.
LSS: Loss of Signal Synchronization.
This lights in red when 10 % or larger bits in the test pattern have occured
errors.
Errors
LCV : Line Code Violations (8B/10B decoding)

SHV : Sync Header Violation (64B/6B decoding)
K30.7: Invalid 10B code (8B/10B decoding)
Pattern error : Bit error of the pattern
Remote
Lights in red when the receiving bit in L1 Inband Protocol is "1". These bits are
located in Z.130.0 in the hyperframe.
Remote LOS: Loss of Signal detection
Remote LOF : Loss of Frame detection
SDI : SAP (Service access point) Defect Indication
Reset: Master - Reset acknowledge, Slave - Reset request
Link
Shows the CPRI Link status.
435
Link State and Port Role appear when Start up is set to Enabled.
Rx
Protocol version
HDLC rate
Pointer
Tx
Protocol version
HDLC rate
Pointer
8.1.3.4 Transceiver
Refer to Transceiver in "Ethernet Setup and Status".
8.1.4 Error/Alarm Insertion
This section describes how to configure settings for inserting errors or alarms
by using the Application toolbar of CPRI/OBSAI.
Others
8.1.4.1 CPRI/OBSAI Alarms
1. Select the CPRI Alarms.

2. Select the Alarm item.
Off: Does not insert alarms.
Permanently: Inserts alarms permanently.
8.1.4.2 CPRI/OBSAI Errors
1. Select the CPRI Errors.

2. Select the Error item.
436

Manual : Inserts the specified number of errors if you touch the Error
Insert icon.
Touch the Burst length field to set the number of errors to insert.
1E-04 to 1E-10: Inserts errors at the specified rate continuously.
4. When selecting Manual , touch the Error Insert icon ( ) to insert an error.
8.1.4.3 CPRI/OBSAI Frequency
1. Select the CPRI Frequencies.

2. Touch the Frequency Offset field to set an offset in ppm. If setting a positive
value, the frequency will shift higher side.
437
8.2 BERT
This section describes the Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) that is applicable to
CPRI/OBSAI interfaces.
After the application is launched, first configure the port interface in the Ports
Setup screen where you can view port status information.
The setup options and status information related to the CPRI/OBSAI interfaces
are described in a separate section:
For applications including an OTN interface, you can find a description of the
setup options and status information for OTN in a separate section:
Refer to the sections relevant to your current port setup requirements.
8.2.2 Test Setup
8.2.2.1 Control
When you proceed to the test setup of the CPRI/OBSAI BERT application, the
This screen contains the parameters that are generally required for BERT test.
Interval length
contains the following values: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 seconds, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min.,
1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours or No Intervals.
Start action
438
BERT

the right.
Stop function
button.
right.
right.
Memory allocation

Performance These items appear if OTN Tx and OTN Rx are selected on Setup screen.
Parameters
OTN
G.8201, M.2401 (M.2110)
Time period
Allocation
8.2.2.2 Delay
Touching the Delay button in the navigation area displays the screen to set
threshold value.
Delay Select the check box to enable the judgement using the threshold value.
439
If selecting check box, Port setup is changed as following:

Content: CPRI Link
Error insertion item: LCV
The check box will be cleared if Content has changed to other options.
Threshold
Allows you to specify a threshold value of Round Trip Delay in micro seconds
(μs).
8.2.2.3 APS
Touching the APS button in the navigation area displays the screen to setup the
APS test.
APS Select the check box for executing APS test during BER measurement.
Reference events
Select the check box of Alarms, Errors or Remote alarms for setting to
reference event.
Error free period

If a reference event is not generated within the time of this cycle, end the
switching time measurement.
Threshold
Allows you to specify a Pass/ Fail threshold value of switching time in
miliiseconds.
8.2.2.4 Thresholds
screen.
440
BERT
Refer to Thresholds of BERT section in "SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn Applications".
8.2.3 Test Results
8.2.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the CPRI/OBSAI BERT application, the
This screen contains a summary of OTN/CPRI/OBSAI BERT results.

Statistics Category The lamp icon in Status column shows the Pass or Fail results for each
category. Touching the Status column displays the statistics results.
Pattern Error Insertion Select the check box to enable the pattern error insertion.
Insertion
Select the timing of the error insertion from the drop-down menu.
441
Off: Stops the error insertion.

Manual
1E-04 to 1E-09
Burst length
If 'Insertion' is set to Manual, touch the button and set the burst length to insert.
8.2.3.2 APS
If APS is selected on the Test screen, APS button appears in Navigation area.
Touching the APS button will display the screen shown below.
This screen shows the duration of all reference events, both in a list and in a
graphic representation. This screen contains the summary field displayed
below the list.
milliseconds, the specified Max. reference duration value, the number of
measurements.
presentation
times. Results may be affected by unexpected alarms/errors.
8.2.3.3 Event Log
BERT application.
8.2.3.4 Statistics
below.
442
BERT
view either the results of a specific time interval or the total results from
measurement start. The results can be displayed either in table (list) form or as
graphs. You can also zoom in on a specific result item and display either a
zoom or a histogram.

time

functions:
Time format
field.
the measurement.
443
Selecting type of Open the left drop-down menu in the top row of buttons to select which results
results
you want to display on the screen.
OTN - Alarms/Errors
OTN - Performance
CPRI - Alarms/Errors
CPRI - Frame
Delay - Round Trip Time
OTN options appear if the CPRI signal is carried by OTN.
Round Trip Time appears if Delay check box is selected on Delay screen in
Test Setup of BERT application.
result

Results

CPRI - Alarms/Errors Results Alarms
Errors
CPRI - Frame Results Frame count
CPRI - Round Trip Delay Results Delay
Measurement count
444
Pass Through
8.3 Pass Through

CPRI/OBSAI Pass Through enables non-intrusive in-service monitoring. All traffic
received on a port is forwarded on the other port and vice versa. Traffic between the
two network DUT elements is monitored as illustrated below.
The setup options and status information related to the CPRI/OBSAI interface
8.3.2 Test Setup
8.3.2.1 Control
Refer to "Control" in the BERT section.
8.3.2.2 Thresholds
Refer to Thresholds of BERT section in "CPRI/OBSAI Applications".
8.3.3 Test Results
8.3.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the CPRI Through application, the following
445
This screen contains a summary of the results of the CPRI Pass Through test.
8.3.3.2 Event Log
BERT application.
8.3.3.3 Statistics
results
CPRI - Alarms/Errors
CPRI - Frame
CPRI - Pass through
446
9 Fibre Channel (FC)
Applications
and major dialogs) related to Fibre Channel applications. Sub-screens and
dialog boxes are described under the main screen from which they are
activated/launched.
BERT
Performance
Reflector
447
Fibre Channel (FC) Applications
9.1 Fibre Channel Setup and Status

Fibre Channel (FC) is a high-speed network technology, commonly running at 1, 2, 4,
8, 16 and 20 Gigabit per second rates. It is primarily used to connect computer data
storage.
The Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP) is a transport protocol similar to TCP used in
IP networks. FCP predominantly transports SCSI commands over Fibre
Channel networks.
Fibre Channel signaling can run on an electrical interface in addition to fiber-

optic cables.
Fibre Channel has five levels (FC-0 to FC-4), where FC-4 is the uppermost level
and FC-0 the lowermost.
FC Level Name Description
Network and channel protocols such as

FC-4 Protocol Mapping
SCSI-3.
Encryption, RAID redundancy

FC-3 Common Services
algorithms etc.
Framing, flow control protocols and

FC-2 Data Delivery classes of service.
Core layer of Fibre Channel.
FC-1 Data Encoding/Decoding 8b/10b encoding.
FC-0 Physical layer Fiber optics or copper cabling.
The Fibre Channel interface uses the optical ports.
448
Fibre Channel Setup and Status
When the port is set up with a Fibre Channel interface, touching the Port button
in the navigation area will display the screen shown below.
currently selected Fibre Channel port. It can also be used to inspect the current
Port mode Select one from the following port mode options:
Off: The transmission will be disabled.

1Gb/s FC100: 100 MBytes/s
Clock Configuration Use the drop-down menu to select the clock source.
Timing Source
When External, GPS or Received is set, the right hand lamp indicates whether a
clock signal is detected or not.
449
9.1.2 Fibre Channel Frame Setup
9.1.2.1 Interface
Touching the Interface button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
Topology Point to Point is the direct connection to the device under test. Select the Login
check box to establish the connection. For FC Reflector, selecting the Login
check box requires peer to do an actual login.
Fabric is the connection using fibre channel switch. Touch Fabric Login button
to access to the fabric login server.
N N-Port: A hardware entity that includes a Link Control Facility, and has the
ability to act as an Originator, a Responder, or both.
F F-Port: The Link Control Facility within the Fabric that attaches to an N_Port
through a link.
E E-Port: A Fabric expansion port that connects to another E_Port to create an
450
Inter-Switch Link.
E-Port is selected when testing an connection port between the fibre channel
switches. Touching ELP button exchanges Exchange Link Parameters with an
E-port.
ELP: Exchange Link Parameters
Flow Control Select the Enable check box to allow the flow control when 'Topology' is set to
Point to Point.
If you are not logged in, touch Remote credit field to set the buffer size of the
flow control.
The field name changes to Local credit when you login.
Local credit: Network Master side BB Credit Count

Remote credit: BB Credit Count of DUT (the oppornent that Network Master
communicate with)
Even if a sufficient number of credits are set, the phenomena that transmitting rate does
not reach 100% may occur when the traffic is being received.
Source When selecting the Default check box, Port WWN (World Wide Number) will be
set automatically. When 'Topology' is set to Point to Point, set the Source
Identifier in the frame header by touching the ID field.
Source settings are not used in the FC Reflector application.
Destination Set the destination Port WWN . When 'Topology' is set to Point to Point, set the
Destination Identifier in the frame header by touching the ID field.
Touch the Port Login button to establish the connection with the destination.
Destination setting is not used in FC Reflector.
Frame Setup Set the Framing type of frames to reflect. Using Point to Point with login or
Fabric requires a header in the frames.
Frame Setup setting is not used in FC BERT.

In Fibre Channel Reflector mode you should activate connection to a FC Switch, after
you have selected framing as SOF:Header:Data:CRC:EOF. If activating connection to a
FC Switch when framing is set to SOF:Data:EOF, all frames outputted from the FC
Switch are reflected to it. This phenomenon may cause malfunction of the FC Switches
on the connected port.
9.1.2.2 Frame
451
Touching the Frame button in the navigation area displays the following
screen. Frame button appears in BERT and Performance applications.
Copy frame content to other ports

This feature allows you to copy the frame content that you are currently
configuring to frame content in another port.
relevant port.
Follow another port
It is possible to let the Port 2 copy the setup from Port 1 by touching the Follow button.
When this button is displayed in green, Port 2 continues to follow Port 1 change. This
button appears when the Port 1 settings can be copy to Port 2.
Frame Setup
Framing
Select the frame structure in the drop-down menu.
SOF:Data:EOF : Start of Frame - Data - End of Frame
SOF:Header:Data:CRC:EOF : Start of Frame - Frame Header - Data - CRC - End

of Frame
Content
FOX : ASCII code bit sequence of "The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy
dog 1234567890".
452
5555: Repetition of "0101010101010101".

PRBS9 to PRBS31: Pseudo-random bit sequence. For PRBS9, its bit length is
511 (=29-1).
HF TEST: High frequency test pattern. (Defined in IEEE802.3 Annex 48A)
CRPAT: Compliant random data pattern.
JTPAT: Jitter tolerance test pattern.
SPAT: Supply noise pattern.
User 32 bit: Repetition of the user defined 32 bits.
ZERO : All bits are "0".
If you select the User 32 bit pattern, you can edit the bit pattern by touching
the right-hand field.
Frame Header Touching the Frame Header field launches the dialog box shown below.
This dialog box allows you to configure the frame header for framed Fibre
Channel signals. The following parameters can be edited:
Seq ID: Unique frame sequence identifier

OX ID: Originator Exchange ID
Rx ID: Responder Exchange ID
The figure below shows the full frame header structure in four bytes by six
rows. The parts which can be edited are shown as colored boxes.
R_CTL Destination ID (D_ID)

CS_CTL Source ID (S_ID)
TYPE Frame control (F_CTL)
SEQ_ID DF_CTL SEQ_CNT
OX_ID RX_ID
Parameter field (PARM)
453
Fibre Channel ports setup screen.
The status summary displayed for the Fibre Channel interface consists of the
most relevant status indicators is displayed constantly. By touching anywhere
in this part, you can open a dialog box that contains the detailed status
information.
information for the selected interface. The status is indicated by the Lamp
color. You can choose whether to view only the current alarm and error status,
or to view all alarms and errors in the alarm trap since it was last reset.

constantly.
opens the dialog shown below.
This screen presents information about the physical state and current state of
the link.
Timing
Bit rate
The currently received bit rate is shown in bits per second (bps).
Bit rate difference

The current difference between the received signal's bit rate and the nominal
bit rate is shown in both parts per million (ppm) and bits per second (bps).
454
Accumulated difference
The accumulated difference between the received signal's bit rate and the
nominal bit rate is shown. The information is presented as the number of bits
of difference detected over the accumulation period.
This is important information for identifying small frequency differences, which may not
be visible by showing the current bit rate difference.
The accumulated difference information is accumulated continuously. The

accumulation is reset when measurement is started or restarted.
Link The link status information consists of the following parameters:
Signal Present
Indicates the detection/loss of a valid signal (bit synchronization).
Sync Acquired
Indicates word synchronization acquired/lost.
Link Status
Indicates the current link status.
Login
Fabric Login
Lamp icon lit in green when login to an F-port.
ELP
Lamp icon lit in green when Exchange Link Parameters have been exchanged
with an E-port.
Port Login
Lamp icon lit in green when login to an N-port.
The middle summary box in the status area of the Ports Setup screen indicates
alarms and errors. Status is indicated by the use of colored Lamp icons.
Traffic: Traffic is detected.

Pattern Sync: Pattern Sync is detected.
Pattern Error: Pattern Error is detected.
9.1.3.4 Transceiver
Refer to Transceiver in "Ethernet Setup and Status" section.
455
This section describes the errors and alarms insertion for the Fiber Channel
interface on the Application toolbar.
Others
9.1.4.1 Fibre Channel alarms
Select an alarm option in the drop-down menu.

None: Does not insert alarms.

Link reset: Inserts Link_Reset primitive sequences.
Ordered Set: K28.5 - D9.2 - D31.5 - D9.2
Link reset response: Inserts Link_Reset_Response primitive sequences.
Ordered Set: K28.5 - D21.1 - D31.5 - D9.2
Not optional : Inserts Not_Operational primitive sequences.
Ordered Set: K28.5 - D21.2 - D31.5 - D5.2
Offline: Inserts Offline primitive sequences.
Ordered Set: K28.5 - D21.1 - D10.4 - D21.2
9.1.4.2 Fibre Channel errors
1. Select an error option in the Error drop-down menu.

None: Does not insert errors.
Bit: Inserts a bit error into the content part of FC frames.
Symbol : Inserts a symbol of 10 bit pattern which makes a 10b/8b
conversion error.
R_RDY:Inserts a symbol of 10 bit pattern which makes a 10b/8b
conversion error.
When Port mode is set to FC1000, this option does not appear.
CRC: Inserts a bit error into CRC part of FC frames.
When Framing is set to SOF:Header:EOF , this option does not appear.
2. In the Insertion drop-down list, select an insertion mode.
456
Manual : Inserts the specified number of errors if you touch the Error
Insert icon.
Burst / sec: Inserts the specified number of errors in one second
periodic.
Burst / 10 sec: Inserts the specified number of errors in ten second
periodic.
Burst*1E-02 to Burst*1E-07: Inserts errors of burst length at the
specified rate continuously.
For example, Error burst length is set to 3 and Burst*1E-06 is selected,
the three errors will be inserted per one million blocks. The Error
Insert icon shows only status.
3. Touch the Burst length field to set the number of errors to insert.
4. When Insertion is set to Manual , touch the Error Insert icon.
9.1.4.3 Fibre Channel frequency
Touch the field to set Fibre Channel frequency. Enter the desired deviation in
the Tx Deviation field. A positive value increases the frequency.
457
9.2 BERT
BERT stands for Bit Error Rate Testing or BER Testing. The bit error rate is a key
parameter in assessing systems that transmit digital data from one location to
another (that is, systems such as radio data links, fiber-optic data systems, Ethernet
etc.).
The setup options and status information related to the Fibre Channel interface
FC Setup and Status
Refer to the sections relevant for your current port setup requirements.
9.2.2 Test Setup
9.2.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the Fibre Channel Bert application, the
This screen contains the parameters that are generally required in a BERT test
setup.
Interval length
contains the following values: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 seconds, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 min.,
1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours or No Intervals.
458
BERT
Start action
the right.
Stop function
button.
right.
right.
Memory allocation

Performance These items appear if OTN Tx and OTN Rx are selected on Setup screen.
Parameters
OTN
G.8201, M.2401 (M.2110)
Time period
Allocation
BERT Options
Count lost frames as pattern errors
Enabling this function means that if a frame is lost, all test pattern bits in the
frame are considered errored and will be included in the pattern error counter.
459
The receiver uses a filter to determine which frames should be counted in the
results. When this function is enabled, the following fields are required to
match:
Source ID
Destination ID
R_CTL (=0x00, Uncategorized FC-4)
Type (=0xE0, vender unique type)
When this function is not enabled, the following fields are required to match:
Most significant byte of R_CTL should be equal to 0. (FC-4 data)
Only show BER Alarms when measuring

BER alarms in Interface status dialog box is enabled only when the
measurement is running. This function allows to avoid the BER alarms
occurrence when no data is input.
9.2.2.2 Generator
Touching the Generator button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
This screen contains the traffic-related parameters.

Traffic duration Allows you to set conditions concerning frames transmission. Choosing
Continuous will make a continual test sequence. Alternatively, the duration can
be set manually in either Seconds or Frames, coupled with a specification of
the number of seconds/frames in the adjacent field.
Automatically start and stop traffic generator with the test

Select this check box to make the traffic generator start and stop synchronously
with the test starting/stopping.
9.2.2.3 Stream
Touching the Stream button in the navigation area displays the following
screen.
460
BERT
Stream profile
Line load
Refer to "Line load in "Ethernet Applications" for the operation.
Frame size
Touch Constant field to set the fixed frame size for the duration of the test.
Frame size does not include byte counts of SOF and EOF.
Set the Frame size to a multiple of 4.
Stream Measurement Select one or more of the measurements (Jitter, Latency and Service
disruption) on both of transmitter and receiver and then specify a threshold
value for each.
If selecting Service disruption, specify the threshold frame count by touching

Min. disruption field.
9.2.2.4 Thresholds
screen.
461
BERT Threshold
monitoring Pattern errors
Allows you to enable monitoring of pattern errors (i.e. bit errors) and to set up

using the Count, Ratio and Ratio (%) radio buttons, and then specify the value
Jitter, Latency, Service disruption

Select one or more of the measurements (Jitter, Latency and Service
disruption) and then specify a threshold value for each. Any measurements
whose maximum duration time exceeds the threshold value will be marked in
red on the Test Result screen.
Fibre Channel When you select the check box, you can enable various thresholds. Touch the
Setup button to display the Fibre Channel threshold setup dialog box.
For setting example, refer to Example in "Ethernet threshold setup".

Transport This setting appears in case of BERT on OTN.
When you select the check box, you can enable alarm or error thresholds.
Interface
Fixed to OTN.
Evaluation item
462
BERT
menu appears.
Evaluation type

9.2.3 Test Results
9.2.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Fibre Channel BERT application, the
This screen contains a summary of the results of the Fibre Channel BERT test.
The information includes such things as number of pattern errors, average and
maximum disruption time, and number of exceeded thresholds.

Refer to the Summary of BERT in "Ethernet Application".
When Fibre Channel is selected on 'Threshold' of the Test Setup screen, the
Fibre Channel information appears in the upper right-hand corner, shows
pass/fail status summary. Touching the Details button allows you to inspect the
individual pass/fail status.
Pattern Error insertion This provides the same Error insertion as Stimuli setup options in Application
Toolbar.
463
Insertion
If selecting Manual, error(s) are inserted when you touch the Alarm/Error
Insert ( ).
Set Off to stop the error insertion.
Burst length
If 'Insertion' is set to Manual, touch the button and set the number of errors to
insert.
9.2.3.2 Event Log
BERT application.
9.2.3.3 Statistics
below.
view either the results of a specific time interval or the total results from
measurement start. The results can be displayed either in table (list) form or as
graphs. You can also zoom in on a specific result item and display either a
zoom or a histogram.

time

464
BERT
functions:

Time format
field.
the measurement.
results
OTN - Alarms/Errors
OTN - Performance
BERT or Reflector (Depends on application)
Link
Frame
Performance
Size Distribution
OTN options appear if the FC signal is carried by OTN.

result
465

Results

BERT Results BER
Latency
Jitter
Service Disruption
Reflector Results Reflected Frames
Reflected Bytes
Not Reflected Frames
Not Reflected Bytes
Total Frames
Total Bytes
Link Results Symbol Errors
Ordered Sets
Frame Results Traffic
Errors
Performance Results Line rate
Frame rate
Utilization
Throughput
Size Distribution Results Size Dist.
Frame Size
Abbreviation
The following abbreviations are used in the description of Link results.
LR Link Reset
LRR Link Reset Response
NOS Not Operational
OLS Offline
RF Remote Fault
R_RDY Receiver Ready
466
Performance
9.3 Performance
The FC Performance test is one of the methods to evaluate the network quality and
defines many tests to determine the performance characteristics of the network
device or entire network. Network Master includes several physical setups (test
modes) and five different tests.
Throughput Test
The throughput is the maximum rate at which a DUT (Device Under Test) can
forward frames without frame loss for a specific frame size. That is, the
maximum rate at which the number of test frames sent by the DUT is equal to
the number of test frames sent to it by the test equipment.
Traffic Profile Test
Traffic Profile Test measures actual throughput with varying the line load in up
to ten steps. For each selected frame size, a set of throughput steps defined by
user will run and actual measured throughput will be recorded.
Latency Test
Latency Test is the delay time from sending the frame from Network Master to
returning the frame to Network Master. This test measures the latency when
frames are sent at maximum throughput measured in Throughput Test. The
latency dispersion is measured as jitter.
To run this test, it is required to perform Throughput Test at the same time.
Burst Test
Burst Test measures the number of frames in the longest burst that the DUT
will handle without the loss of any frames.
Credit Test
Credit Test measures the minimum credit value that can output the maximum
throughput measured in Throughput Test.
To run this test, it is required to perform Throughput Test at the same time.
The first step to run an application is to set the port interfaces. Set the port
interfaces in the Ports Setup screen, which also provides the port status
information.
are described in the following section:
FC Setup and Status
For applications also including an OTN interface, refer to the setup options and
status information for OTN in the following section:
Refer to the sections corresponding to the required port setup.
467
9.3.2 Test Setup
Restriction of Number of Steps

FC Perf. measures the throughput, traffic profile, latency, burst, and BB credit
count while changing the load applied to the DUT by changing the
transmission rate and size of the Ethernet frame. In addition to the final results,
Network Master retains the measurement results at each load as an
intermediate results, but 500 steps are retained at maximum. Depending on the
setting of the steps, it is possible to retain more than 500 steps, but in that case
the oldest measurement result(s) will be discarded.
Also, depending on the setting, only the results of one category (throughput,
traffic profile, latency, burst, or BB credit count) may be retained in large
amount disproportionately. In order to avoid this, Network Master organizes
the results so that results at least 100 steps remain as shown in the examples
below.
However, Traffic Profile and Credit (when BB Credit Count is set to Stepped)
start the next test when the number of steps has reached the number of
measurable steps.
Example 1

Setup are retained
Throughput 100 100
Burst 200 200
Credit 500 200*
*: The test is stopped when the 200th step is measured because the
number of total steps reaches 500.
Example 2

Test Setup the measurement results
are retained
Throughput 500 300*1
Burst 200 100*2
Credit 100 100
In the test setting, the total number of steps can be set to more than 500. In this
case, a warning is displayed on the Summary screen when the measurement is
started.
The number of test steps can be calculated by the following formula.
Number of steps = f × l
f: Number of Frame Size steps
l: Number of Line Load steps
In the following setting example, the number of steps is 50.
468
Performance
f=5 Five frame sizes, 64, 256, 512, 1024, and 2140 bytes are selected.
l=10 With the settings of Min. 10%, Max. 100%, and Step 10%, line load steps are ten,
10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 100%.
Number of steps= f × l = 5 × 10=50
9.3.2.1 Control
The following screen is displayed by touching Control in the Navigation area.
Specify the test mode and select the test to be performed in this screen.
Select Test Mode Two different test modes are available:
Port to Port Test

Loopback Test
Select the test mode to define your test configuration. Refer to Test Mode
Descriptions.
Test Selection Select one or more of the following tests:
Throughput
Traffic Profile
Latency
Burst
469
Credit
When a test is selected, the test setup screen including the setup parameters related to
the test can be used. Similarly, the test results include only the test selected at Test
Selection.
Test Mode Descriptions

Port to Port test
In this test mode, the facing test of Network Master and the FC instrument is
performed.
Loopback test
This test is used when testing network by reflecting traffic back to the Network
Master. This requires a device to reflect the traffic back e.g. a second Network
Master.
Frame Size (Bytes) There are three methods to specify the size of the fiber channel frame sent
during the test.
Frame Size (Bytes) is a byte length from header to CRC. It does not include SOF and
EOF.
User defined
Check the check box and select the following frame size:
64, 128, 256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280, 2140, and 2168 to 3240 (Set the frame size
using the field at the right bottom.)
Stepped
Set Start frame size, End frame size and Step frame size. The frame size is
started from the value set at Start frame size, and increased/decreased until
the value set at End frame size at intervals of the value set at Step frame size.
470
Performance
Set the parameters so that the number of frame sizes is ten or less. When the number of
frame sizes is 11 or more, the message "Maximum of 10 frame sizes is allowed." is
displayed.
Example:
Start frame size: 100, End frame size: 1500, Step frame size: 100
In this case, the number of frame sizes is 15 (100 to 1500). Measurements are
performed for the frame sizes from 100 to 1000, not for 1100 to 1500.
The Stepped mode is useful when testing various frame sizes that are distributed
consistently and equally. As a consequence, it produces more smooth and detailed
graphs when a low value is set at Step frame size. When the step frame size is lower, the
measurement time is longer.
Constant
Set a value at Frame size.
9.3.2.2 Throughput
The following screen is displayed by touching Throughput in the Navigation

area.
Auto Search
Mode
Select the search method.
Smart: It is assumed that occurring the frame loss is a higher probability
around Max. And the skewed binary searching is performed. (The area where
the line loads is high is searched at first.)
Binary: The binary searching of the line load interval specified in the range
from Max to Min is performed.
Resolution
471
Select an Auto search resolutions from 0.1, 1.0 or 10.0 %.
Max Line Load

Set the maximum line load of Auto search. The unit is Percent or Mbps.
Duration
Step
Specify an approximate duration for each step of the test by time.
9.3.2.3 Traffic Profile
The following screen is displayed by touching Traffic Profile in the Navigation

area.
Line Load Set a line load of the Traffic Profile test. The unit is Percent or Mbps.
Duration
Step
9.3.2.4 Latency
The following screen is displayed by touching Latency in the Navigation area.
472
Performance
Duration
Step
9.3.2.5 Burst
The following screen is displayed by touching Burst in the Navigation area.
Frames per Burst

(Burst Length) Auto Search
When the check box is selected, the burst length is automatically searched.
Select Search Mode. The resolution is selected from 1, 10, or 100.
The range of searching the burst size is set at Start burst size and End burst
size.
Stepped
The burst size is changed in steps. The range of changing the burst size is set at
Start burst size and Stop burst size. And the change amount per step is set at
Step burst size.
When the burst size is set as follows, it is changed from 100 to 900 (100 -> 300 -> 500 -
> 700 -> 900).
Start burst size: 100
End burst size: 1000
Step burst size: 200
9.3.2.6 Credit
The following screen is displayed by touching Credit in the Navigation area.
473
BB Credit Count BB Credit Count (buffer-to-buffer Credit_Count) is a counter used for Buffer-to-
buffer flow control management
BB Credit Count is defined as the number of unacknowledged or outstanding

frames awaiting R_RDY responses from the directly attached Fiber Channel
Port.
Auto Search
The minimum local credit that realizes the maximum throughput is searched in
the range from 1 to the number set at End credit size. However, the minimum
local credit is not searched in the range that is three times or more of the
remote credit size.
Select Search Mode. The resolution is selected from 1, 10, or 100.
Stepped
BB Credit Count is changed in steps. The range of changing BB Credit Count is
set at Start credit size and End credit size. And the change amount per step is
set at Step credit size.
When BB Credit Count is set as follows, it is changed from 100 to 900 (100 -> 300 ->
500 -> 700 -> 900).
Start credit size: 100
End credit size: 1000
Step credit size: 200
Duration Step
Specify the approximate duration in time of each step of the test.
9.3.2.7 Advanced
The following screen is displayed by touching Advanced in the Navigation

area.
474
Performance
This screen sets the measurement method of Measured Throughput for the
results of subsequent tests. The displays of the measurement results are not
changed even of the Advanced settings are changed after completing the
measurement.
Throughput, Traffic Profile, Latency, and Credit
Throughput Calculation Layer Selection

Line Rate: For 1Gb/s to 8Gb/s, the throughput is calculated after encoding
8B/10B. For 10Gb/s, the throughput is calculated after encoding 64B/66B.
L1: Layer 1. For 1Gb/s to 8Gb/s, the throughput is calculated before encoding
8B/10B. For 10Gb/s, the throughput is calculated before encoding 64B/66B.
L2: Layer 2. Data field in FC frame.
Throughput Type
A throughput is measured in every one second. For example, when a test step
is ten seconds, a throughput is measured ten times during one step.
When Maximum throughput is selected, the maximum value of the measured

values in all steps is set as the test result.
When Average throughput is selected, the average value of the measured values
n all steps is set as the test result.
9.3.3 Test Results

Graphical The results of the performed FC Performance tests can be presented in either
representation
tabular form or as graphical representations. The graphical representation
mode provides an overview of the results and the progress of the test.
475
Two modes can be switched using Detail or Summary.
9.3.3.1 Summary
The following screen is displays by touching Summary in the Navigation area.
This screen presents the current status of the test(s) (Configured / Not started,
Running, Completed or Not Configured). Touching the State button of the
specific test displays the screen where the detailed result information is
displayed.
9.3.3.2 Throughput
The following screen is displayed by touching Throughput in the Navigation

area.
476
Performance
This screen displays the results of the Throughput test.
The measured throughput values are shown in a bar chart.
The following items are displayed in the result table.

Step: Step numbers in Throughput test
Fr size: Frame size defined in Control screen
Frames: Number of sent frames
Frame rate: Number of frames sent per second
Util: Utilization in percent
Load: Number of bits sent per second
Act Load / Tput: Number of frames received per second
This is a measured throughput.
Frames lost: Difference between sent frame count and received frame count
9.3.3.3 Traffic Profile
A screen similar to Throughput is displayed by touching Traffic Profile in the

Navigation area.
This screen displays the results of the Traffic Profile test.
The line load and measured throughput values are shown in bar charts.

Loss rt: Frame loss ratio in percent
It is calculated using the following formula:
Frame lost × 100
Loss ratio =
Frames
477
9.3.3.4 Latency
A screen similar to Throughput is displayed by touching Latency in the

Navigation area.
This screen displays the result of Latency test.
The latency and measured jitter are shown in bar charts.

Latency: Delay time of frames
Jitter: Latency time variation
9.3.3.5 Burst
A screen similar to Throughput is displayed by touching Burst in the

Navigation area.
This screen displays the result of Burst test.
The maximum burst length is shown in a bar chart.

Burst size: Number of frames per Burst
Back Pressure: Utilization in percent
9.3.3.6 Credit
A screen similar to Throughput is displayed by touching Credit in the

Navigation area.
This screen displays the result of Credit test.
The measured throughput is shown in a bar chart.

Credit Size: Sent value of BB credit count
478
Performance

9.3.3.7 Event Log
BERT application.
9.3.3.8 Statistics
479
9.4 Reflector
In Fiber Channel Reflector mode, the Network Master loops incoming traffic on a
port, swapping ID addresses.
FC Setup and Status
9.4.2 Test Setup
9.4.2.1 Control
When you go to the test setup of the Fibre Channel Reflector application, the
480
Reflector
For operation, refer to Control in "BERT" section.
9.4.2.2 Thresholds
screen.
Transport settings appear if the FC signal is carried by OTN.

For operation of Fibre Channel and Transport, refer to Thresholds in BERT
section.
9.4.3 Test Results
9.4.3.1 Summary
When you go to the test results of the Fibre Channel Reflector application, the
481
This screen contains a summary of the results of the FC Reflector test. The
information includes such things as number of errored frames and number of
exceeded thresholds.
The three dials showing Utilization, Errored frames and Throughput results.
Utilization, Errored frames and Throughput can be enlarged by touching on
them. The black needle points the measured value in the latest period.
When Fibre Channel is selected on 'Threshold' of the Test Setup screen, the
Fibre Channel information appears in the upper right-hand corner, shows
pass/fail status summary. Touching the Details button allows you to inspect the
individual pass/fail status.
Transport
Displays the results of Transport test. This result appears if 'Transport' check
9.4.3.2 Event Log
482
Reflector
BERT application.
9.4.3.3 Statistics
below.

Interval or total results Touch the Total button to switch the total values measured in all interval times.

functions:

Time format
483
field.
the measurement.
results
Reflector
Link
Frame
Performance
Size Distribution
result
item. The Count and Ratio fields are displayed on a Zoom tab page. A
Histogram tab page is also available. Use the Back button to return to the
statistics screen.


484
10 Utility Applications
This chapter describes the applications on Utilities screen of Application
Selector.
Scenario
GPS
PDF Viewer
VIP
Wireshark
485
Utility Applications
10.1 Scenario
Scenario application executes applications according to the description in the
scenario file. The contents of the scenario file can be edited by using the
MX100003A MT1000A/MT1100A Scenario Editor Software on the PC.
If the scenario files are not loaded, only Scenario manager icon appears on the
Utilities screen.
If the scenario file has loaded, that icon is displayed on the Utilities screen. The
icon of the scenario varies depending on the definition in the scenario.
An example of the scenario icons
Displaying / hiding of the icon can be switched by the Scenario manager

screen setting.
10.1.1 Scenario Manager
When you go to the test setup of the Scenario Manager, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen provides following operations:

Loading a scenario file
Switching displaying the icon of the scenario or not
Saving the scenario to file
Deleting the scenario in the table
Loading a scenario file
1. Touch the on Application Toolbar.

2. Select the file using the dialog box.
3. Touch Open .
4. The contents of the loaded scenario appear in the table. Icon, Test name and
486
Scenario
Note are defined in the scenario. They cannot be edited on the Scenario
Manager screen.
Editing the scenario

1. Touch the row of the scenario in the table.
2. Touch Edit button. The Edit screen appears.
3. Touching the Value field opens the dialog box.
Touch the SETUP at the bottom of the screen to return to the setup screen.
The warning icon appears at right of Resource Assignment when the

port defined in the scenario does not exist. In this case, touch the
Value field and set the available port(s).
Exporting the scenario to the file

Allows user to save the edited scenario.

2. Touch Export button. The dialog box appears.
3. Enter the file name, then touch Save.
Deleting the scenario

This operation deletes the scenario in the table.
2. Touch Delete button.
3. The confirmation dialog box appears. Touch Yes.
Hiding/showing the scenario icon

Touch Hide button to switch showing or hiding the scenario icon.
Hide: Does not show the scenario icon on the Utilities screen (Displayed
currently).
Show: Shows the scenario icon on the Utilities screen (Not displayed
currently).
487
10.1.2 Running the Scenario
When scenario is loaded, the icon appears in Scenario of Utilities screen. If

touching the icon, the following screen is displayed.
This screen displays the Pass/Fail results and status of the scenario execution.
Select the check box for the application name you want to run.
To run the scenario, touch in the Application Toolbar.
Results folder
The destination folder to save the result file is displayed. Touch the field to
open the dialog box and select the folder. If selecting Auto , the folder name will
be generated automatically.
Application and the result display

In the upper table, Application name, Port number for test use, and comment
which are written in the scenario are displayed. If the scenario has executed,
the test result and the result file name appear in the each column.
Status indication during Scenario execution

In the lower table, the status of the application and the time that has occurred
are displayed.
488
Scenario
An example of the scenario execution
Save results
1. Touch the on Application Toolbar

2. Set the file name using the dialog box displayed.
3. Touch Save button.
Generating the report
1. Touch the on Application Toolbar

2. Setup Report Generator using the dialog box. For details, refer to "Report" in
Application Toolbar.
3. Touch Generate button.
489
10.2 GPS
GPS application logs NMEA format data received from the GPS receiver. According to
the NMEA format data, the locations of satellite are displayed on the chart.
10.2.1 Test Setup
When you go to the test setup of the GPS application, the following screen is
displayed.
Test Time Select the how to stop the test.
Log until buffer is full : The test stops when the buffer memory is full with the
log data. It takes around 13 hours to fill the buffer.
Timed (or until buffer is full): The test stops when the specified time has
elapsed or when the buffer memory has become full.
Days, Hours, Minutes

Touch the field to set the test time.
10.2.2 Test Results
When you go to the test result of the GPS application, the following screen is
displayed.
490
GPS
This screen displays positions of satellite and the logged data. Touch a left top
button to switch the result to display.
Satellites: Displays the satellite positions by the chart and the table.
Console: Displays the logged data received from GPS receiver.
Touch to start a test.
Current Time
The time received from GPS appears.
Status
Active: Data have been received from GPS receiver.
Stopped: Data reception from GPS receiver has stopped.
Time Left
When Timed is selected on the Test setup screen, the remaining test time is
displayed.
Satellites
Sky View
Radius of the circle

corresponds to the
elevation. The
position at circle edge
is where the elevation
is 0 degree.
Clockwise angle
corresponds to the
azimuth. Top of the
circle corresponds to
north.
Satellites Data of the received satellites are displayed.
PRN: Displays the satellite number. (Pseudo-Random Noise sequences)
491
Elev: Elevation
Azim: Azimuth
SNR: Signal to Noise Ratio
Depending on the SNR value, the text color varies in green, blue, or red.
Console
Text Console The logged data in text data are displayed. You can save the logged data by
touching icon on the Application Toolbar.
The log data format follows NMEA 0183 rev4.0 that is widely used in the GPS
technology.
492
PDF Viewer
10.3 PDF Viewer

PDF Viewer allows you to view PDF files, for example, Operation Manual, report files
created by the Network Master, etc.
Opening the PDF file

Touching the File Open icon ( ) on Application Toolbar opens the dialog box,
where you can select a PDF file you want to open.
Scrolling the window

The page number is displayed at bottom center of the screen. Touching < or >
next to the page number allows you to move the page.
Right hand scroll bar allows you to scroll the view vertically.
The following functions are not supported.
Zoom in and out
Link
Search
Bookmarks
493
10.4 VIP
VIP (Video Inspection Probe) application allows you to view the edge surface of an
optical fiber by using the optional accessory Video Inspection Probe. The captured
image and analysis results can be saved to files.
10.4.1 Application Toolbar
Icons for VIP use appear on Application Toolbar.
Capture
Touch the Capture icon to capture the current displaying image. When Auto Focus is
selected in Setup screen, touching this icon performs autofocus and capturing the
image.
Press for Live image
Touch the Press for Live image icon to display the live image on the screen.
Analyze Image
Touch the Analyze Image icon to start analyzing the captured image.
Save
Touch the Save icon to save the image and analysis results to files.
Load
Touch the Load icon to load a following file.
Image file (*.png)

Analysis result file (*.vipi)
Only Load Save icon appears on the Expanded Application toolbar.

The VIP images and analysis results can be loaded by touching the icon.
The analysis result file (extension vipi) is compatible with following models.
MT9083 Series Access Master
MU909014x, MU909015x μOTDR Module
10.4.2 Connecting the Video Inspection Probe
Connect the USB connector of the Video Inspection Probe to Network Master.
494
VIP
Replace the adaptor of the Video Inspection Probe with one that matches the
optical connector.
For handling the Video Inspection Probe, refer to the operation manual that
came with the Video Inspection Probe.
Network Master also supports following the Video Inspection Probes.
OPTION-545VIP USB 200/400x Video Inspect Probe

G0293A Video Inspection Probe Lite
G0306A Video Inspection Probe
At the lower left area of the screen, this icon indicates the connection status of
the Video Inspection Probe.
10.4.3 Test Setup
When you go to the test setup of the VIP application, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen allows you to configure the parameters related to a VIP test.
Probe Setup
Probe Model
When G0306A, G0306B, or G0382A is connected to Network Master, the
model is displayed. Otherwise, select the model of the Video Inspection Probe.
Tip Type
Select the tip type to use.
495
Test Profile
Select the observing fiber type. Limits which will be judged as "Pass" are shown
in tables.
In the following tables, "None" means that the fiber has no scratches or defects.
"No limit" means that there is no limit to the number of scratches or defects.
For example, "None >3 μm" the fiber has no scratches or defects which is
larger than 3 μm.
SM PC>45: Single Mode Fiber, Physical Contact, Return Loss is more than 45
dB.
Zone Name Defects Scratches
Core None None
No limit <2μm
No limit ≤3μm
Cladding 5 from 2 μm to 5 μm
None > 3μm
None >5 μm
Adhesive No limit No limit
Contact None ≥10 μm No limit
SM APC: Single Mode Fiber, Angled Physical Contact
Core None ≤4
No limit <2 μm
Cladding 5 from 2 μm to 5 μm No limit
None >5 μm
SM PC>25: Single Mode Fiber, Physical Contact, Return Loss is more than 25
dB.
2 ≤3 μm 2 ≤3 μm
Core
None > 3 μm None > 3 μm
No limit ≤2μm
No limit ≤3μm
Cladding 5 from 2 μm to 5 μm
3 > 3μm
None >5 μm
MM PC 62.5: Multi-Mode Fiber, Physical Contact, Core diameter 62.5 μm
4 ≤5 μm No limit ≤3μm
Core
None >5 μm 0 > 5μm
No limit ≤2μm
No limit ≤5μm
Cladding 5 from ≤2 μm to ≤5 μm
0 > 5μm
None >5 μm
MM PC 50.0: Multi-Mode Fiber, Physical Contact, Core diameter 50 μm
Limits are the same as MM PC 62.5.
Auto Functions Auto Measurement
496
VIP
When it is recognized that the fiber edge surface is in the image, Auto Focus,
Auto Capture, Auto Analyze On Capture, and saving a file are performed
automatically.
Auto Measurement is available for G0306A, G0306B, and G0382A.
Auto Focus
When it is recognized that the fiber edge surface is in the image, autofocus and
capture are performed.
If it cannot be recognized that the fiber

edge surface is in the image, VIP may
not perform autofocus. In that case, get a
focus using < or > button on G0382A.
Auto Focus is available for G0382A.
Auto Capture
When it is recognized that the fiber edge surface is in focus, the image is
captured automatically.
Auto Capture is available for G0306A, G0306B, and G0382A.
Auto Analyze On Capture

Executes Auto Analyze when the image has been captured.
Auto File Name Generation

File name is generated automatically when saving the file. Selecting the check
box activates Auto File Name Settings.
Auto File Name
Settings File Location
Touch the Browse button to select a folder to save files.
File Prefix
Touch the field and set the string used in the file name. Touching Quick Matrix
at bottom of File Prefix Edit dialog box opens Input Text dialog box to register
string.
To register string, touch a blank button. Touching labeled button adds the
string to file name.
497
Import/Export: Saves string on buttons to a file or loads string from a file.

Reset: Erases string on all buttons.
Cancel : Discards edited string and closes dialog box.
OK : Applies edited string and closes dialog box.
Start Number
Touch the field and set the start number of value used in the file name.
Include Date
If selecting the check box, date will be appended in the file name.
Include Number
If selecting the check box, a file number will be appended in the file name.
The file name to be generated first is displayed under this item.
10.4.4 Test Results
When you go to the test results of the VIP application, the following screen is
displayed.
This screen displays the image captured by the Video Inspection Probe.
Analyzing an image of the fiber edge surface is also available.
Analyzing an image When Auto Capture is not selected, follow the procedure below:
1. Touch .
498
VIP
2. Touch .
After the analysis finishes normally, the results appear in the table.
If Overlays On is selected, the circles showing the analysis area appear.
3. Adjust image position by touching Zoom buttons or PAN buttons.
When using G0382A, pressing

the M button on VIP starts
capturing and analyzing an
image.
The items in tables are:

[Zone]: Name of the analysis area
[Dia. (μm)]: Measurement result of the diameter
[Defects]: Judgement result of defects
[Defect Count]: Number of measured defects
[Area (μm2)]: Total area of the detected defects
[Scratch]: Judgement result of scratches
[Scratch Count]: Number of measured scratches
Overlays On
If selecting the check box, the circles showing the analysis area appear.
499
10.5 Wireshark
Wireshark allows users to analyze captured Ethernet frames.
Wireshark is used to analyze the capture files. There are some restrictions on functions
because Ethernet interface is not connected. For example, "Capture" and "Telephony"
menus are not available.
When Wireshark is started, the following screen appears.
To open a file, touch the "File" menu, and then touch "Open".
500
11 Specifications
501
Specifications
11.1 MT1000A
This section contains specifications for the Network Master Pro, MT1000A
(mainframe).
11.1.1 Configuration
- Main Frame -
MT1000A Network Master Pro
- Standard Accessories -
J1565A Line Cord USA *1
J1566A Line Cord Europe *1
J1567A Line Cord UK *1
J1568A Line Cord Australia *1
J1594A Line Cord Japan *1
J1596A Line Cord Korea *1
J1720A Line Cord China *1
G0309A AC Adapter
G0310A LiION Battery
B0690A Softbag
B0728A Rear Panel Kit
Z1746A Stylus
Z1747A Carrying Strap
Z1748A Handle
Z1817A Utilities ROM *2
W3681AE MT1000A Quick Reference Guide
*1: One of these power cord come with according to a shipping destination.
*2: Following manuals are stored:
W3682AE MT1000A/MU100010A Network Master Pro Operation
Manual
W3736AE MT1000A Network Master Pro MT1100A Network Master
Flex Remote Scripting Operation Manual
W3810AE MT1000A Network Master Pro OTDR Modules Operation
Manual
W3859AE MT1000A Network Master Pro OTDR Modules Remote
Scripting Operation Manual
10580-00423 MT1000A/MU100040A Network Master Pro Operation
Manual
- Options -
MT1000A-003 Connectivity for WLAN/Bluetooth
MT1000A-005 AUX I/O
MT1000A-ES210 2 Years Extended Warranty Service
502
MT1000A
- Optional Accessories -
B0691A Hard case
B0691B Hard case
B0720A Rear Cover
B0729A Screw 1U
B0730A Screw 2U
B0731A Screw 3U
B0732A Screw Kit
B0733A Hard Case
G0324A Battery Charger
G0325A GPS receiver
J1569A Car 12 Vdc adapter
W3682AE MT1000A Operation Manual
- Modules -
MU100010A 10G Multirate Module
MU100020A OTDR Module 1310/1550nm SMF
MU100021A OTDR Module 1310/1550/850/1300nm SMF/MMF
MU100022A OTDR Module 1310/1550/1625nm SMF
MU100040A CPRI RF Module
11.1.2 External Interfaces

Internal Clock Accuracy ±4.6 ppm or less, STRATUM 3 compliant
Ref Clock Input BITS (DS1 1.544 Mbit/s), SETS (E1 2.048 Mbit/s), 2MHz Clock, 10MHz Clock
ITU-T G.703 compliant
Connector BNC Jack

Range ±100ppm
Service interface USB (A x 2,mini B x 1 Port, Revision 2.0)
RJ45 Ethernet (10/100/1000 BASE-T)
WLAN (2.4GHz IEEE802.11b/g/n)
Bluetooth (BT2.1+EDR)
3.5mm Audio Jack
AUX Connector (for connection of optional G0325A GPS receiver)
AUX I/O When AUX I/O option is set, the interface is available by combining with
J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor.
J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor is a standard accessory of the MU100090A.
Ref 1PPS Input TTL 50Ω/DC

1PPS Input TTL 50Ω/DC
Remote Control Ethernet, GPIB (USB-GPIB)
11.1.3 Other Interfaces

Input device Power switch, Touch panel
LCD 9 inch display with WVGA resolution (800x480 pixels).
503
Specifications
LED On, Standby, Charge

Speaker Built-in monaural speaker
Storage Memory 1GB for User use
11.1.4 Environment Performance

Voltage DC 18 V
100 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz 3.62 A Max. (with dedicated
AC
AC adaptor)
Battery Dedicated 10.8 V Rechargeable smart Li-ion battery
Power consumption 65 W max.
Battery Charging Time 3 to 6 hours (at 25°C, typical)
Temperature range Operating: 0°C to +50°C, ≤85%RH (non-condensing) *

Charging
0°C to +40°C, ≤85%RH (non-condensing)
battery:
-30°C to +60°C, ≤90%RH (Excluding battery and
AC adapter)
Storage: -20°C to +50°C, ≤90%RH (Including battery and
AC adapter)
(non-condensing)
*: The maximum allowed charging temperature will be reduced
if the instrument is switched on.
EMC EN61326-1 and EN61000-3-2.

LVD EN61010-1.
Wireless Certification For countries and regions permitting WLAN use, refer to the following URL.
http://www.anritsu.com/ja-JP/test-
measurement/support/downloads/brochures-datasheets-and-
catalogs/dwl16689
11.1.5 Mechanical Performance

Size 163(H) x 257.6 (W) x 43.5(D) (Excluding projections)
Mass 1.6 kg max.
504
MU100010A, 10 G Multirate Module
11.2 MU100010A, 10 G Multirate Module

In the following you find specifications for the Network Master Pro
MU100010A module. The MU100010A specification lists the functionality
added to the basic Network Master Pro by installing the MU100010A option.
Refer to the Specifications, MT1000A section for further information about the
Network Master Pro's basic functionality.
- Module -
MU100010A 10G Multirate Module
- Standard Accessories -
B0692A ESD box *
*: Up to four SFP+/SFPs can be stored.
- Options -
MU100010A-ES210 2 Years Extended Warranty Service
- Basic Option (Software) -
MU100010A-x01 Up to 2.7G Dual Channel
- Protocol Option (Software) -
Ethernet:
MU100010A-x11 Ethernet 10G Single Channel
MU100010A-x12 Ethernet 10G Dual Channel
MU100010A-x20 TCP Throughput
OTN:
MU100010A-x51 OTN 10G Single Channel
MU100010A-x52 OTN 10G Dual Channel
MU100010A-x61 ODU Multiplexing
MU100010A-x62 ODU Flex
CPRI/OBSAI:
MU100010A-x71 CPRI/OBSAI Up to 5G Dual Channel
MU100010A-x72 CPRI/OBSAI 6G to 10G Single Channel
MU100010A-x73 CPRI/OBSAI 6G to 10G Dual Channel
SDH/SONET:
MU100010A-x81 STM-64 OC-192 Single Channel
MU100010A-x82 STM-64 OC-192 Dual Channel
Fibre Channel:
MU100010A-x02 FC 1G 2G 4G Dual Channel
MU100010A-x91 FC 8G 10G Single Channel
MU100010A-x92 FC 8G 10G Dual Channel
505
Specifications
11.2.2 External Interfaces

Test signal interface SFP/SFP+: 2 Slots
SFF-8431, SFF-8472 compliant IEEE 802.3ae-2002, IEEE802.3-2008
compliant
RJ45: 2 Sockets
IEEE802.3-2008 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T compliant
Auto MDI-X
10/100 Mbps Full/Half Duplex, 1000 Mbps Full Duplex
RJ48: 2 Sockets
RTT
4 ports
BANTAM:
ANSI DS1.102 compliant
BNC: 4 ports
Simultaneous 2 ports
Measurement Port
Bit Rate Standard Bit Rate Interfaces

10BASE-T: 12.5 Mbit/s RJ-45
100BASE-TX: 125 Mbit/s RJ-45
1000BASE-T: 1.25 Gbit/s RJ-45
100BASE-XX: 125 Mbit/s SFP
1000BASE-XX: 1.25 Gbit/s SFP, SFP+
10GBASE-XX: 10.3125 Gbit/s SFP+
STM-1/OC-3: 155.52 Mbit/s SFP
STM-64/OC-192: 9953.28 Mbit/s SFP+
OTU1: 2.666057143 Gbit/s SFP
OTU2: 10.70922532 Gbit/s SFP+
OTU1e: 11.04910714 Gbit/s SFP+
OTU2e: 11.09572785 Gbit/s SFP+
OTU1f: 11.27008929 Gbit/s SFP+
OTU2f: 11.31764241 Gbit/s SFP+
10GFC: 10.51875 Gbit/s SFP+
8GFC: 8.5 Gbit/s SFP+
4GFC: 4.25 Gbit/s SFP, SFP+
2GFC: 2.125 Gbit/s SFP, SFP+
1GFC: 1.0625 Gbit/s SFP
506
E1: 2.048 Mbit/s RJ-48/BNC

E3: 34.368 Mbit/s BNC
E4: 139.264 Mbit/s BNC
DS1: 1.544 Mbit/s RTT Bantam
DS3: 44.736 Mbit/s BNC
STM-1e/STS-3: 155.52 Mbit/s BNC
CPRI1: 614.4 Mbit/s SFP
CPRI2: 1228.8 Mbit/s SFP
CPRI3: 2457.6 Mbit/s SFP, SFP+
CPRI4: 3072.0 Mbit/s SFP, SFP+
CPRI5: 4915.2 Mbit/s SFP+
OBSAI 1x: 768 Mbit/s SFP
OBSAI 2x: 1536 Mbit/s SFP, SFP+
OBSAI 4x: 3072 Mbit/s SFP, SFP+
OBSAI 8x: 6144 Mbit/s SFP+
Bit rate offset range of Relative to Bit Rate:
transmitter
PDH/DSn: -125 to +125 ppm
SDH/SONET: -50 to +50 ppm
OTN -50 to +50 ppm
Ethernet: -100 to +100 ppm
CPRI/OBSAI: -100 to +100 ppm
Bit rate tolerance of Relative to Bit Rate:

receiver
PDH/DSn: -150 to +150 ppm
SDH/SONET: -100 to +100 ppm
OTN -100 to +100 ppm
Ethernet: -100 to +100 ppm
CPRI: -100 to +100 ppm
Optical Output Bit Rate Refer to Bit Rate.

Optical Input Bit Rate Refer to Bit Rate.
507
Specifications
Electrical Output 1.5M/2M Output 1.5M/2M balanced output

Bit Rate Refer to Bit Rate.
Pulse mask ITU-T G.703 compliant
Code/Interface
1.544 Mbits/s AMI/B8ZS Bantam 100Ω
(Balance)
2.048 Mbits/s HDB3 or AMI RJ-48 120Ω
2M to 139/45/156M Output
Pulse mask ITU-T G.703 compliant
Code/Interface 2.048 Mbits/s HDB3, BNC 75 Ω
(Unbalance) 34.368 Mbit/s HDB3, BNC 75 Ω
44.736 Mbit/s B3ZS, BNC 75 Ω
139.264 Mbit/s CMI, BNC 75 Ω
155.520 Mbit/s CMI, BNC 75 Ω
Return Loss
(Unbalance)
10/100 /1000M Output
RJ-45
Code/Interface IEEE802.3-2008 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
compliant
Electrical Input 1.5M/2M Input
Code/Interface 1.544 Mbits/s AMI/B8ZS, Bantam 100 Ω
(Balance) 2.048 Mbits/s HDB3, RJ-48 120 Ω
DS1 Short Haul:
Sensitivity
15 dB linear attenuation , 0 dB cable attenuation, nominal
(1.5M)
impedance
TERMINATE:
Up to 36 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
DSX MONITOR:
15 dB to 25 dB linear attenuation, nominal impedance
BRIDGED:
Up to 36 dB cable attenuation, high impedance
TERMINATE:
Sensitivity (2M)
Up to 40 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
MONITOR:
20 dB to 26 dB linear attenuation and up to 6 dB cable attenuation,
nominal impedance
20 dB to 30 dB linear attenuation, 0 dB cable attenuation, nominal
impedance
BRIDGED:
508
2M to 139/45/156M Input
Code/Interface 2.048,34.368 Mbit/s HDB3, BNC 75 Ω
(Balance) 44.736 Mbits/s B3ZS, BNC 75 Ω
139.264,155.52 Mbits/s CMI, BNC 75 Ω
Sensitivity TERMINATE:
(2.048Mbit/s) Up to 40 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
MONITOR:
20 dB to 26 dB linear attenuation and up to 6 dB cable
attenuation, nominal impedance
20 dB to 30 dB linear attenuation, 0 dB cable attenuation,
nominal impedance
BRIDGED:
(34.368/44.736Mbit/s) Up to 12.0 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
MONITOR:
20 dB linear attenuation and up to 12 dB cable attenuation,
nominal impedance
20 dB to 30 dB linear attenuation , 0 dB cable attenuation,
nominal impedance
(139.264/155.52Mbit/s) Up to 12.0 dB cable attenuation, nominal impedance
MONITOR:
20 dB linear attenuation and up to 12 dB cable attenuation,
nominal impedance
10/100 /1000M Input
RJ-45
Code/Interface
IEEE802.3-2008 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T compliant
Return Loss ITU-T G.703 compliant
Jitter generation Optical interface: ITU-T G.783 compliant
Electrical interface: ITU-T G.823, ANSI T1.403, ANSI T1.404 compliant
Jitter Tolerance
Optical interface: ITU-T G.825, ITU-T G.8251 compliant
Electrical interface: ITU-T G.823, ITU-T G.824 compliant
Rx Bit Rate counter Bit Rate Refer to Bit Rate.
Accuracy According to the Internal Clock of MT1000A.
1PPS Phase Compares the phase between Ref 1PPS Input from AUX I/O and 1PPS Input
Comparison
when MT1000A-005 and MU100090A are combined.
Accuracy: ±5 ns

Battery operating time Operating time: 4 hours (Typ.)
25°C, Depending on operating condition
509
Specifications
Temperature and Operating: 0°C to +50°C, ≤85%RH (non-condensing)

Humidity range
-30°C to +60°C, ≤90%RH (Excluding battery and AC

adapter)
Storage:
-20°C to +50°C, ≤90%RH (Including battery and AC
adapter)
(non-condensing)
Laser Safety IEC 60825-1:2007 Class 1
FDA 21CFR1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser

Notice No.50, dated 2007-June-24.
EMC EN61326-1 and EN61000-3-2.
LVD EN61010-1.

Size MU100010A only: 163(H) x 257.6 (W) x 38.5(D) (Excluding projections)
When combined to MT1000A: 163(H) x 257.6 (W) x 77(D) (Excluding
projections)
Mass MU100010A only: 1.1 kg max.
When combined to MT1000A: 2.7 kg max. (Including battery (G0310A))
510
11.3 MU100090A High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator

The following sections describe the specifications for the Network Master Pro
MU100090A module.
- Module -
- Standard Accessory -
J1702A GPS Antenna 1
J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor 1
J1710A BNC Cable (20cm) 2
- Options -
- Optional Accessory -
J1705A AUX Conversion Adaptor
J1706A GPS Antenna
J1710A BNC Cable (20cm)
11.3.2 Electrical performance and function

Internal Clock Rubidium oscillator
Aging:
2.5×10-11 (Daily)
1×10-10 (Monthly)
1×10-9 (Yearly)
External Interfaces 10MHz Clock Output Connector: BNC Jack

Level: TTL, 50 Ω
1PPS Output Connector: BNC Jack
Level: TTL, 50 Ω
Holdover: 300 ns per 10000 s
Holdover should be executed after Rubidium oscillator

is:
turned power on for three hours or more
and
synchronized with GPS or external 1PPS for 30
minutes or more
At constant temperature
1PPS Sync Input Makes built-in Rubidium oscillator synchronize with 1PPS.
Connector: BNC Jack
Level: TTL, 50 Ω
Input Frequency Range: ±10 ppb
511
Specifications
Antenna Connector: SMA Jack

Feeding Antenna: +3.3 V, +5 V (Selectable, 50 mA max.)
AUX Connector: D-sub 9 pin
LED indicator GPS: Lights when receiving signals of four or more satellites
(green).
OSC: Lights when the oscillator is locking to the signal (green).
11.3.3 GPS Synchronization

Supported Signal GPS L1 C/A Code
Number of receivable 50
channels
Synchronization
45 ns rms
accuracy
(to UTC time) After Rubidium oscillator is:
turned power on for three hours or more
and
synchronized with GPS or external 1PPS for 30 minutes or more
At constant temperature

Power DC: 18 V
Power consumption:
20 W max.
(65 W max. when combined with MT1000A)
Temperature range Operating:

0 to +50°C, ≤85%RH (non-condensing)
Charging battery:
0 to +40°C, ≤85%RH (non-condensing)
Storage:
-30 to +60°C, ≤90%RH ((Excluding battery and AC adapter)
-20 to +50°C, ≤90%RH (Including battery and AC adapter)
(non-condensing)
EMC EN61326-1, EN61000-3-2

LVD EN61010-1

Size MU100090A only: 163(H) x 257.6 (W) x 25(D) (Excluding projections)
When combined to MT1000A and MU100010A: 163(H) x 257.6 (W) x
102.2(D) (Excluding projections)
Mass MU100090A only: 0.8 kg max.
512
Measurement Functionality
11.4 Measurement Functionality

11.4.1 Ethernet Measurements
Cable test Identifies failures on electrical cables like short-circuits or breaks of a wire pair
and indicates the distance from the instrument to the fault.
Transmitter Clock Reference Clock
Internal clock
External clock
BITS
SETS
2MHz
10MHz
GPS
Received clock
IEEE1588v2
Frequency deviation Refer to Bit Rate

measurement
Frequency Offset ±100 ppm 1 ppm step

SyncE functionality Specify quality level (QL) of the transmitted Ethernet signal.
SyncE functionality is available when the interface bit rate is 10Gbps or less.
Analysis of QL indicated in received Ethernet signal. An alarm is raised on

missing QL indications.
SyncE results
SSM Rx count and rate

SSM Tx count
Indicated QL statistics
SSF seconds
ESMC messages capture

ESMC messages can be captured and exported in a Wireshark compatible
format.
IEEE 1588v2 Timing master/slave

functionality
Each port of the Ethernet interface can act as a timing master or a timing
slave independently.
Supported modes: Multicast (native PTP) and Unicast (G.8265.1). When acting
as master in Unicast (G.8265.1) mode, one slave is accepted at a time, other
slaves are ignored. If the slave requires 32, 64 or 128 Sync messages per
second, the IEEE 1588-2008 paragraph 7.7.2.1 concerning 90% confidence
interval is not followed.
Configurable parameters (per port):

Clock identity
Port number
513
Specifications
Priority 1
Priority 2
Domain number
Clock class
Slave only mode
Time source
Encapsulation
Announce receipt timeout
Clock accuracy
Clock step mode
Announce interval
Sync interval
Minimum delay request interval
IEEE 1588 clock results:
Clock state
Announce count
Sync count
Follow-up count
Delay request count
Delay response count
Delay follow-up count
Peer delay request/response/response-follow-up counters
Maximum/Minimum/Average offset
Maximum/Minimum/Average offset deviation
Maximum/Minimum/Average offset variance
Maximum/Minimum/Average mean path delay
Maximum/Minimum/Average peer mean path delay
Maximum/Minimum/Average path delay variation
UTC time offset
With a GPS signal present, the offset from UTC time is calculated.
Parent clock results:

Identity and Port number.
Grand-master results:
Identity
Class
Accuracy
Priority 1
Priority 2
Announced- and observed offset variance.
Foreign master clock results (up to five clocks per port):
Identity
Port number and Announce count
The following IEEE 1588 events are counted and logged:
Clock state transitions

State transition events
514
Faults and Changes in grand-master clock
IEEE 1588 messages can be captured and exported in a Wireshark compatible

format.
WAN
Terminology
SDH, SONET
Transmitter, Receiver Supported encapsulations (frame formats)
EtherType ll (DIX v.2)

IEEE 802.3 with 802.2 (LLC1)
IEEE 802.3 with SNAP
Variable line rate traffic generation
Up to full line rate
Transmitter Frame size
From 44 bytes to 16,000 bytes
Receiver settings
User-defined expected preamble length (3 to 15 bytes)

User-defined IFG lower threshold * (8 to 15 bytes)
User-defined Jumbo frame size upper limit (1519 to 16000 bytes)
*: Only for Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps (cannot use 10Gbps)

Traffic generator Line load profile
Constant: 0.0008% - 100%
Ramp:
Line load: start, end, step (0.0001% resolution)
Duration: 3 to 3600 seconds
Ramp mode: Keep end line load, Repeat ramp, Invert ramp
Frame size profile

Constant
Stepped:
Frame size: start, end, step (to 16000 bytes)
Duration: 1 to 3600 seconds
Random:
Frame size: start, end (to 16000 bytes),
User-defined TCP/UDP frame size upper limit (2048 bytes)
Traffic duration
Continuous
Seconds: 1 to 2,000,000,000
Frames: 1 to 2,000,000,000
Unicast/broadcast
User-defined traffic mix of unicast and broadcast frames
VLAN
515
Specifications
User-defined VLAN ID and VLAN priority
Address
Configurable IP and Ethernet source and destination addresses (supports

IPv4 and IPv6 addressing). Fixed, DHCP, DNS.
Flow control
Generate pause frames
Respond to pause frames
ARP
Answer incoming ARP request On/Off
IP
Fixed or incremented IP identifier
User programmable DSCP/TOS byte
UDP/TCP
User programmable UDP/TCP address

UDP Checksum: automatic or fixed (null)
TCP checksum: automatic
Status, Results Status

Link status, RF, Signal present, Jabber detected, Frames present, Speed, Full
or half duplex, Interface type, Local clock (Ethernet 1000), Pause capable and
Asymmetric pause request (excluding 10Gbps), Link partner capabilities
(excluding 10Gbps)
Resolution
User-defined resolution for statistical measurements:

1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30s, 1, 5, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours.
Performance statistics
Maximum/Minimum/Average utilization
Maximum/Minimum/Average user and total throughput
Maximum/Minimum/Average frame rate
Maximum/Minimum/Average frame latency
Maximum/Minimum/Average packet jitter
Frame statistics
Total frames
Total valid frames
Unicast/multicast/broadcast frames
Pause frame
VLAN frame
MPLS frames
MPLS-TP frame
PBB frame
VLAN Max/Min level
MPLS Max/Min level
516
Fragmented frames
Oversized and Undersized frames
FCS errored frames
Error symboled frames (Excluding 10Gbps)
Code violation frames (For 10Gbps)
Collisions (10/100 Mbps half duplex)
Preamble Violations
IFG violations
Local Fault (For 10Gbps)
Remote Fault (For 10Gbps)
Last Received VLAN 1-8 (ID/Priority)
Last Received MPLS 1-8 (Label/Priority/TTL)
B-Tag, I-tag (ID/Priority)
Burst statistics
Disabled in case of the OTN client.
Total frames in burst

Good/Bursted frames
Number of Bursts
Maximum/Minimum/Average burst size
Frame distribution statistics
Total valid/good frames

64 - 127 byte frames
Total number of jumbo frames
Maximum/Minimum/Average frame size
Filters
Up to 8 filter conditions can be defined. Each condition can filter on:

IP or MAC source address
IP or MAC destination address
Broadcast address
IEEE OUI value
Encapsulation type
VLAN ID
VLAN tag priority
MPLS
MPLS-TP source/destination MAC
PBB source/destination MAC
PBB I-tag/B-tag
TCP/UDP source and destination port
User-defined pattern at a defined offset
Adjustable thresholds
Utilization
Throughput
517
Specifications
Errored frames
Collision rate
Unicast frames
Multicast frames
Broadcast frames
Pause frames
Fragmented frames
Undersized frames
Oversized frames
FCS errored frames
IFG violations (Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps)
Preamble violations
Difference between Tx and Rx
DHCP
Show source IP address assigned by DHCP.

Show current lease expire time.
Show IP addresses of primary and secondary DNS server when obtained by
DHCP.
Error generation For LAN
IFG (For 10/100/1000 Mbps), FCS, Preamble, Error symbol/block

Wrong IP checksum, fragmented IP, Wrong layer4 checksum
BERT Pattern error, BERT sequence error
For WAN
SDH:
A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI
SONET:
A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, REI-P
Alarm generation For LAN

No link
Local fault (For 10 Gbps)
Remote fault
For WAN
SDH:
LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-TIM, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-TIM, HP-
PLM, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, LCD
SONET:
LOS, LOF, OOF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P,
RDI-P, LCD-P
WAN OH Capture Item

SOH/TOH: 64 Frames
POH: 64 Frames
Pathtrace:J0/J1/J2 (Displays in ASCII characters)
Timing
518
Single
Repeat : Update period 1s
Frame Capture Buffer size

1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 MB
Frame slicing
Whole frame, Top 64 Bytes, Top 32 Bytes
Buffer handling
Stop when full, Overwrite
Capture transmitted frames

on, off
Trigger Type
Manual, Error, Field match
Trigger Position
Top, Middle (Only when Trigger Type is Error/Field match)
Error Type
Any Type, Fragment, Oversize or undersize, Oversize, Undersize, FCS error
Transceiver Module Present

Transceiver Information
Alarm, Wavelength and bit rate, Compliance, Vendor Information, Output
Control
Power monitor
BER test Generation and detection of test patterns. Count of errors in received test
pattern. Pattern generation:
Unframed (layer 1)
Framed with Ethernet (MAC) header (layer 2)
Framed with Ethernet (MAC) header and IP header (layer 3)
Framed with Ethernet (MAC) header, IP header and UDP/TCP header (layer 4)
Test patterns:
PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, HF test
pattern, CRPAT, JTPAT, SPAT
User-defined up to 32 bits. Length in step of 1 bit.
Detection of sequence errors and loss of sequence synchronization.
Frame loss count and frame loss seconds.
Throughput measurement: Maximum/Minimum/Average values are presented.
Test resolution
User-defined up to resolution:
1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 sec, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 hours
No intervals
Throughput Throughput may be calculated on 6 different layers:

measurement
Utilization layer
Physical layer
Physical layer excl. preamble
519
Specifications
Link layer
Network layer
Data layer
Service disruption Can be activated as part of the BER test:

measurement
Maximum/Average service disruption time, resolution 0.1 μsec
Number of service disruptions
Ping test For the connectivity check through the network.
Round Trip Time (RTT)

Supports IPv4 addressing
Answer incoming Ping requests (On/Off)
Traceroute Trace the IP route over the IP network.
User-defined max no. of hops (1 to 255)

Information per hop: Maximum/Minimum/Average ping time and number of
ping timeouts
Ethernet OAM option Y.1731 (Service Layer OAM)

IEEE 802.1ag (Connectivity layer OAM) and IEEE 802.3ah (Access Link OAM)
VLAN Number of VLAN tag
Up to 8 layers of VLAN can be inserted into the Ethernet frame.

Only 1 level of VLAN is supported in ping, Traceroute and RFC2544 router
latency tests.
Parameters per VLAN tag

EtherType 0x8100 (802.1Q), 0x88a8 (802.1ad), 0x9100 or 0x9200
User-defined VLAN ID, CFI and VLAN priority
Status
Indicator for detection of VLAN tagged frames
Statistics
Number of VLAN tagged frames
Maximum number of VLAN layers detected
Ethernet MPLS MPLS supported
MPLS unicast is supported (EtherType 0x8847).

Support for MPLS in BERT, RFC 2544 (excluding router latency) tests and
general statistics
Number of MPLS headers
Up to 8 MPLS headers can be set by the user.
Parameters per MPLS header
User-defined label, Exp and TTL fields in each MPLS header
MPLS-TP support
PWE (Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge) label (the RFC4448 control word)
520
can be added.
Status
Indicator for detection of MPLS frames and MPLS-TP
Statistics
Number of MPLS frames and MPLS-TP frames
Maximum number of MPLS layers detected
Ethernet Multistream Number of streams
Up to 16 streams can be activated on the Ethernet line.
Parameters per stream

Encapsulation (frame format)
Line rate traffic load, up to full line rate
Configurable IP and Ethernet source and destination addresses (supports
IPv4 and IPv6 addressing)
User-defined traffic mix of unicast and broadcast frames
Adjustable frame size from 44 bytes to 16000 bytes
Frame sizes may be set to constant, stepped or random length.
User programmable VLAN ID and VLAN priority
User programmable DSCP/TOS byte
User programmable UDP/TCP address
In stream 1 a BER test can be made.
Statistics
Available information per stream:
Frame loss count/rate

Frames and bytes received
Frames and bytes transmitted
Throughput
Latency/Jitter
RFC2544 installation Switch/router test and Single ended network test modes:
and commissioning
Throughput
Frame loss
Latency or packet jitter
Back-to-back frames (burstability)
End-to-end network test mode (two Network Master Pros in a master-slave

setup)
Throughput
Frame loss
Back-to-back frames (burstability)
Router latency test mode: IP ping based latency test or packet jitter.
For RFC2544 throughput measurement the user can choose to make the
measurement for:
Physical layer
521
Specifications
Physical layer excl. preamble

Link layer
Network layer
Data layer
Average or maximum values
RFC6349 TCP Supports connecting to iPerf server.

throughput test
Test Direction Setup
Local -> Remote

Remote -> Local
Simultaneous in Both Direction
For RFC6349 test sequence the user can choose to make the measurement for:
Path MTU
Baseline RTT
Window Scan and Throughput
Multi-Service
Multi-Service: DSCP or TOS can be set to each TCP connections.

Destination Port
DSCP or TOS
Service Activation Service Activation Test is an out-of-service test to assess the proper
Test (Y.1564)
configuration and performance of Ethernet services.
Test up to 8 services
Color-Aware and Non-Color-Aware in combinations (IP DSCP or VLAN PCP)
GPS timing synchronization
Two test modes:

One-way (uni- or bi-directional, symmetrical or asymmetrical)
Round-trip
Service Configuration Test:
With subtests for:

Committed Information Rate
Excess Information Rate
Traffic Policing
Committed Burst Size
Excess Burst Size
Step duration: 1 sec to 60 sec (user programmable)
Number of steps: 1 to 10 (user programmable)
Slope: rising or falling
Results:
Pass/Fail indication
IR (Maximum/Minimum/Average)
FL (Count/FLR)
FTD and FDV (Maximum/Minimum/Average/Current (during
measurement))
Service Performance Test:
522
All services tested simultaneously at CIR

Duration: 15 minutes, 2 hours, 24 hours or customer programmable
Results:
Pass/Fail indication
IR (Maximum/Minimum/Average)
FL (Count/FLR)
FTD and FDV (Maximum/Minimum/Average/Current (during
measurement))
AVAIL (%)
Unavail (sec)
Verification against Service Acceptance Criteria:

Information Rate
Frame Transfer Delay
Frame Delay Variation
Frame Loss Rate
Availability
IP Channel Statistics IP Channel Statistics is available when the interface bit rate is 10Gbps or less.
Number of channels
The statistics are provided for up to 230 channels, identified by user-defined

combinations of:
IPv4, IPv6 or MAC address
VLAN ID or MPLS label
Protocol information
IP next header (protocol)
TPC/UDP ports.
Statistics
Available information per channel:

Frame statistics
Frame count/rate
Throughput
Byte count
Undersize frames
Oversize frames
Size distribution
IP Frame/packet size distribution
MPLS statistics
MPLS/IP frames
MPLS/IP bytes
IP statistics
IP packet count, rate
IP bytes
IP throughput
IP header bytes
IP fragments
TTL threshold violations
IPv4 statistics
IPv4 packet count, rate
523
Specifications
IPv4 bytes
IPv4 throughput
IPv4 header bytes
IPv4 header errors
IPv6 statistics
IPv6 packet count, rate
IPv6 bytes
IPv6 throughput
IPv6 header bytes
TCP/UDP statistics
TCP/UDP packets, rate
TCP/UDP bytes
TCP/UDP throughput
TCP/UDP errored packets
Reflector mode The following parameters are user-settable:
Swap all MAC addresses or one specific MAC address

Swap IP addresses
Swap port numbers on UDP/TCP frames
Force ACK on TCP frames
Sync Test The following parameters are user-settable:
Internal length
Measurement period
100 s, 1000 s, User Defined
1PPS cable correction
Ethernet cable correction
Statistics
Available information per channel:
Frame statistics
Frame count/rate
Throughput
Byte count
Undersize frames
Oversize frames
Transmit
Error frames
Frame size distribution
IEEE1588v2 statistics
Offset Stat.
Offset Variance
Mean Path Delay
PDV
Message Stat.
Clock Status Stat.
GPS-Wall clock
Sync Test statistics
1PPS deviation
Phase error
Filtered TE
524
Sync OWD
Follow up OWD
Delay Req. OWD
Discovery Number of Network Masters to be discovered: Up to 16 Network Masters
Search type:
Multicast search for inside IP network

Unicast search for inside and outside IP network
Application Change:
Available application to change: Reflector, RFC 2544, RFC 6349, SAT(Y.1564),

Discovery
Settings: Password, Source MAC address, Destination MAC address, VLAN,
Source IP address, Destination IP address, Gateway, Increment to all streams
11.4.2 SDH/SONET/PDH/DSn
SONET/SDH switchable.
Number of ports Max. 2
Internal clock
External clock
BITS
SETS
2MHz
10MHz
Received clock
Frame format STM-1/STM-1e/OC-3/STS-3

STM-4/OC-12
STM-16/OC-48
STM-64/OC-192
For bit rate, refer to Bit Rate.

Measurement
Interval
Parameter
1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s,
1minute, 5minutes, 10minutes, 15minutes, 30minutes,
1hour, 2hours, 4hours, 6hours, 12hours,
No intervals
Start Key Action
Immediate
Start at(year-month-day, hour-minute-second)
Stop Function
Manual Stop
Stop at (year-month-day, hour-minute-second)
Duration (1second to 99days 23hour-59minute-59second )
11.4.2.1 SDH
SDH Mappings STM-64 - AU4-64c - VC4-64c - Bulk
525
Specifications
STM-64/STM-16 - AU4-16c - VC4-16c - Bulk

STM-64/STM-16/STM-4 - AU4-4c - VC4-4c - Bulk
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-4 - VC-4 - Bulk
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-4 - VC-4 - E4
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-3 - VC-3 - Bulk
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-3 - VC-3 - DS3
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-3 - VC-3 - E3
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e
- AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-12 - VC-12 - E1 (Async/Sync)
- AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-11 - VC-11 - Bulk
- AU-4 - VC-4 - TU-11 - VC-11 - DS1 (Async/Sync)
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-3 - VC-3 - Bulk
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-3 - VC-3 - DS3
STM-64/STM-16/STM-4/STM-1/STM-1e - AU-3 - VC-3 - E3
- AU-3 - VC-3 - TU-12 - VC-12 - E1 (Async/Sync)
- AU-3 - VC-3 - TU-11 - VC-11 - DS1 (Async/Sync)
Dummy channel Copy, Unequipped (For AU only)

handling
Test patterns
PRBS: 29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, 229-1,231-1 (Normal/Inverse)
Fixed :User Pattern, All0, All1, Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating
1:7, 2 in 8
User Pattern : 32 bit, 2048 bit
Preset data OH Preset data
SOH : All bytes except B1, B2, H1, H2 and H3 byte

VC-4/VC-3 POH : All bytes except B3
VC-12/VC-11 POH : All bytes except BIP-2
Path trace Setting: J0, J1, J2 (ASCII data, 16 bytes/64 bytes)

Tandem connection Off, N1(VC-4), N1(VC-3), N2(VC-12), N2(VC-11)

Alarm Insertion Item
LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, HP-
UNEQ, HP-RDI, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, TU-LOM, LP-TIM, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, LP-
PLM, LSS, TC-UNEQ, TC-LTC, TC-TIM, TC-AIS, TC-RDI, TC-ODI
Insertion :
Permanent, Alternate (Excluding LOS, OOF and LSS)
Permanent (For LOS, OOF and LSS)
Alternate :
526
Alarm length : 1 to 8000 (Frame)

Normal length : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
Error Insertion Item
A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI, V5/B3, LP-REI, TC-IEC, TC-REI, TC-OEI,
TC-BIP-2, ERR-TRANS, Pattern error
Insertion :
Manual, Rate, Alternate (Excluding ERR-TRANS)

Manual, Rate (For ERR-TRANS)
Manual :
Burst length : 1 to 8000 (bit) (Excluding Pattern error)

Burst length : 1 to 4000 (bit) (For Pattern error)
Rate:
1*10-3, 1*10-4, 1*10-5, 1*10-6, 1*10-7, 1*10-8, 1*10-9, 1*10-10

The available highest rate varies depending on the error item.
Alternate :
(Excluding Pattern error)

Error : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
Normal : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
(For Pattern error)
Error : 1 to 4000 (bit)
Normal : 100 to 4000 (bit)
Pointer AU-4, AU-3, TU-3, TU-12, TU-11
Test Sequence :
No Test Sequence
Single Alternating
Regular + Double
Regular + Missing
Double Alternating
Movement :
Positive
Negative
Burst: 1 to 100
Jump :
NDF: Including NDF or Excluding NDF
Pointer Value: 0 to 782(AU-4/AU-3) or 764(TU-3) or 139(TU-12) or 103(TU-11)
Error/Alarm detection Alarm detection
LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI,AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-PLM, HP-TIM, HP-RDI,

HP-UNEQ, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, TU-LOM, LP-PLM, LP-TIM, LP-RDI, LP-UNEQ,
TC-AIS, HP-TC-RDI, HP-TC-ODI, HP-TC-UNEQ, TC-TIM, TC-LTC, TC-AIS, TC-
RDI, TC-ODI, TC-UNEQ, LSS
527
Specifications
Display : Second (Resolution : 1 second)
Error Detection
A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, B3, HP-REI, V5/B3, LP-REI, TC-IEC, TC-BIP-2, TC-REI,
TC-OEI, Pattern error, Pattern block error for G.826
Display : Count, Ratio

Monitor Signal level:
dBm (Excluding STM-1e)
dB (For STM-1e)
Deviation: ppm (Resolution: 1 ppm)
Bit rate: bit/s

Pointer analyze Pointer value: AU-PTR, TU-PTR
Element : Negative, Positive
Graph : Pointer movement

OH Capture Item
SOH: 64 Frames
POH: 64 Frames
Pathtrace: J0/J1/J2 (Displays in ASCII characters)
Timing
Single

Control
Power monitor
Through Mode Mode :
Through Rx
OH Overwrite
SOH, A1/A2, K1/K2, S1, DCC1-3, DCC4-12, J0, SOH 1byte
Stimuli
Alarm : LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-RDI

Available alarms depend on Through mode setting.
Error : A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, ERR-TRANS
Available errors depend on Through mode setting.
Insertion: refer to Alarm Insertion and Error Insertion
APS APS (Automatic Protection Switching) Measurement
Reference event: LOS, LOF, OOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, APS Switchover, AU-AIS,
AU-LOP, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, HP-UNEQ, TU-LOM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LP-TIM, LP-
PLM, LP-UNEQ, LSS, A1A2, B1, B2, MS-REI, B3, V5, Pattern errors
528
Max reference duration: 0.000 to 10000.000 ms

Result: Average switching time, Maximum switching time, Minimum switching
time
APS Protocol analyze

APS configuration :Ring or Linear
Ring : Short Path, Long Path
Linear : 1+1 architecture, 1:n architecture
APS Protocol Request : The value of K1, K2 byte is sent depending on selected
type.
APS Interpretation : Number, Elapsed Time
Delay measurement Measurement Mode : Single, Repeat
Measurement Period : 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10 s
Measurement Range : Up to 10 000 000.000 μs / resolution 0.1 μs, Timeout

SDH Performance Setup : G826, G.828+G.829, M.2101.1(M2100)
Measurement Allocation
Mux Allocation 0 to 100%
VC-4 Allocation 0 to 100%
VC-3 Allocation 0 to 100%
VC-11/VC-12 Allocation 0 to 100%
Time period : 15minutes, 1hour, 2hour, 24hour, 7days (only M.2101.1)
Result : ES, SES, BBE, UNAV
Tributary Scan Displays the alarm status of all channels in a specified layer.
Green (No alarm), Red (Alarm occurring), Gray (Not applied)
11.4.2.2 SONET
SONET Mappings OC-192 - STS-192c - STS-192c SPE - Bulk

OC-192/OC-48 - STS-48c - STS-48c SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12 - STS-12c - STS-12c SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - E4
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - TU-3 - VC-3 - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - TU-3 - VC-3 - DS3
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - TU-3 - VC-3 - E3
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - VT-12 - VT-12 SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - VT-12 - VT-12 SPE - E1 (Async/Sync)
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - VT-11 - VT-11 SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-3c - STS-3c SPE - VT-11 - VT-11 SPE - DS1 (Async/Sync)
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - DS3
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3 - STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - E3
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - VT-12 - VT-12 SPE - Bulk
529
Specifications
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - VT-12 - VT-12 SPE - E1 (Async/Sync)
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - VT-11 - VT-11 SPE - Bulk
OC-192/OC-48/OC-12/OC-3/STS-3
- STS-1 - STS-1 SPE - VT-11 - VT-11 SPE - DS1/J1 (Async/Sync)
Dummy channel Copy, Unequipped (For STS only)

handling
Test patterns PRBS: 29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, 229-1,231-1 (Normal/Inverse)
Fixed :User Pattern, All0, All1, Alternating 1:1, Alternating 1:3, Alternating
1:7, 2 in 8
User Pattern : 32 bit, 2048 bit
Preset data OH Preset data

TOH : All bytes except B1, B2, H1, H2 and H3 byte
STS-3c/STS-1 POH : All bytes except B3
VT-2/VT-1.5 POH : All bytes except BIP-2
Path trace Setting: J0, J1, J2 (ASCII data, 16 bytes/64 bytes)

Tandem connection Off, Z5(STS-3c), Z5(STS-1), Z6(VT-2), Z6(VT-1.5)

LOS, LOF, OOF, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P,
AIS-V, LOP-V, LOM-V, TIM-V, UNEQ-V, RDI-V, PLM-V, LSS, TC-UNEQ, TC-
LTC, TC-TIM, TC-AIS, TC-RDI, TC-ODI
Insertion :
Permanent, Alternate (Excluding LOS, OOF and LSS)

Permanent (For LOS, OOF and LSS)
Alternate :
Alarm length : 1 to 8000 (Frame)

Normal length : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, REI-P, V5/B3, REI-V, TC-IEC, TC-REI, TC-OEI, TC-
BIP-2, ERR-TRANS, Pattern error
Insertion :
Manual, Rate, Alternate (Excluding ERR-TRANS)

Manual, Rate (For ERR-TRANS)
Manual :
Burst length : 1 to 8000 (bit) (Excluding Pattern error)

Burst length : 1 to 4000 (bit) (For Pattern error)
530
Rate:
1*10-3, 1*10-4, 1*10-5, 1*10-6, 1*10-7, 1*10-8, 1*10-9, 1*10-10

The available highest rate varies depending on the error item.
Alternate :
(Excluding Pattern error)
Error : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
Normal : 1 to 8000 (Frame)
(For Pattern error)
Error : 1 to 4000 (bit)
Normal : 100 to 4000 (bit)
Pointer STS-3c, STS-1, TU-3, VT-2, VT-1.5
Test Sequence :
No Test Sequence
Single Alternating
Regular + Double
Regular + Missing
Double Alternating
Movement :
Positive
Negative
Burst: 1 to 100
Jump :
NDF: Including NDF or Excluding NDF

Pointer Value: 0 to 782(STS-3c/STS-1) or 764(TU-3) or 139(VT-2) or 103(VT-1.5)
LOS, LOF, OOF, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P,
AIS-V, LOP-V, LOM-V, TIM-V, UNEQ-V, RDI-V, PLM-V, TC-UNEQ, TC-LTC, TC-
TIM, TC-AIS, TC-RDI, TC-ODI, LSS
Display : Second (Resolution : 1 second)
Error Detection
A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, REI-P, V5/B3, REI-V, TC-IEC, TC-BIP-2, TC-REI, TC-
OEI, Pattern error, Pattern block error for G.826

Monitor Signal level:
dBm (Excluding STS-3)

dB (For STS-3)
Deviation: ppm (Resolution: 1ppm)
Bit rate: bit/s

Pointer analyze Pointer value: STS-PTR, VT-PTR
531
Specifications
Element : Negative, Positive
Graph : Pointer movement

OH Capture Item
TOH: 64 Frames
POH: 64 Frames
Pathtrace:J0/J1/J2 (Displays in ASCII characters)
Timing
Single

Control
Power monitor
Through Mode Mode :

Through Rx
OH Overwrite
TOH, A1/A2, K1/K2, S1, DCC1-3, DCC4-12, J0, TOH 1byte
Stimuli
Alarm : LOS, LOF, OOF, RDI-L

Available alarms depend on Through mode setting.
Error : A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, ERR-TRANS
Available errors depend on Through mode setting.
Insertion: refer to Alarm Insertion and Error Insertion.
APS APS (Automatic Protection Switching) Measurement
Reference event : LOS, LOF, OOF, AIS-L, RDI-L, APS Switchover, AIS-P, LOP-P,
TIM-P, PLM-P, UNEQ-P, LOM-V, AIS-V, LOP-V, TIM-V, PLM-V, UNEQ-V, LSS,
A1A2, B1, B2, REI-L, B3, V5, Patter errors
Max reference duration: 0.000 to 10000.000 ms
Result : Average switching time, Maximum switching time, Minimum
switching time
APS Protocol analyze
APS configuration :Ring or Linear

Ring : Short Path, Long Path
Linear : 1+1 architecture, 1:n architecture
APS Protocol Request : The value of K1, K2 byte is sent depending on selected
type.
APS Interpretation : Number, Elapsed Time
Delay measurement Measurement Mode : Single, Repeat
Measurement Period : 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10 s
Measurement Range : Up to 10 000 000.000 μs / resolution 0.1 μs, Timeout
532
SONET Performance Setup : G826, G.828+G.829, M.2101.1(M2100)

Measurement Allocation
Mux Allocation 0 to 100%
STS-3c Allocation 0 to 100%
STS-1 Allocation 0 to 100%
VT-2/VT-1.5/VC-12 Allocation 0 to 100%
Time period : 15minutes, 1hour, 2hour, 24hour, 7days (only M.2101.1)
Result : ES, SES, BBE, UNAV
Tributary Scan Displays the alarm status of all channels in a specified layer.
Green (No alarm), Red (Alarm occurring), Gray (Not applied)
11.4.2.3 PDH
Number of ports Max. 2

Frame format
Non PCM frame
Bit rate : Refer to Bit Rate.
Framed
Bit rate (Format)
E1 2.048Mbit/s (30,31ch with or without CRC4, Sa-bit, CAS)
E3 34.368Mbit/s (G.751)
E4 139.264Mbit/s (G.751)
DS1 1.544Mbit/s (T1.107, SF/ESF/Japan ESF, CAS)
DS3 44.736Mbit/s (T1.107, M13/C-bit)
Mux/DeMux
E1 n*64kbit/s
DS1 n*64kbit/s or n*56kbit/s

BER Test patterns PRBS:
E1
26-1, 27-1, 29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, QRSS 11, QRSS 20
E3/E4
29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, 229-1, 231-1, QRSS 20
(229-1, 231-1 and QRSS 20 are only available for E4.)
DS1/DS3
29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, 229-1, 231-1, QRSS 20
Fixed : User Pattern (32bis, 2048bits), All0, All1, 1 in 1, 1 in 3, 1 in 7, 3 in 24,

Fox Pattern
(Fox Pattern is not available for E4.)
Logic : Normal, Inverse

Line build out
DS1
0 dB, -7.5 dB, -15 dB, -22.5dB, 1-133 ft, 133-266 ft, 266-399 ft, 399-533 ft, 533-
655 ft
533
Specifications
DS3
High-0 ft, DSX-450 ft
E1
No Signal, AIS, No Frame, Distant Alarm, Pattern sync loss, No CAS MFAS,
Distant MF Alarm
E3/E4
No Signal, AIS, No Frame, RDI, Pattern sync loss
DS1
LOS, AIS, RAI, OOF, LLS
DS3
LOS, AIS, RAI, LOF, Idle, LSS
E1
FAS, FAS and NFAS, FAS word, CRC4, CRC4 MFAS, Code, Pattern error, CAS
MFAS, E-Bit, Pattern slip, Frame slip, Transparent
E3/E4
Frame, Code, Pattern error, Pattern slip (Code is only available for E3.)
DS1
Pattern error, Pattern slip, CRC-6, F-Bit, S-Bit, BPV, EXZ
DS3
Pattern error, Pattern slip, FEBE, C-Bit, F-Bit, P-Bit, BPV
Timing : Manual, Burst

E1
LOS, AIS, No Frame, No CRC4 MF, Distant, No sync, No CAS MF, Distant MF
E3/E4
LOS, AIS, No Frame, Distant, No Sync
DS1
LOS, AIS, OOF, RAI, LLS
DS3
LOS, AIS, LOF, RAI, IDLE, LSS
Display : Second
Error Detection
E1
FAS, Pattern error, CRC4, CRC4 MFAS, E-bit, Code, Pattern slip, Frame slip,
Pattern block error for G.826
E3/E4
FAS, Code, Pattern error, Pattern slip, Pattern block error for G.826 (Code is
only available for E3.)
DS1
F-Bit, Pattern, CRC-6, S-Bit, BPV, Pattern slip, EXZ, Pattern block error for
G.826
DS3
BPV, Pattern error, Pattern slips, Parity, C-bit, F-bit, FEBE, Pattern block error
534
for G.826
Display : Count, Ration

Error Performance G.821/G.826/M.2100 analysis of the received signal
Result Status
Current information on:
Alarms and errors

Input level indication
Actual bit rate
Frequency deviation
E1: CAS bits, FAS/non FAS bits
DS1: CAS bits, F-Bit, S-Bit
DS3: F-bits
Round trip delay
APS switching time (Only available in case of E1 or DS1.)
11.4.3 OTN
11.4.3.1 OTN Setup
Frame Format OTU2, OTU1e, OTU2e, OTU1f, OTU2f, OTU1

Internal clock
External clock
BITS
SETS
2MHz
10MHz
GPS
Received
Through mode Transparent, OH Overwrite Thr. (ALL OTU/ODU/OPU OH)

Mapping OTU2 (Client PRBS)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-PRBS
OTU2 (Client Null)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-NULL
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-NULL
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-NULL
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-NULL
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-NULL
535
Specifications
OTU2 (Client Ethernet)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-10GbE
OTU2-ODU2/Ext.OPU2-10GbE
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-GbE
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-GbE
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-Ethernet
OTU2 (Client SDH/SONET)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-STM64(Async)/STS192(Async)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-STM64(Sync)/STS192(Sync)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-STM4/STS12
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-STM1/STS3
-STM16(Async)/STS48(Async)
-STM16(Sync)/STS48(Sync)
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-STM4/STS12
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0- STM1/STS3
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-PRBS
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-NULL
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-NULL
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-NULL
OTU2 (Client FC)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-FC800
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-FC400
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-FC200
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-FC100
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-FC100
OTU2 (Client CPRI)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.ts-ODUflex-9830.4 M(CPRI)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU12(PT=20,21)-ODU1/OPU1-2457.6 M(CPRI)
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-1228.8 M(CPRI)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-1228.8 M(CPRI)
-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-614.4 M(CPRI)
OTU2-ODU2/OPU2-ODTU2.1-ODU0/OPU0-614.4 M(CPRI)
OTU1 (Client PRBS)
536
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-PRBS
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-PRBS
OTU1 (Client Null)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-NULL
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-NULL
OTU1 (Client Ethernet)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-GbE
OTU1 (Client SDH/SONET)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-STM16(Async)/STS48(Async)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-STM4/STS12
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-STM1/STS3
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-PRBS
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-PRBS
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-NULL
OTU1 (Client FC)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-FC200
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-FC100
OTU1 (Client CPRI)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-2457.6 M(CPRI)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-1228.8 M(CPRI)
OTU1-ODU1/OPU1-ODTU01-ODU0/OPU0-614.4 M(CPRI)
OTU1e/2e (Client PRBS)
OTU1e-ODU1e/OPU1e-PRBS
OTU2e-ODU2e/OPU2e-PRBS
OTU1e/2e (Client Null)
OTU1e-ODU1e/OPU1e-NULL
OTU2e-ODU2e/OPU2e-NULL
OTU1e/2e (Client Ethernet)
OTU1e-ODU1e/OPU1e-10GbE
OTU2e-ODU2e/OPU2e-10GbE
OTU1f/2f (Client PRBS)
OTU1f-ODU1f/OPU1f-PRBS
OTU2f-ODU2f/OPU2f-PRBS
OTU1f/2f (Client Null)
OTU1f-ODU1f/OPU1f-NULL
OTU2f-ODU2f/OPU2f-NULL
537
Specifications
OTU1f/2f (Client FC)
OTU1f-ODU1f/OPU1f-FC1200
OTU2f-ODU2f/OPU2f-FC1200
Client Signals Client Signals

Refer to Section SDH/SONET, Ethernet, Fibre Channel and CPRI.
Test Pattern
PRBS : 29-1, 211-1, 215-1, 220-1, 223-1, 229-1, 231-1 with polarization Normal /
Inverted
User Pattern : 32bits, 2048bits
Measurement channel Dummy (Unused), Copy
Tributary Port and Slot can be configured in ODTU mapping.
FEC Encode/Decode RS(255,239) described in ITU-T Rec. G709, No FEC
OH Edit All OTU, ODU bytes except MFAS and BIP8

TTI, FTFL bytes with multi-frame manner
TTI measurement Condition for detecting TIM can be selected.
TCM measurement On/Off
MSIM Detection Expected MSI bytes are set from Tx Data or Received Data.
11.4.3.2 OTN Stimuli
Alarm Insertion OTU, ODU *

LOS, OTU-AIS, OOF/LOF, OOM/LOM, SM-TIM, SM-BIAE, SM-BDI, SM-IAE,
ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI, ODU-LCK, PM-TIM, PM-BDI, FSF, FSD, BSF, BSD,
TCMi-TIM, TCMi-BIAE, TCMi-BDI, TCMi-IAE, TCMi-LTC (i=1-6)
Multiplexed ODU
OOF/LOF, OOM/LOM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI, ODU-LCK, PM-TIM, PM-BDI,
FSF, FSD, BSF, BSD
Client
Client-AIS, CSF
Insertion timing
Single, Burst, Alternate, All
*: Available for both of Normal mode and Through mode

Error Insertion
OTU, ODU *
Bitall, FAS, MFAS, SM-BIP8, SM-BEI, PM-BIP8, PM-BEI, TCMi-BIP8, TCMi-
BEI (i=1-6), Uncorrectable Error, Correctable Error
Multiplexed ODU
FAS, PM-BIP8, PM-BEI
GMP
CRC8, CRC5, Invalid JC1, Invalid JC2,Invalid JC1&JC2
GFP
cHEC, tHEC, Superblock CRC, eHEC, FCS, CMF
Inserted Error bits are editable.
Client
Bit Error
Insertion timing
538
Single, Burst, Alternate, Rate, Rate (Random for Bitall), All
*: Available for both of Normal mode and Through mode

Payload Offset
Movement type
AMP
Burst Insertion (Positive(+1), Positive(+2), Negative (-1))
GMP
Offset (ppm)
Offset
AMP
-131 ppm to +83 ppm (Depending on mapping configuration)
0.1 ppm step
GMP
-150 ppm to +150 ppm 0.1 ppm step
11.4.3.3 OTN Measurement
Alarm Detection OTU, ODU

LOS, OTU-AIS, LOF, OOF, LOM, OOM, SM-TIM, SM-BIAE, SM-BDI, SM-IAE,
ODU-AIS,ODU-OCI, ODU-LCK, PM-TIM, PM-BDI, FSF, FSD, BSF, BSD, MSIM,
TCMi-TIM, TCMi-BIAE, TCMi-BDI, TCMi-IAE, TCMi-LTC (i=1-6)
Multiplexed ODU
LOFLOM, OOF, OOM, ODU-AIS,ODU-OCI, ODU-LCK, PM-TIM, PM-BDI,
MSIM
Client
Client-AIS, PLM, CSF, LSS
Error Detection OTU, ODU

FAS, MFAS, SM-BIP8, SM-BEI, FEC Corrected, FEC Uncorrectable, PM-BIP8,
PM-BEI, TCMi-BIP8, TCMi-BEI (i=1-6)
Multiplexed ODU
FAS, MFAS, PM-BIP8, PM-BEI
GFP
cHEC corrected, cHEC uncorrectable, tHEC corrected,
tHEC uncorrectable, CSF Signal, CSF Sync, Invalid GFP Frame,
Superblock CRC, eHEC corrected, eHEC uncorrectable, FCS,
CMF Sync, CMF Signal, SSF, PTI Mismatch, UPI Mismatch
Client
Bit Error
Justification analysis Count
AMP
Positive(+1), Positive(+2), Negative (-1), offset(ppm)
GMP
CRC8 Error, CRC5 Error, Inc, Inc>1, Inc>2, Inc Over, Dec, Dec>1, Dec>2,
Dec Over, offset(ppm), Cm(t) Max, Cm(t) Min
OH Capture OTU/ODU/OPU OH, Multiplexed ODU/OPU OH

TTI bytes, FTFL bytes with Multi-frame Manner
Update timing
539
Specifications
Repeat 1sec, Single

Control
Power monitor
APS Measurement Result : Average switching time, Maximum switching time, Minimum switching
time
Trigger
Start Trigger, Stop Trigger
Measurement Range
0.001 to 10.000 ms
Error Free Period
1, 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 and 1000 ms
OTN Performance Standard

Measurement ITU-T Rec. G.8201, M.2401(M.2110)
Tributary Scan Supports up to 10 Gbps.
Detected Alarms
OTU-AIS, LOF, OOF, LOM, OOM, SM-BIAE, SM-BDI, SM-IAE, ODU-AIS, ODU-
OCI, ODU-LCK, PM-BDI, LOFLOM
Round Trip Delay Result : RTD Time
Measurement Range
0.5sec, 1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec
Measurement Timing
Single, Repeat
11.4.4 Fibre Channel

Port mode Off, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200
Topology Point to Point, Fabric, E-Port
Framing SOF:Data:EOF, SOF:Header:Data:CRC:EOF
Content FOX, ALL5555, PRBS 9, PRBS 11, PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29,
PRBS 31, BHFTEST, BCRPAT, BJTPAT, BSPAT, USER_32, ZERO
Alarm Insertion
Item
Link reset, Link reset response, Not optional, Offline

Bit, Symbol, R_RDY, CRC
Insertion timing
Manual, Burst
Link Detection Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Status

Login Detection Fabric Login, Port Login, ELP
540
Pattern Detection Traffic, Pattern Sync, Pattern Error

Transceiver
Module Present
Control
Power monitor
BER Test BERT:

Pattern bit count, Pattern errors, Frame loss, Frame loss seconds, Pattern loss
seconds, Jitter, Latency, Service disruption
Symbol Errors
Ordered Sets:
R_RDY, LR, LRR, NOS, OLS
Traffic:
Frames, Bytes
Errors:
IFG, CRC, Symbol, CRD, Terminate, Errored
Line rate, Frame rate, Throughput
Size Distribution
Performance Test Mode:

Port to Port, Loopback
Test:
Throughput, Traffic Profile, Latency, Burst, Credit (Only for Loopback mode)
Reflector mode Supports Reflector application.
11.4.5 CPRI/OBSAI
Port mode Off, Normal, Through
Line rate CPRI: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps, 2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps,
6144.0 Mbps, 9830.4 Mbps, 10137.6 Mbps
OBSAI: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps
Clock Configuration Timing Source
Internal clock
External clock
GPS
Received clock
Content Unframed, CPRI Link

Pattern PRBS 15, PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 29, PRBS 31, User 32 bit, OFF
CPRI Link
Start up
Enabled, Disabled
Role
Master, Slave
Protocol version
1, 2
HDLC rate
no HDLC, 240 kbit/s, 480 kbit/s, 960 kbit/s, 1920 kbit/s, 2400 kbit/s, Highest
541
Specifications
possible
Ethernet
On, Off
Pointer: 20 to 63

Signal Loss, LOS, LOF, LSS, Remote-LOS, Remote-LOF, RAI, SDI, Reset

LCV, SHV, K30.7, Pattern error
Insertion timing
Manual, Rate

Alarm Detection Signal loss, LOS, LOF, LSS
Error Detection LCV, SHV, K30.7, Pattern error
Remote status Remote LOS, Remote LOF, RAI, SDI, Reset
Link
Rx
Protocol version, HDLC rate, Pointer P
Tx
Protocol version, HDLC rate, Pointer P

Control
Power monitor
BER Test Alarm:

Signal loss, LOS, LOF, LSS, Remote LOS, Remote LOF, RAI, SDI, Reset
Errors:
LCV, SHV, K30.7, Pattern error
Frames count:
Rx hyper frame, Rx code words, Tx hyper frame, Tx code words
Delay
Delay, Average Delay, Min Delay, Max Delay, Measurement count
APS
Switching Time
Pass Through Alarm:

Signal loss, LOS, LOF, Remote LOS, Remote LOF, RAI, SDI, Reset
Errors:
LCV, SHV, K30.7
Frames count:
Rx hyper frame, Rx code words, Tx hyper frame, Tx code words
Pass through
HyperFrame diff, Min hyperFrame diff, Max hyperFrame diff
542
Optical Modules
11.5 Optical Modules

Up to 2 optical modules can be installed.
Correct functionality can only be guaranteed with optical modules purchased from
Anritsu for the MU100010A .
Safety measures for laser products

Optical modules for the MU100010A comply with optical safety standards in
IEC 60825-1.
Specifications Specification of optical modules purchased from Anritsu for the MU100010A
(each with 1 transmitter and 1 receiver) with LC connectors (subject to change
without further notice):
Order No./ Name Description Min. Input Input Output Output

(Approx. Distance) Sensitivity Wavelength Power Wavelength
G0311A 1000BASE - SX 850 nm Multi 770 to 860 -9.5 to -3 830 to 860
-17 dBm
1G 850 nm SX SFP mode (0.5 km) nm dBm nm
G0312A 1000BASE - LX 1310 nm 1260 to -10 to -3 1260 to
-18 dBm
1G 1310 nm LX SFP Single mode (10 km) 1580 nm dBm 1360 nm
G0313A 1000BASE - ZX 1550 nm 1260 to -2 to 5 1480 to
-23 dBm
1G 1550 nm ZX SFP Single mode (80 km) 1580 nm dBm 1580 nm
G0315A 10GBASE - LR 1310 nm Single 1260 to -6 to -1 1290 to
-14.4 dBm
10G LR/LW 1310 nm SFP+ mode (10 km) 1565 nm dBm 1330 nm
G0316A
10GBASE - ER 1550 nm Single 1260 to -3 to 3 1530 to
10G ER/EW 1550 nm 40 km -15.8 dBm
mode (40 km) 1565 nm dBm 1560 nm
SFP+
G0318A
10GBASE - ER 1550 nm Single 1260 to 0 to 5 1525 to
10G ZR/ZW 1550 nm 80 km -22 dBm
mode (80 km) 1565 nm dBm 1565 nm
SFP+
G0319A STM-1/-4/-16 short haul, 1310 1270 to -5 to 0 1260 to
-18 dBm
Up to 2.7G 1310 nm 15 km SFP nm (15 km) 1580 nm dBm 1360 nm
G0320A STM-1/-4/-16 long haul, 1310 1270 to -2 to 3 1280 to
-27 dBm
G0321A STM-1/-4/-16 long haul, 1550 1270 to -2 to 3 1500 to
-28 dBm
G0322A 1GFC, 2GFC, 4GFC 1310 nm 1260 to -8 to 0 1260 to
-18 dBm
1G/2G/4G FC 1310 nm SFP (10 km) 1360 nm dBm 1360 nm
G0323A 1GFC, 2GFC, 4GFC 1550 nm 1470 to 0 to 5 1510 to
-18 dBm
1G/2G/4G FC 1550 nm SFP (40 km) 1600 nm dBm 1590 nm
G0328A 1GFC, 2GFC, 4GFC 850 nm 830 to 860 -9 to 0 830 to 860
-15 dBm
1G/2G/4G FC 850 nm SFP (0.5 km) nm dBm nm
G0329A 10GBASE - LR 1310 nm Single 1260 to -8.2 to 0.5 1260 to
-14 dBm
10G LR 1310 nm SFP+ mode (10 km) 1355 nm dBm 1355 nm
G0332A 100BASE-FX 1310 nm Multi 1270 to -20 to -15 1280 to
-31 dBm
100 M FX 1310 nm MM SFP mode (2 km) 1600 nm dBm 1380 nm
G0333A 10GBASE - SR 850 nm Multi 840 to 860 -7.3 to -1 840 to 860
-11.1 dBm
10G SR/SW 850 nm SFP+ mode (0.3 km) nm dBm nm
543
Specifications
Description Min. Input Input Output Output

Order No./ Name (Approx. Distance) Sensitivity Wavelength Power Wavelength
G0356A 840 to 860 -8.2 to -1 840 to 860
8G FC/10G SR 850 nm SFP+ -11.1 dBm
8G FC/10G SR 850 nm SFP+ nm dBm nm
544
12 Support
This chapter contains information about general maintenance of the Network
Master. It also contains information on how to obtain support or service
assistance.
545
Support
12.1 Maintenance and Cleaning

This section contains information about general maintenance and cleaning of
the Network Master.
12.1.1 Maintenance
The Network Master does not require any regular adjustments.
Using the Network Master in a normal environment and under normal

conditions will not call for general maintenance.
WARNING
There are no user-serviceable parts in the Network Master. Possible service or
repair should be performed by Anritsu authorized personnel only.
12.1.2 Cleaning
From time to time the Network Master needs to be cleaned. The surfaces of the
Network Master can be cleaned with any mild detergent that does not contain
solvents.
Before any cleaning, please take notice of the warnings below:
WARNING
Disconnect the Network Master from the mains power connection before any
cleaning involving fluid.
Only use a soft cloth moisturized with a mild detergent to clean the surface of
the touch screen.
Clean the main power adapter regularly. If dust accumulates around the power
pins, there is a risk of fire.
Keep the cooling fan clean so that the ventilation holes are not obstructed. If
the ventilation is obstructed, the cabinet may overheat and catch fire.
12.1.3 Storage
Wipe off dust, fingerprint marks, stains, spots, etc. from the surface of the
Network Master before storing it. Avoid storing the Network Master in these
places
In direct sunlight for extended periods
Outdoors
In excessively dusty locations
Where condensation may occur
In liquids, such as water, oil, or organic solvents, and medical fluids, or places
where these liquids may adhere
In salty air or in place chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen
sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen dioxide, or hydrogen chloride etc.) are
present
Where toppling over may occur
546
Maintenance and Cleaning
In the presence of lubricating oil mists

In places at an altitude of more than 2 000 m
In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock, such as in cars,
ships, or airplanes
Places with temperatures and relative humidity in the following ranges:
Temperature range of ≤-20°C or ≥+50°C

Humidity range of ≥90%
Recommended storage conditions

It is recommended that the Network Master be stored in a place that meets the
ambient conditions suggested above, plus the following conditions, if it is not
to be used for a long period of time:
Temperature: 5 to 30°C
Humidity: 40 to 75%
Little temperature and humidity fluctuations within one day
547
Support
12.2 Calibration
MT1000A and MU100010A do not require any calibration in the meaning of
adjustment after shipment from factory.
When the MU100090A is capturing GPS satellites, built-in Rubidium oscillator

is disciplined to the UTC by using the GPS signal. By this operation, 10 MHz
clock and 1PPS are calibrated. The MU100090A 1PPS and 10 MHz are
disciplined to the UTC to align it with the standard second.
When the reference 1PPS is available, the 10 MHz clock and 1PPS can be
calibrated by inputting the reference 1PPS to the 1pps Sync In connector.
In order to ensure measurements made by these instruments are within

specifications, Anritsu recommends performance test of the instrument for
quality assurance. The recommended frequency depends on the particular
usage of the instruments, but generally yearly performance test is highly
advised.
The final decision on performance verification frequency is to be taken by the
user, as performance test verifies past measurements rather than guarantee
future measurements.
In the event of this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu Service and

Sales office. Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed
version of this manual, and is available in a separate file on the PDF version.
548
Formatting the data area in the Network Master
12.3 Formatting the data area in the Network Master

Occasionally it is required to remove customer data from Network Master such
as after instrument rental. With Software tools you can format Network Master
internal data area.
Two data areas are available: Data area and Property area.
Data area contains user rewritable data. Property area contains system data.
Each area can be formatted with tools stored on a USB memory stick. The tools
are stored on the Utilities ROM. Please refer to the following description to
format.
To perform Data area formatting, copy

"REFORMAT_DATA_AREA.MT1000_SW" to root of USB memory stick.
To perform Property area formatting, copy

"REFORMAT_PROPERTY_AREA.MT1000_SW" to root of USB memory stick.
Place the format tools in the root of an empty of USB memory stick. To perform
both kinds of formattings simultaneously, place both tools in the root together.
Procedure
1. Remove power cable and turn instrument off. Power button turns off.
2. Insert the USB memory stick with the tools in one of the USB Type-A ports.
3. Connect power cable or push power button to turn power on. Then formatting
is executed and Network Master will reboot automatically.
4. Remove USB memory stick. The formatting is completed.
549
Support
12.4 Upgrading the Software

Connect the AC adapter to the Network Master while updating the software.
When updating the software with battery operation, make sure that there is 40% (or
more) power in the battery of the Network Master.
12.4.1 Installation by using USB memory stick
1. Copy the installer onto an empty USB memory stick.

2. If USB memory stick is inserted to the Network Master, remove it. If the
Network Master is powered-down while the USB memory stick is still inserted,
there is a risk that the USB memory stick may not operate normally after the
installation.
3. Press the power button to shut down the Network Master. Never force to power
off by holding the power button pressed for several seconds.
4. Remove AC adapter or power cable and confirm the power button turns to
gray.
5. Insert the USB memory stick into the Network Master.
6. Connect AC adapter to the Network Master.
7. Press the power button to boot the Network Master.
The Network Master will detect the installer stored in the USB memory stick,
and start installing the software. After the installation has finished, the
Network Master will reboot.
8. Check the software version at System Information on the Instrument Toolbar.
9. Remove USB memory stick after the installation has completed.
12.4.2 Installation via Network
1. Install MX100001A MT1000A/MT1100A Control Software to PC by referring

to 3.5.1 Installation of Control Software.
2. Configure the Control Software and the Network Master so that they can
communicate via Ethernet by referring to 3.5.2 Connection and Setup.
3. Upgrade the software by referring to 3.5.5 Remote Upgrade.
550
Support and Service Assistance
12.5 Support and Service Assistance

In case your Network Master needs support or service, follow the instructions
given in the sub-sections below.
12.5.1 Before you obtain assistance
To ensure fast help the Anritsu or the Anritsu representative need detailed
information about the Network Master and the problems concerning the
Network Master. The minimum information required is listed below:
A file containing the system information. The file can be generated using the
icon in the instrument toolbar.
Possible error code displayed on the touch screen, or any other error
indications
A detailed description of the problem and how it occurred. Please make the
description as detailed as possible, e.g. by drawing an illustration and/or
saving relevant screen captures.
12.5.2 Data Backup
Data in mass storage may be deleted when servicing the Network Master.
Before asking the support, backup the data according to following procedures.
Backup to USB Memory Stick

1. Insert the USB Memory Stick to the USB port of the Network Master.
2. Touch on Instrument Toolbar.
3. Touch Selection Mode so that multiple files can be selected.
4. Touch Internal in left pane.
5. Touch all files displayed in right pane.
6. Touch Copy ( ).
7. Touch Usb in left pane.
8. Touch Paste ( ).
9. Touch Internal twice to display folders.
10. Touch a folder and copy it.
11. Touch Usb.
12. Touch Paste ( ). Copy all folders to the USB Memory Stick.
Backup via USB Interface

1. Close all applications by touching on the Application Tool Bar.
2. Connect the USB cable between PC and USB type B connector of the Service
Interface.
3. If PC has detected the Network Master, copy files or folders to PC using PC

software (Explorer of Windows etc.).
12.5.3 Obtaining Support or Service Assistance

551
Support
12.6 Transporting and Disposal

This section describes the precautions to observe when transporting and
disposing of the main frame at the end of its useful life.
12.6.1 Repackaging
Use the original shipping materials, or an approved optional transit case, when
repacking the unit for transport. Repack according to the following procedure
when the original shipping materials (or a transit case) are not available.
1. Procure a corrugated cardboard, wooden, or aluminum box large enough to

pack in cushioning material around the unit.
2. Wrap the main frame in some material such as plastic sheeting that will
prevent entry of dust and water.
3. Place the unit into the box.
4. Pack soft materials around the main frame so that it cannot slide around
inside the packing box.
5. Secure the outside of the box with packaging cord, adhesive tape, bands, or
other such implements.
12.6.2 Transporting
In addition to preventing vibration as much as possible, transport under

conditions meeting the storage conditions outlined above.
Transporting MU100090A
The MU100090A contains the parts which is damaged easily by vibration or
shock. Avoid putting the MU100090A directly on the carrying car etc. Take the
measures against vibration and shock such as wrapping with cushioning.
12.6.3 Disposal
When the Network Master has reached the end of its useful life, dispose of it in
accordance with local environmental regulations. Before disposal, dismantle or
physically destroy any non-volatile memory media in the Network Master to
ensure that data in memory cannot be recovered by third parties.
552
Special Information
12.7 Special Information

12.7.1 Equipment Certificate
Anritsu Corporation certifies that this equipment was tested before shipment
using calibrated measuring instruments with direct traceability to public testing
organizations, and was found to meet the published specifications.
12.7.2 Anritsu Warranty
Anritsu Corporation will repair this equipment free-of-charge if a malfunction

occurs within one year after shipment due to a manufacturing fault. However,
software fixes will be made in accordance with the separate Software End-User
License Agreement. Moreover, Anritsu Corporation will deem this warranty
void when:
The fault is outside the scope of the warranty conditions separately described
in the operation manual.
The fault is due to mishandling, misuse, or unauthorized modification or
repair of the equipment by the customer.
The fault is due to severe usage clearly exceeding normal usage.
The fault is due to improper or insufficient maintenance by the customer.
The fault is due to natural disaster, including fire, wind, flooding, earthquake,
lightning strike, or volcanic ash, etc.
The fault is due to damage caused by acts of destruction, including civil
disturbance, riot, or war, etc.
The fault is due to explosion, accident, or breakdown of any other machinery,
facility, or plant, etc.
The fault is due to use of non-specified peripheral or applied equipment or
parts, or consumables, etc.
The fault is due to use of a non-specified power supply or in a non-specified
installation location.
The fault is due to use in unusual environments(Note).
The fault is due to activities or ingress of living organisms, such as insects,
spiders, fungus, pollen, or seeds.
In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser. It
is not transferable if the equipment is resold.
Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the
customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment.
Note:
For the purpose of this Warranty, "unusual environments" means use:
In places of direct sunlight

In dusty places
In liquids, such as water, oil, or organic solvents, and medical fluids, or places
where these liquids may adhere
In salty air or in places where chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide,
hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen dioxide, or hydrogen chloride
etc.) are present
In places where high-intensity static electric charges or electromagnetic fields
are present
553
Support
In places where abnormal power voltages (high or low) or instantaneous

power failures occur
In places where condensation occurs
In the presence of lubricating oil mists
In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m
In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock, such as in cars,
ships, or airplanes
12.7.3 Anritsu Corporation Contact

12.7.4 Licensing Information
This product includes copyrighted third-party software licensed under the

terms of the GNU General Public License.
Please see the GNU General Public License for the exact terms and conditions
of this license.
Especially the following parts of this product are subject to GNU GPL:
The Linux operating system kernel
The busybox swiss army knife of embedded linux
e2fsprogs - filesystem utilities for use with the ext2 filesystem
All listed software packages are copyrighted by their respective authors. Please
see the source code for detailed information.
12.7.5 Availability of Source Code
Anritsu Corporation has the full source code of the GPL licensed software,
including any scripts to control compilation of the object code.
554
Software License Document
12.8 Software License Document

Network Master comes with the package software as described in following
Table. Note, however, that the package software is not covered by the Anritsu
Software License Agreement.
Go to the following website for details of each license.

http://www.anritsu.com/en-US/test-
measurement/support/downloads/manuals/dwl16668
Software License
Name Version License
ace_tao 2.2a custom
alsa-lib 1.0.24.1 LGPL
alsa-utils 1.0.24.2 GPL
atk 2.10.0-1 LGPL
at-spi 1.32.0-5 GPL
at-spi2-atk 2.10.2-1 GPL2
at-spi2-core 2.10.2-1 GPL2
attr 2.4.47-1 LGPL
avahi 0.6.31-11 LGPL
bash 2.05b GPL2
binutils 2.24-1 GPL
bluez 4.101 GPL
bluez-tools 0.1.38 GPL
busybox 1.20.2 GPL2
cairo 1.12.16-1 LGPL,MPL
compositeproto 0.4 MIT
coreutils 8.23-1 GPL3
cups-filters 1.0.41-1 GPL
damageproto 1.1.0 MIT
dbus 1.4.14 GPL,custom
dbus-glib 0.82 GPL2,custom
DirectFB 1.4.0 LGPL
dosfstools 3.0.26-1 GPL2
e2fsprogs 1.41.4 GPL
expat 2.0.1 MIT
fontconfig 2.11.0-1 custom
font-util 1.0.1 MIT
freetype 2.3.9 GPLorFTL
gdb 6.6 GPL
gdk-pixbuf2 2.30.2-1 LGPL2.1
glib 1.2.10-11 LGPL
glib2 2.38.2-1 LGPL
glibc 2.17-5.1 GPL,LGPL
555
Support
Software License (Continued)

gmp 5.1.3-2 LGPL3
gnutls 3.2.7-1 GPL3,LGPL2.1
graphite 1:1.2.4-1 LGPL,GPL,custom
gsettings-desktop-schemas 3.10.1-1 GPL
gtk2 2.14.3 LGPL
gtk3 3.10.6-1 LGPL
gzip 1.6-1 GPL3
harfbuzz 0.9.24-1 MIT
hicolor-icon-theme 0.12-2 GPL2
hplip 3.14.1 custom
icewm 1.3.7 GPL
inputproto 1.4.4 MIT
jack 0.121.3-7 GPL,LGPL
kbproto 1.0.3 MIT
keyutils 1.5.8-1 GPL2,LGPL2.1
kobs-ng 12.09.01 GPL
krb5 1.11.4-1 custom
lcms2 2.5-2 MIT
libcap 2.22-5 GPL2
libcups 1.7.0-2 GPL
libdbus 3.5.7 GPL,custom
libdrm 2.3.1 MIT
liberation-fonts 20070509 GPL+exception
libffi 3.0.13-4 MIT
libfontenc 1.0.4 MIT
libgcrypt 1.5.3-1 LGPL
libgpg-error 1.12-1 LGPL
libICE 1.0.4 MIT
libidn 1.28-2 GPL3,LGPL
libjpeg-turbo 1.3.0-3 GPL,custom
liblzma 5.0.5-2 PublicDomain
libnfnetlink 0.0.25 GPL
libnl 3.2.23-1 GPL
libpciaccess 0.10.6 MIT
libpng 1.6.7-1 custom
libpthread-stubs 0.1 MIT
libSM 1.0.2 MIT
libtasn1 3.4-1 GPL3,LGPL
libtermcap 2.0.8 LGPL
libtiff 4.0.3-4 custom
libusbx 1.0.17-1 LGPL
556
Software License Document

libx11 1.6.2-1 custom
libXau 1.0.4 MIT
libXaw 1.0.4 MIT
libxcb 1.9.1-2 custom
libxcomposite 0.4.4-1 custom
libxcursor 1.1.14-1 custom
libXext 1.0.4 MIT
libXfixes 4.0.3 MIT
libXfont 1.3.3 MIT
libXft 2.1.13 MIT
libxi 1.7.2-1 custom
libxinerama 1.1.3-2 custom
libxkbcommon 0.3.2-1 custom
libxkbfile 1.0.5 MIT
libxml2 2.6.28 MIT
libXmu 1.0.4 MIT
libXpm 3.5.7 MIT
libXrandr 1.3.0 MIT
libXrender 0.9.4 MIT
libXt 1.0.4 MIT
libxtst 1.2.2-1 custom
libxxf86vm 1.1.3-1 custom
linux-gpib 3.2.20 GPL2
linux_kernel 3.0.35 GPL2
lua 5.2.3-1 MIT
merge 0.1 GPL
mesa 10.0.1-1 custom
mesa-libgl 10.0.1-1 custom
modeps 1 GPL
ncurses 5.9-6 MIT
nettle 2.7.1-1 GPL2
newfs_msdos 1.33 BSD
obexftp 0.23 LGPL
openobex 1.5 LGPL
openssl 0.9.8g custom
p11-kit 0.20.1-1 BSD
pango 1.36.1-1 LGPL
pcre 8.34-1 BSD
perf 3.0.35 GPL
pixman 0.32.4-1 custom
poppler 0.26.4-1 GPL
557
Support

poppler-data 0.4.6-1 custom,GPL2
poppler-qt4 0.26.3-1 GPL
portaudio 19_20111121- custom
portmap 5beta BSD
qt4 4.8.2 GPL3,LGPL,FDL,custom
qwt 6.1.0rc3 LGPL
randrproto 1.2.2 MIT
readline 6.2.004-2 GPL
recordproto 1.13.2 MIT
renderproto 0.9.3 MIT
resourceproto 1.0.2 MIT
samba 3.6.23 GPL3
scrnsaverproto 1.1.0 MIT
talloc 2.1.1-1 GPL3
tcpdump 4.5.1-1 BSD
tcp_wrappers 7.6 BSD
timezone 2006n BSD
tslib 1 LGPL
u-boot Jan-13 GPL
udev 117 GPL
wayland 1.3.0-1 MIT
wget 1.15-1 GPL3
wireless_tools 29 GPL
wireshark 1.12.1 GPL2
wpa_supplicant 0.5.9 GPL
x11vnc 0.9.13-6 GPL2
xcb-proto 1.2 MIT
xcmiscproto 1.1.2 MIT
xextproto 7.0.3 MIT
xf86bigfontproto 1.1.2 MIT
xf86driproto 2.0.4 MIT
xorg-server 1.6.1 MIT
xorg-x11-drv-keyboard 1.3.2 MIT
xorg-x11-drv-mouse 1.4.0 MIT
xorg-x11-proto-devel 7.5 MIT
xorg-x11-xkb-utils 7.2 MIT
xproto 7.0.13 MIT
xterm 234 MIT
xtrans 1.2.3 MIT
zlib 1.2.8 zlibv
558
EULA License Document
12.9 EULA License Document

Software End-User License Agreement (EULA)
Please read this Software End-User License Agreement (hereafter this EULA)
carefully before using (includes executing, copying, registering, etc.) this
software (includes programs, databases, scenarios, etc., used to operate, set,
etc., Anritsu electronic equipment). By reading this EULA and using this
software, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of its contents and Anritsu
Corporation (hereafter Anritsu) hereby grants you the right to use this Software
with the Anritsu-specified equipment (hereafter Equipment) for the purposes
set out in this EULA.
1. Grant of License and Limitations
1. Regardless of whether this Software was purchased from or provided free-of-

charge by Anritsu, you agree not to rent, lease, lend, or otherwise distribute
this Software to third parties and further agree not to disassemble, recompile,
reverse engineer, modify, or create derivative works of this Software.
2. You may make one copy of this Software for backup purposes only.
3. You are not permitted to reverse engineer this software.
4. This EULA allows you to install one copy of this Software on one piece of
Equipment.
2. Disclaimers
To the extent not prohibited by law, in no event shall Anritsu be liable for personal
injury, or any incidental, special, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever,
including, without limitation, damages for loss of profits, loss of data, business
interruption or any other commercial damages or losses, arising out of or related to
your use or inability to use this Software.
3. Limitation of Liability
a. If a fault (bug) is discovered in this Software, preventing operation as

described in the operation manual or specifications whether or not the
customer uses this software as described in the manual, Anritsu shall at its
own discretion, fix the bug, or exchange the software, or suggest a workaround,
free-of-charge. However, notwithstanding the above, the following items shall
be excluded from repair and warranty.
i. If this Software is deemed to be used for purposes not described in the
operation manual or specifications.
ii. If this Software is used in conjunction with other non-Anritsu-approved
software.
iii. Recovery of lost or damaged data.
iv. If this Software or the Equipment has been modified, repaired, or
otherwise altered without Anritsu's prior approval.
v. For any other reasons out of Anritsu's direct control and responsibility,
such as but not limited to, natural disasters, software virus infections,
etc.
b. Expenses incurred for transport, hotel, daily allowance, etc., for on-site repairs
by Anritsu engineers necessitated by the above faults shall be borne by you.
c. The warranty period for faults listed in article 3a above covered by this EULA
shall be either 6 months from the date of purchase of this Software or 30 days
after the date of repair, whichever is longer.
559
Support
4. Export Restrictions
You may not use or otherwise export or re-export directly or indirectly this Software
except as authorized by Japanese and United States law. In particular, this software
may not be exported or re-exported (a) into any Japanese or US embargoed countries
or (b) to anyone on the Japanese or US Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or the US Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or
Entity List. By using this Software, you warrant that you are not located in any such
country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use this Software for any
purposes prohibited by Japanese and US law, including, without limitation, the
development, design and manufacture or production of missiles or nuclear, chemical
or biological weapons of mass destruction.
5. Termination
Anritsu shall deem this EULA terminated if you violate any conditions described
herein. This EULA shall also be terminated if the conditions herein cannot be
continued for any good reason, such as violation of copyrights, patents, or other laws
and ordinances.
6. Reparations
If Anritsu suffers any loss, financial or otherwise, due to your violation of the terms of
this EULA, Anritsu shall have the right to seek proportional damages from you.
7. Responsibility after Termination
Upon termination of this EULA in accordance with item 5, you shall cease all use of
this Software immediately and shall as directed by Anritsu either destroy or return
this Software and any backup copies, full or partial, to Anritsu.
8. Dispute Resolution
If matters of dispute or items not covered by this EULA arise, they shall be resolved
by negotiations in good faith between you and Anritsu.
9. Court of Jurisdiction
This EULA shall be interpreted in accordance with Japanese law and any disputes
that cannot be resolved by negotiation described in Article 8 shall be settled by the
Japanese courts.
560
CE Conformity Marking
12.10 CE Conformity Marking

Anritsu affixes the CE conformity marking on the following product(s) in
accordance with the Decision 768/2008/EC to indicate that they conform to
the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union (EU).
12.10.1 Product Model
Model:
12.10.2 Applied Directive
EMC:
Directive 2014/30/EU
LVD:
Directive 2014/35/EU
12.10.3 Applied Standards
EMC:
Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A)
Immunity: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Table 2)
Standard Performance Criteria*

IEC 61000-4-2 (ESD) B
IEC 61000-4-3 (EMF) A
IEC 61000-4-4 (Burst) B
IEC 61000-4-5 (Surge) B
IEC 61000-4-6 (CRF) A
IEC 61000-4-8 (RPFMF) A
IEC 61000-4-11 (V dip/short) B, C
*: Performance Criteria
A. The equipment shall continue to operate as intended during and after
the test. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed
below a performance level specified by the manufacturer, when the
equipment is used as intended. The performance level may be replaced
by a permissible loss of performance. If the minimum performance
level or the permissible performance loss is not specified by the
manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the product
description and documentation and what the user may reasonably
expect from the equipment if used as intended.
B. The equipment shall continue to operate as intended after the test. No
degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed below a
performance level specified by the manufacturer, when the equipment
is used as intended. The performance level may be replaced by a
permissible loss of performance. During the test, degradation of
performance is however allowed. No change of actual operating state
561
Support
or stored data is allowed. If the minimum performance level or the

permissible performance loss is not specified by the manufacturer,
either of these may be derived from the product description and
documentation and what the user may reasonably expect from the
equipment if used as intended.
C. Temporary loss of function is allowed, provided the function is self-
recoverable or can be restored by the operation of the controls.
Harmonic current emissions:
EN 61000-3-2:2014 (Class A equipment)
LVD:
EN 61010-1:2010 (Pollution Degree 2)
12.10.4 Authorized Representative
Name: Murray Coleman

Head of Customer Service EMEA
ANRITSU EMEA Ltd
Address, City: 200 Capability Green, Luton
Bedfordshire, LU1 3LU
Country: United Kingdom
562
CE Conformity Marking
12.10.5 CE Declaration
563
Support
12.11 RCM Conformity Marking

Anritsu affixes the RCM mark on the following product(s) in accordance with
the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of
Australia/New Zealand.
12.11.1 Product Model
Model:
12.11.2 Applied Standards
EMC:
Emission: EN 61326-1:2013 (Class A equipment)
564
Laser Safety
12.12 Laser Safety

12.12.1 Laser Safety Classifications
Class 1 indicate the danger degree of the laser radiation specified below
according to IEC 60825-1:2007.
Class 1:
Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation,
including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing.
WARNING
The laser in the plug-in unit provided for this equipment is classified as Class 1
according to the IEC 60825-1:2007 standard, and is safe under reasonably
foreseeable operating conditions.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Table 1 Laser Safety Classifications Based on IEC 60825-1:2007

Max. Optical Pulse Width (s)/ Emitted Beam
Model Name Class Output Power Repetition Rate Wavelength Divergence Laser Aperture Built-in Laser
(mW)* (nm) (deg)
MU100010A 1 0.5 CW 850 31.9 Figure 1,[1],[2] Table 2 (a)
1 0.5 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (b)
1 2.0 CW 1550 11.5 Table 2 (c)
1 0.8 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (d)
1 2.0 CW 1550 11.5 Table 2 (e)
1 2.0 CW 1550 11.5 Table 2 (f)
1 1.0 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (g)
1 2.0 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (h)
1 2.0 CW 1550 11.5 Table 2 (i)
1 1.0 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (j)
1 3.2 CW 1550 11.5 Table 2 (k)
1 0.6 CW 850 31.9 Table 2 (l)
1 1.1 CW 1310 11.5 Table 2 (m)
1 0.04 CW 1310 31.9 Table 2 (n)
1 0.6 CW 850 31.9 Table 2 (o)
1 0.8 CW 850 31.9 Table 2 (p)
* Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every reasonably foreseeable single-fault
condition is included.
565
Support
Table 2 Specifications of Laser Built into MU100010A

Max. Optical Emitted Beam
Model Output Power Pulse Width (s)/ Wavelength Divergence
Repetition Rate
(mW)* (nm) (deg)
(a) G0311A 0.5 CW 850 31.9
(b) G0312A 0.5 CW 1310 11.5
(c) G0313A 2.0 CW 1550 11.5
(d) G0315A 0.8 CW 1310 11.5
(e) G0316A 2.0 CW 1550 11.5
(f) G0318A 2.0 CW 1550 11.5
(g) G0319A 1.0 CW 1310 11.5
(h) G0320A 2.0 CW 1310 11.5
(i) G0321A 2.0 CW 1550 11.5
(j) G0322A 1.0 CW 1310 11.5
(k) G0323A 3.2 CW 1550 11.5
(l) G0328A 0.6 CW 850 31.9
(m) G0329A 1.1 CW 1310 11.5
(n) G0332A 0.04 CW 1310 31.9
(o) G0333A 0.6 CW 850 31.9
(p) G0356A 0.8 CW 850 31.9
* Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every reasonably
foreseeable single-fault condition is included.
12.12.2 Indication Labels on Product

Table 3 Labels on Product
Type Label Affix to Model Name
1 Explanation Figure 2,A MU100010A
2 Certification Figure 2,B MU100010A
3 Identification Figure 2,C MU100010A
4 Warning Figure 2,D MU100010A
566
Laser Safety
12.12.3 Laser Radiation Markings
Figure 1: Locations of laser beam aperture
Figure 2: Locations of affixed labels
567
Support
12.13 Wireless Certification

12.13.1 Japan MIC
MT1000A has obtained the certification of construction type of specified radio

equipment.
12.13.2 North America (USA FCC and Canada IC)
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes :
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage.

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless
devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range
while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by
heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF
exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been
confirmed by additional research. MT1000A has been tested and found to
comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
568
Wireless Certification
Les connaissances scientifiques dont nous disposons n'ont mis en évidence

aucun probème de santé associé à l'usage des appareils sans fil à faible
puissance. Nous ne sommes cependant pas en mesure de prouver que ces
appareils sans fil à faible puissance sont entièrement sans danger. Les appareils
sans fil à faible puissance émettent une énergie radioélectrique (RF) très faible
dans le spectre des micro-ondes lorsqu'ils sont utilisés. Alors qu'une dose
élevée de RF peut avoir des effets sur la santé (en chauffant les tissus),
l'exposition à de faibles RF qui ne produisent pas de chaleur n'a pas de
mauvais effets connus sur la santé. De nombreuses études ont été menées sur
les expositions aux RF faibles et n'ont découvert aucun effet biologique.
Certaines études ont suggéré qu'il pouvait y avoir certains effets biologiques,
mais ces résultats n'ont pas été confirmés par des recherches supplémentaires.
MT1000A a été testé et jugé conforme aux limites d'exposition aux
rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les
régles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition et
d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC.
12.13.3 Europe CE
Hereby, Anritsu Corporation, declares that this instrument is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
12.13.4 Brazil ANATEL
This equipment is certified by ANATEL in accordance with the regulated

procedure by Resolution 242/2000 and meets the applicable technical
requirements, including exposure limits of Specific Absorption Rate related to
electric fields, magnetic and electromagnetic radio frequency, in accordance
with the Resolution No. 303/2002 and 533/2009.
This device complies with the RF exposure guidelines when positioned at least
0 cm away from the body. For more information, see the website of ANATEL -
www.anatel.gov.br
Este produto está homologado pela Anatel, de acordo com os procedimentos

regulamentados pela Resolução n°242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos
aplicados, incluindo os limites de exposição da Taxa de Absorção Específica
referente a campos elétricos, magnéticos e eletromagnéticos de
radiofrequência, de acordo com as Resoluções n° 303/2002 e 533/2009. Este
dispositivo está em conformidade com as diretrizes de exposição á
radiofrequência quando posicionado a pelo menos 0 centímetros de distância
do corpo. Para maiores informações, consulte o site da Anatel -
www.anatel.gov.br
569
Support
12.13.5 China SRRC
12.13.6 Indonesia SDPPI
MT1000A is certified SDPPI wireless certification.
12.13.7 Israel MoC
570
Wireless Certification
12.13.8 Mexico IFETEL
IFETEL certification number: RCPANMT14-0759
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
1. It is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful

interference.
2. This equipment or device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: :
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia prejudicial.

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
12.13.9 Philippines NTC
MT1000A is certified NTC wireless certification.
12.13.10 Russia CU Scheme and Minsvyaz
MT1000A is certified CU scheme and Minsvyaz wireless certification.
Contact information:
"Uniservis" Ltd.
1st Vladimirovskaya street, building 20A, 1st floor, premises 1, room 17,
Moscow 111123, Russia. OGRN 5107746076873.
12.13.11 Singapore IMDA
MT1000A is certified IMDA wireless certification.
12.13.12 Thailand NTC
This telecommunication equipment is in compliance with NTC requirements.
571
Support
12.14 Declarations
12.14.1 Notes on Export Management
This product and its manuals may require an Export License/Approval by the
Government of the product's country of origin for re-export from your country.
Before re-exporting the product or manuals, please contact us to confirm

whether they are export-controlled items or not.
When you dispose of export-controlled items, the products/manuals need to be

broken/shredded so as to be unlawfully used for military purposes.
12.14.2 Information for EU and EFTA Customers Only
Please recycle the battery
The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery. The
battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local
laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste. Check
with your local solid-waste disposal officials for details of recycling options or
proper disposal in your area.
Before disposing of this product, discharge the battery and mail it to your
Anritsu Service or Sales office.
1. Disconnect the AC adapter, if used.

2. Turn the power switch to on.
3. Leave the product on until the power indicator goes off; the battery is now
discharged.
4. Remove the battery.
5. Insulate the battery terminals with adhesive tape.
6. Please recycle in accordance with your national or regional legislation.
Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with council
directive 2012/19/EU (the "WEEE directive") in European Union.
For products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact your local
Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to arrange disposal in
accordance with your initial contract and the local law.
12.14.3 Information for U.S. Customers Only
Please recycle the battery
572
Declarations
The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery. The
battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local
laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste
stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for
recycling options or proper disposal.
Before disposing of this product, discharge the battery and mail it to your
Anritsu Service or Sales office.
1. Attach the battery pack to the product.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter, if used.
3. Turn the power switch to ON.
4. Leave the product on until the power indicator goes off; the battery is now
discharged.
5. Remove the battery.
6. Insulate the battery terminals with adhesive tape.
7. Mail it to your Anritsu Service or Sales office, or to the address shown below.
ANRITSU COMPANY
490 Jarvis Drive, Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809, USA
12.14.4 Information for the Chinese Market Only
Concerning declaration of China RoHS, please see the note below.

China RoHS is not 100% identical to the European (EU) RoHS. EU RoHS has exemptions
for Pb and Hg in various alloys, soldering, displays and other products. The China RoHS
declaration in the next table does NOT comply with EU RoHS.
573

MT1000A Operation Manual English 15 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MT1000A Operation Manual English 15 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MT1000A Operation Manual English 15 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MT1000A

For safety and warning information, please read this

Document No. M-W3682AE-15.0

25 June 2014 (First Edition)

Copyright © 2014-2017, ANRITSU CORPORATION.

MT1000A/MU100010A Network Master Pro Operation Manual (this manual)

Chapter 4 consists of a general introduction to the GUI. Chapters 5-9 contain

5.4.3 Status Information 153

12.14 Declarations 572

Fault location is greatly facilitated by the high degree of portability of the

Altogether, these features guarantee the supreme functionality of the Network

For latest information, refer to the homepage below.

1.2 10G Multirate Module

1.3 High Performance GPS Disciplined Oscillator

*1: One pulse per second

The built-in GPS receiver can provide following:

3.3V or 5V antenna feeding

MU100090A Block Diagram

1.4 Symbols and Conventions

To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction,

This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-

1.4.2 Safety Symbols Used on Equipment

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is indicated

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

A number of typographical conventions are used for easy spotting of

1.5 For Safety

FOR CALIFORNIA USA ONLY

Laser radiation warning

Calibration The performance-guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the equipment. To

The following conditions may be observed if the battery has expired:

If this media is mishandled or becomes faulty, important data may be lost. It is

For details on life-span, refer to the corresponding section in this manual.

LCD: Brightness at 50% after 40,000hrs

Use in Residential This equipment is designed for an industrial environment. In a residential

Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases.

1.5.4 Cautions Against Computer Virus Infection

Copying files and data

Install MT1000A horizontally in a stable place.

1.6.2 ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)

Electrostatic discharge during installation can result in destruction or

Minimize the exposure to ESD

Return ESD sensitive items to antistatic shielding packaging.

1.6.3 Optical Surfaces

The optical interfaces - transmitter as well as receiver - are very sensitive to

Correct functioning of the instrument can only be ensured if optical modules,

1.6.4 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables

Optical fiber cables may degrade in performance or be damaged if handled

Do not excessively bend, fold, or pinch an optical fiber cable.

Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable.

Doing so may cause Rubidium oscillator to break or the performance to

1.6.5 Caution when handling MU100090A

Doing so may cause the built-in Rubidium oscillator to damage or the

1.6.7 Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use

2.1 Delivered Accessories

2.1.1 Standard Accessories

The following standard accessories are delivered with the instrument:

2.1.2 Optional Accessories